Krone BA BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5 (BM105-24) Operating Instructions


Add to my manuals
418 Pages

advertisement

Krone BA BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5 (BM105-24) Operating Instructions | Manualzz
Original operating instructions
Document number: 150001101_09_us
Version: 21/11/2023
BM105-24
Mower conditioner
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
From machine number: 1147316
Contact
Krone North America, Inc.
12121 Forest Dr.
Olive Branch, MS 38654
U.S.A.
Phone
Fax
Email
Internet
+ 1 662 913-7171
+ 1 662 913-7137
[email protected]
www.krone-northamerica.com
Information for enquiries and orders
Model
Vehicle identification number
Year of manufacture
Your dealer's contact details
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
2
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
For information on your KRONE machines, also refer to mykrone.green. After you have
registered, you can generate and manage your machines via the machine number so that you
can view the machine data. Via your personal account, you can also access all KRONE
Services.
Technical Information Center (TIC)
Technical and service-relevant information on your KRONE machines can also be found in the
Technical Information Center. All information can be searched using a full-text search, such as
operating instructions, spare parts information, training documents (qualification-based), error
code and parameter descriptions, guided troubleshooting, video tutorials and much more.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
3
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Table of contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
1.6.7
Information on This Document ...............................................................................................
Validity .......................................................................................................................................
Significance of the document .....................................................................................................
Re-ordering ................................................................................................................................
Applicable documents ................................................................................................................
Target group of this document ...................................................................................................
How to use this document..........................................................................................................
Directories and references .........................................................................................................
Information on direction .............................................................................................................
Term “machine”..........................................................................................................................
Figures .......................................................................................................................................
Scope of the document ..............................................................................................................
Means of representation ............................................................................................................
Conversion table ........................................................................................................................
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
16
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.4.12
2.4.13
2.4.14
2.4.15
2.4.16
2.4.17
2.4.18
2.4.19
2.4.20
2.4.21
2.4.22
2.4.23
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
Safety ........................................................................................................................................
Intended use ..............................................................................................................................
Reasonably foreseeable misuse ................................................................................................
Service life of the machine .........................................................................................................
Basic safety instructions ............................................................................................................
Importance of operating instructions ..........................................................................................
Personnel qualification of the operating personnel ....................................................................
Personnel qualification of the technicians ..................................................................................
Children in danger......................................................................................................................
Structural modifications on the machine ....................................................................................
Additional equipment and spare parts .......................................................................................
Jobs on the machine ..................................................................................................................
Operational safety: Technically sound condition........................................................................
Danger zones.............................................................................................................................
Ensuring functionality of safety devices .....................................................................................
Personal protective equipment ..................................................................................................
Safety sign on the machine........................................................................................................
Road safety ................................................................................................................................
Parking the machine safely .......................................................................................................
Consumables .............................................................................................................................
Chemicals ..................................................................................................................................
Dangers arising from environment .............................................................................................
Sources of danger on the machine ............................................................................................
Dangers in connection with certain activities: climbing up and down ........................................
Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine ....................................
Dangers in connection with certain activities: checking and charging batteries ........................
Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres ..............................
Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents .....................................................
Safety routines ...........................................................................................................................
Shutting down and safeguarding the machine ...........................................................................
Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering ..................................................
Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely .......................................
Running actuator test .................................................................................................................
Safety sign on the machine........................................................................................................
Information signs on the machine ..............................................................................................
Safety features ...........................................................................................................................
SMV emblem .............................................................................................................................
Fire extinguisher ........................................................................................................................
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
22
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
29
30
31
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
34
35
55
62
64
65
3
Data memory ............................................................................................................................ 66
4
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
Machine Description ................................................................................................................
Machine overview ......................................................................................................................
Content of the storage compartments on the machine ..............................................................
Labelling.....................................................................................................................................
Lighting ......................................................................................................................................
Road travel lighting ....................................................................................................................
67
67
68
69
70
70
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
4
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Table of contents
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
Working lights ............................................................................................................................
Maintenance lighting ..................................................................................................................
Overload protection on the machine ..........................................................................................
Functional description of self-propelled mower conditioner .......................................................
Functional description of GNSS receiver ...................................................................................
SectionControl function description ...........................................................................................
Functional description of parallel tracking ..................................................................................
Functional description of GPS guidance ....................................................................................
Function description of swath width CV .....................................................................................
71
71
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
5.9.5
5.10
Technical Data..........................................................................................................................
Dimensions ................................................................................................................................
Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel) .................................................................
Engine data ................................................................................................................................
Traction drive .............................................................................................................................
Electrical system ........................................................................................................................
Airborne noise emission.............................................................................................................
Ambient temperature .................................................................................................................
Vibration values .........................................................................................................................
Consumables .............................................................................................................................
Oils .............................................................................................................................................
Lubricating grease .....................................................................................................................
Coolant.......................................................................................................................................
Refrigerant (air conditioning)......................................................................................................
Fuel/urea ....................................................................................................................................
Tyres ..........................................................................................................................................
76
76
76
76
77
77
77
77
77
77
78
80
80
80
80
80
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.1.1
6.3.1.2
6.3.1.3
6.3.1.4
6.3.1.5
6.3.1.6
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.15.1
6.15.2
6.15.3
6.15.4
6.15.5
6.15.6
6.15.7
6.15.8
6.16
6.16.1
Control and Display Elements ................................................................................................ 82
Overview of operating elements ................................................................................................ 82
Opening doors and windows of cabin ....................................................................................... 82
Control and display elements on the steering column ............................................................... 85
Steering column switch .............................................................................................................. 85
Activating horn ........................................................................................................................... 85
Switching direction indicators on/off........................................................................................... 86
Switching parking light, dipped beam and work lightings on/off................................................. 86
Switching full beam on/off .......................................................................................................... 87
Actuating headlamp flasher ....................................................................................................... 88
Switching windshield wipers on/off ........................................................................................... 88
Indicator and warning lamps ...................................................................................................... 89
Switching the flashing warning light on/off ................................................................................. 90
Actuating service brake.............................................................................................................. 90
Mirror adjuster ............................................................................................................................ 91
Setting the anti-collision mirror................................................................................................... 91
Keypad for wiper and warning beacon....................................................................................... 92
Ladder lighting ........................................................................................................................... 93
Interior lighting ........................................................................................................................... 94
Operating elements on control lever .......................................................................................... 95
Control and display elements on the keypad ............................................................................. 97
Main mode switch ...................................................................................................................... 99
Quick-stop switch ..................................................................................................................... 100
Ignition lock .............................................................................................................................. 100
Automatic climate control ......................................................................................................... 101
Overview of automatic climate control ..................................................................................... 101
Switching on automatic climate control .................................................................................... 102
Setting cabin temperature ........................................................................................................ 103
Switching air conditioning mode on/off .................................................................................... 104
Switching REHEAT mode on/off .............................................................................................. 104
Manually setting the evaporator fan speed .............................................................................. 105
Switching temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit ................ 106
Malfunctions indicated on display ............................................................................................ 106
Sockets .................................................................................................................................... 107
Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket ........................................................................................... 107
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
5
Table of contents
6.16.2
6.16.3
6.16.4
12 V sockets ............................................................................................................................ 108
Diagnostics sockets ................................................................................................................. 109
USB connection ....................................................................................................................... 109
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Initial operation ......................................................................................................................
Checklist for initial operation ....................................................................................................
Mounting fire extinguisher ........................................................................................................
Mounting licence plate .............................................................................................................
Mounting guard cloths..............................................................................................................
Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module .................................................................
110
110
111
112
113
119
8
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.1.1
8.2.1.2
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
Start-up ...................................................................................................................................
Check before start-up ..............................................................................................................
Setting driver’s seat .................................................................................................................
Air-cushioned comfort seat ......................................................................................................
Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "Standard" version)................................................
Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "ACTIVO" version).................................................
Steering column adjustment ....................................................................................................
Setting the terminal ..................................................................................................................
Sun visor ..................................................................................................................................
Adjustable air nozzles ..............................................................................................................
Inside rear mirror......................................................................................................................
General aspects .......................................................................................................................
Instructional seat ......................................................................................................................
Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox")....................................................................
Topping up fresh water ............................................................................................................
Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions.....................................................................
120
120
121
121
122
124
128
129
130
130
131
131
131
132
132
132
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.12.1
Commissioning – mowing operation ...................................................................................
Connecting the front mounted mower ......................................................................................
Decoupling the front mounted mower ......................................................................................
Mounting the side mounted mowers ........................................................................................
Dismounting the side mounted mowers ...................................................................................
Mounting components "swathing" ............................................................................................
Dismounting the "swathing" components.................................................................................
Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV" components ...........................................................
Mounting the cross conveyor ...................................................................................................
Dismounting the cross conveyor ..............................................................................................
Mounting the rear weight .........................................................................................................
Removing the rear weight ........................................................................................................
Adjusting GPS guidance ..........................................................................................................
Adjusting overlapping and beds ...............................................................................................
134
134
138
140
143
147
150
152
154
157
160
161
162
163
10
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.2
10.2.1
10.3
10.4
10.4.1
10.4.2
10.4.3
10.4.3.1
10.4.4
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.6
10.7
Driving and Transport ...........................................................................................................
Preparing the machine for road travel......................................................................................
Transport position ....................................................................................................................
Checking lockings of lateral mowers........................................................................................
Checking side guards of lateral mowers ..................................................................................
Starting engine .........................................................................................................................
Observing indicator and warning lamps ...................................................................................
Behaviour after the engine has stalled.....................................................................................
Starting up the machine ...........................................................................................................
Setting the acceleration behaviour...........................................................................................
Notices on driving the machine ................................................................................................
Driving forwards and stopping .................................................................................................
Cruise control ...........................................................................................................................
Driving backward and stopping ................................................................................................
Stopping the machine ..............................................................................................................
Stopping machine by using control lever .................................................................................
Stopping machine with the service brake ................................................................................
Applying parking brake ............................................................................................................
Switching off the engine ...........................................................................................................
165
165
165
166
166
167
169
169
170
170
171
171
172
173
173
174
175
175
177
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
6
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Table of contents
10.8
10.9
10.10
10.11
10.11.1
10.12
10.12.1
10.12.2
Fitting wheel chocks.................................................................................................................
Main battery switch ..................................................................................................................
Parking the machine ................................................................................................................
Recovering the Machine ..........................................................................................................
Release the parking brake manually........................................................................................
Preparing the machine for shipment ........................................................................................
Lashing the machine ................................................................................................................
Removing the machine wheels ................................................................................................
177
178
179
179
180
181
182
182
11
11.1
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.2.1
11.1.3
11.1.4
11.1.5
11.2
11.3
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.5
11.5.1
11.5.2
11.6
11.7
11.8
Operation ................................................................................................................................
Field Mode ...............................................................................................................................
Working position ......................................................................................................................
Field mode on slopes ...............................................................................................................
Moving front mounted mower into the central position ............................................................
Operating mowers....................................................................................................................
Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing) ....................................................................
Switching the mower drive on and off ......................................................................................
Folding up/folding down side guards .......................................................................................
Front guard ..............................................................................................................................
Folding up the front guard ........................................................................................................
Fold down the front guard ........................................................................................................
Operating support jack .............................................................................................................
Moving support jack into transport position..............................................................................
Moving support jack into support position ................................................................................
Inclination sensor .....................................................................................................................
Distribution of traction ..............................................................................................................
Side shift front mounted mower ...............................................................................................
PowerSplit ................................................................................................................................
Operating SectionControl.........................................................................................................
Operating GPS guidance .........................................................................................................
183
183
184
184
185
185
187
188
189
191
191
191
192
192
193
193
193
193
193
195
196
12
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
Terminal ..................................................................................................................................
Display design..........................................................................................................................
Description display ...................................................................................................................
Navigation module ...................................................................................................................
Possible terminals ....................................................................................................................
Input window ............................................................................................................................
Selection window .....................................................................................................................
198
198
199
199
201
201
203
13
13.1
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.3.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
Terminal machine functions .................................................................................................
Status line ................................................................................................................................
Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel..............................................................
Warning lamps – urea tank filling level ....................................................................................
Warning lamps – urea quality, errors or manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system .
Warning lamps – load condition diesel particulate filter ...........................................................
Keys in the title bar ..................................................................................................................
“Counters” menu ......................................................................................................................
“Error” menu.............................................................................................................................
Main menu ...............................................................................................................................
Direct input “Field mode”..........................................................................................................
Information area .......................................................................................................................
Engine and driving data display range .....................................................................................
Traction drive indicator lights ...................................................................................................
205
206
209
210
211
212
213
213
222
226
226
227
227
230
14
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.3.1
14.4
14.5
14.6
Terminal – Menus...................................................................................................................
Menu structure .........................................................................................................................
Bringing up menu level ............................................................................................................
Navigating in menus ................................................................................................................
Changing/saving parameter .....................................................................................................
“Diagnostics” menu explanation...............................................................................................
Menu "key test" explanation.....................................................................................................
"Lighting" menu ........................................................................................................................
233
233
241
242
243
243
245
246
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
7
Table of contents
14.7
"Mirror" menu ........................................................................................................................... 247
15
15.1
15.1.1
15.1.2
15.1.3
15.2
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
15.2.4
15.2.5
15.2.6
15.2.7
15.2.8
15.3
15.3.1
15.3.2
15.3.3
15.3.4
15.3.5
15.3.6
15.3.7
15.3.8
15.3.9
15.3.10
15.3.11
Settings ...................................................................................................................................
Setting in the terminal ..............................................................................................................
Manual settings ........................................................................................................................
Setting cutting height ...............................................................................................................
Setting the mower relief ...........................................................................................................
Settings on front mounted mower ............................................................................................
Setting the side guards on the front mounted mower ..............................................................
Set conditioner speed ..............................................................................................................
Setting the degree of conditioning ...........................................................................................
Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower with high-cut skids.....................................
Setting wide spreading.............................................................................................................
Setting swath width ..................................................................................................................
Checking deflector sheets........................................................................................................
Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower...............................................................
Settings on the side mounted mowers .....................................................................................
Setting the side guards on the side mounted mowers .............................................................
Checking/setting locking of side guards...................................................................................
Setting the conditioner speed ..................................................................................................
Setting the auger speed ...........................................................................................................
Adjusting the scraper sheet .....................................................................................................
Setting the degree of conditioning ...........................................................................................
Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted mowers by means of high-cut skids ..........
Setting wide spreading.............................................................................................................
Setting wide spreading sheet ...................................................................................................
Impact damage protection system ...........................................................................................
Dismounting the bottom flap ....................................................................................................
249
249
249
250
251
253
253
254
255
255
255
256
257
257
258
258
259
260
260
264
265
265
266
267
267
268
16
16.1
16.2
16.2.1
16.2.2
16.2.3
16.2.4
16.2.5
16.2.6
16.2.7
16.2.8
16.2.9
16.2.10
16.2.11
16.2.12
16.2.13
16.2.14
16.2.15
16.2.16
16.2.17
16.2.18
16.2.19
16.2.20
16.3
16.4
Maintenance - General Information ......................................................................................
Observe the service record booklet .........................................................................................
Maintenance table....................................................................................................................
Maintenance – Before the season ...........................................................................................
Maintenance – After the season ..............................................................................................
Maintenance - once after 1 hour .............................................................................................
Maintenance – Once after 10 hours.........................................................................................
Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours ............................................................................
Maintenance - Once after 50 hours .........................................................................................
Maintenance – Once after 500 hours.......................................................................................
Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km ........................................................................................
Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season.................................................................
Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a day ...........................................................
Maintenance - Every 50 hours .................................................................................................
Maintenance - every 100 hours ...............................................................................................
Maintenance - every 250 hours ...............................................................................................
Maintenance - Every 500 hours ...............................................................................................
Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the end of the season ..................................
Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least before the season..........................................
Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours ..........................................................................................
Maintenance – Every 2 years ..................................................................................................
Maintenance – Every 4500 hours ............................................................................................
Maintenance - as required .......................................................................................................
Tightening torques ...................................................................................................................
Cleaning the machine ..............................................................................................................
269
269
270
270
271
272
272
272
272
273
273
273
273
274
274
275
275
276
277
277
278
278
278
278
281
17
17.1
17.2
17.2.1
17.3
17.3.1
17.3.2
Maintenance - Engine ............................................................................................................
Engine overview ......................................................................................................................
Dirt deposits in engine compartment .......................................................................................
Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air ................................................................
Engine oil level .........................................................................................................................
Checking engine oil level ........................................................................................................
Topping up engine oil...............................................................................................................
283
283
284
284
284
285
286
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
8
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Table of contents
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
17.10
17.11
17.12
17.12.1
17.12.2
17.12.3
17.12.4
17.12.5
17.13
17.14
Cleaning fuel tank ....................................................................................................................
Fuel prefilter/water separator ...................................................................................................
Refuelling .................................................................................................................................
Urea filter .................................................................................................................................
Topping up urea solution .........................................................................................................
Venting the fuel prefilter/water separator .................................................................................
Engine coolant .........................................................................................................................
Checking the engine coolant level ...........................................................................................
Checking engine piping............................................................................................................
Checking pipework in the air conditioning and heating system ...............................................
Check pipework of the engine cooling system and the charge air ...........................................
Checking pipework of the air intake .........................................................................................
Checking fuel lines ...................................................................................................................
Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment system ............................................................
Cleaning air filter ......................................................................................................................
Shutting down the diesel engine ..............................................................................................
287
288
289
290
291
293
294
295
296
296
297
297
298
298
299
300
18
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.3.1
18.3.2
18.3.3
18.3.4
18.3.5
18.4
18.5
18.5.1
18.5.2
18.5.3
18.6
18.6.1
18.6.2
18.6.3
18.7
18.7.1
18.7.2
18.8
18.9
18.10
Maintenance – Basic Machine ..............................................................................................
Cleaning the windows and outside rear-view mirrors of the cabin ...........................................
Checking/refilling windscreen washer system .........................................................................
Maintaining air conditioning and heating..................................................................................
Components of air conditioning ...............................................................................................
Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/dryer ..............................................................
Checking the condition and filling quantity of refrigerant ........................................................
Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter .............................................................................................
Replacing/cleaning circulation filter..........................................................................................
Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment ................................................................................
Maintaining chassis..................................................................................................................
Checking attachment of steering cylinder ................................................................................
Checking fitting of track rod .....................................................................................................
Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version ..................................
Maintaining belt drives ............................................................................................................
Checking kraftband ..................................................................................................................
Checking pulley........................................................................................................................
Checking the belt tension.........................................................................................................
Maintaining tyres and wheels...................................................................................................
Checking/maintaining tyres ......................................................................................................
Retighten wheel nuts ...............................................................................................................
Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis................................................
Re-adjust the transport lock .....................................................................................................
Checking the fire extinguisher..................................................................................................
302
302
302
303
304
305
305
306
307
307
308
308
309
309
310
310
310
311
312
312
312
313
313
314
19
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.5.1
19.5.2
19.5.3
19.5.4
19.5.5
19.5.6
19.5.7
19.5.8
19.6
19.7
19.7.1
19.7.2
19.7.3
19.7.4
Maintenance – mowing units ................................................................................................
Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard..................................................................
Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front mounted mower input gearbox ........................
Opening/closing conditioning sheet side mounted mowers .....................................................
Dismounting/mounting the guard of the auger drive ................................................................
Maintaining belt drives .............................................................................................................
Checking kraftband ..................................................................................................................
Checking pulley........................................................................................................................
Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front mounted mower conditioner drive.................
Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt tension front mounted mower ..................
Checking/setting belt tension of auger drive ............................................................................
Relieving/tensioning belt drive of auger drive ..........................................................................
Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted mowers” ...........................................................
Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted mower" ...........................................................
Checking the tines on the tine conditioner ...............................................................................
Cutterbar ..................................................................................................................................
Rotary hub ...............................................................................................................................
Replacing the shear bolt at the rotary hub ...............................................................................
Check/change blades ..............................................................................................................
Check/replace retaining bolts...................................................................................................
315
315
316
316
317
317
317
318
318
319
320
321
322
325
326
327
327
329
330
333
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
9
Table of contents
19.7.5
19.7.6
19.7.7
19.7.8
19.8
19.9
19.10
Checking/replacing the blade carrier .......................................................................................
Checking impact stops on the cutterbar...................................................................................
Check/replace cutting discs/mower drums ..............................................................................
Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter bar ...............................................................
Check guard cloths ..................................................................................................................
Vent friction clutch....................................................................................................................
Raising mowers .......................................................................................................................
335
338
339
341
346
346
348
20
20.1
20.2
20.3
Maintenance - Lubrication ....................................................................................................
Lubricating universal shafts .....................................................................................................
Lubricate the intermediate gear ...............................................................................................
Lubrication chart - machine......................................................................................................
351
351
353
354
21
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
Maintenance – Central Lubrication System .......................................................................
Lubricants ................................................................................................................................
Filling the lubricant tank ...........................................................................................................
Check filling level .....................................................................................................................
Starting intermediate lubrication ..............................................................................................
357
357
358
359
359
22
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
Maintenance - Hydraulic System ..........................................................................................
Pressure limiting valves ...........................................................................................................
Hydraulic oil .............................................................................................................................
Maintaining hydraulic oil tank ...................................................................................................
Changing high-pressure filter ...................................................................................................
Checking hydraulic hoses ........................................................................................................
Draining oil from the trailing oil line ..........................................................................................
361
361
362
362
365
365
365
23
23.1
23.1.1
23.1.2
23.1.3
23.2
Maintenance – Electrics ........................................................................................................
Batteries ...................................................................................................................................
Cleaning and maintaining batteries..........................................................................................
Charging batteries....................................................................................................................
Replacing batteries .................................................................................................................
Maintaining starter ...................................................................................................................
367
368
368
369
369
372
24
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4
24.5
24.6
24.6.1
Maintenance - Gearbox .........................................................................................................
Overview of gearboxes ............................................................................................................
Maintaining transfer gearbox ...................................................................................................
Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower .................................................................
Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower .................................................................
Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers ....................................................................
Maintaining wheel hub gearbox ...............................................................................................
Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right ...............................................................................
373
373
374
376
377
378
379
379
25
25.1
25.1.1
25.1.2
25.1.3
25.1.4
25.1.5
25.2
25.2.1
25.2.2
25.3
25.4
25.5
25.6
25.7
25.8
25.9
25.10
25.11
25.12
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy..........................................................................................
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics..................................................................................
Overview of control units..........................................................................................................
Overview of fuses ....................................................................................................................
Overview sensors ....................................................................................................................
Overview of actuators ..............................................................................................................
Faults on the camera ...............................................................................................................
Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit ...............................................................................
Distributor blocks of central lubrication system ........................................................................
Searching for the error in the central lubrication system..........................................................
External starting of the machine ..............................................................................................
Calibrate mower load relief ......................................................................................................
Calibrate traction drive .............................................................................................................
Calibrating the axles ................................................................................................................
Calibrating cutting height .........................................................................................................
Finely calibrating the cutting height..........................................................................................
Calibrating inertial sensor (inclination sensor) .........................................................................
Calibrating end positions of the mowers ..................................................................................
Car jack contact points.............................................................................................................
Jacking up the machine ...........................................................................................................
381
381
381
381
385
386
387
388
388
392
392
393
394
394
396
398
399
400
402
403
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
10
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Table of contents
26
Waste disposal ....................................................................................................................... 406
27
Index........................................................................................................................................ 407
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
11
1
Information on This Document
1.1
Validity
1
Information on This Document
1.1
Validity
This document is valid for machines of type:
BM105-24 (BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5)
All information, illustrations and technical data in this document correspond to the latest state at
the time of publication.
We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.
1.2
Significance of the document
This is an important document. It is addressed to the user and contains safety-relevant
information.
„ Prior to starting work, read the complete document and observe its contents.
„ Keep this document ready to hand for the user of the machine.
„ Hand over this document to subsequent users.
1.3
Re-ordering
If this document has become completely or partially unusable or if another language is required,
you can request a replacement document by quoting the document number indicated on the
cover sheet. The document can additionally be downloaded via KRONE MEDIA or via the
Technical Information Center (TIC).
KRONE Media
1.4
Technical Information Center (TIC)
Applicable documents
To ensure that the machine is used safely and as intended, observe the following further
applicable documents.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.5
Operating instructions for diesel engine, Liebherr Machines Bulle S.A.
Operating instructions for universal shaft
Operating instructions for CCI terminal (for "CCI 800", "CCI 1200" version)
Supplement to operating instructions "Error messages, information messages and
parameters"
Circuit diagram, KRONE
Spare parts list, KRONE
Service record booklet, KRONE
Target group of this document
This document aims at the operator of the machine who fulfills the minimum requirements of
personnel qualification,see Page 19.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
12
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
1.6
How to use this document
1.6.1
Directories and references
Information on This Document
1
How to use this document
1.6
Contents/headers
The contents and headers in this document ensure quick orientation in the chapters.
Index
The index contains catchwords in alphabetical order which enable to find information on a
desired topic easily. The index can be found on the last pages of this document.
Cross references
Cross references to another place in the document or to another document are in the text with
page number.
Examples:
•
•
1.6.2
Check the tight seat of all screws on the machine, see Page 13. (INFO: If you use an
electronic version of this document, click on the link to go to the specified page.)
For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the universal shaft
manufacturer.
Information on direction
Directional information in this document, such as front, rear, right and left, applies in the
direction of travel of the machine.
1.6.3
Term “machine”
Throughout the rest of this document, the “mower conditioner” will also be referred to as the
“machine”.
1.6.4
Figures
The figures in this document do not always represent the exact machine type. The information
that refers to the figure always corresponds to the machine type of this document.
1.6.5
Scope of the document
In addition to standard equipment, accessories kits and versions of the machine are described
in this document. Your machine may deviate from this document.
1.6.6
Means of representation
Icons in the text
The following means of representation (icons) are used to present the text more clearly:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
13
1
Information on This Document
1.6
How to use this document
This arrow characterizes an action step. Several arrows in a row identify a sequence of
actions to be performed step by step.
This icon identifies a prerequisite that has to be fulfilled to perform an action step or a
sequence of actions.
This arrow marks the intermediate result of an action step.
This arrow identifies the result of an action step or sequence of actions.
This bullet point identifies an enumeration. If the bullet point is intended, it identifies the
second level of the enumeration.
Icons in figures
The following icons can be used in illustrations:
Icon
Explanation
1
Reference sign for part
X
Dimensions (e. g. also W = width,
H = height, L = length)
LH
Left side of machine
Icon
Explanation
Position of a part (e.g. move from
position I to position II)
I
Magnification of display detail
RH
Right side of machine
Direction of travel
Direction of motion
Reference line for visible material
Reference line for covered material
Centre line
Cable routes
Open
Closed
Apply liquid lubricant (e.g. lubricating oil)
Apply lubricating grease
Warning signs
Warnings of dangers are separated from the remaining text as warning signs and are identified
with a danger sign and signal words.
The warning signs must be read and the measures must be observed in order to prevent
personal injury.
Explanation of danger sign
This is the danger sign that warns of a risk of injury.
Please observe all notes marked with the danger sign in order to avoid injuries or death.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
14
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Information on This Document
1
How to use this document
1.6
Explanation of signal words
DANGER
The signal word DANGER warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries
or death if the warning sign is ignored.
WARNING
The signal word WARNING warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries
or death if the warning sign is ignored.
CAUTION
The signal word CAUTION warns of a hazardous situation which will result in minor to
moderate injuries if the warning sign is ignored.
Example of a warning sign:
WARNING
Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles
When cleaning with compressed air, dirt particles are ejected at high speed and could get into
the eyes. Therefore eyes could be hurt.
„ Keep people away from the working area.
„ Wear personal protective equipment when performing cleaning work with compressed air
(e.g. eye protection).
Warnings of property damage/environmental damage
Warnings of property/environmental damage are separated from the remaining text and marked
with "Notice".
Example:
NOTICE
Gearbox damage due to low oil level
The gearboxes could be damaged when the oil level is too low.
„ Check gear oil level at regular intervals and top up oil, if necessary.
„ Check gear oil level approx. 3 to 4 hours after the machine has been switched off. Check
oil level only when machine is in horizontal position.
Notices with information and recommendations
Additional information and recommendations for trouble-free and productive operation of the
machine are separated from the remaining text and marked with “Information”.
Example:
INFO
Each safety sign is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the
manufacturer or from an authorised specialist dealer.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
15
1
Information on This Document
1.6
How to use this document
1.6.7
Conversion table
The following table can be used to convert metric units into US units.
Size
SI units (metric)
Unit name
Abbreviation
Factor
Inch-pound units
Unit name
Abbreviation
Area
Hectare
2.47105
Acre
acres
Volume flow
Litres per minute L/min
0.2642
gpm
Cubic metres
per hour
m³/h
4.4029
US gallons per
minute
Force
Newton
N
0.2248
Pound force
lbf
Length
Millimetre
mm
0.03937
Inch
in.
Metre
m
3.2808
Foot
ft.
Power
Kilowatt
kW
1.3410
Horsepower
hp
Pressure
Kilopascal
kPa
0.1450
psi
Megapascal
MPa
145.0377
Pounds per
square inch
bar (non-SI)
bar
14.5038
Newtonmeter
Nm
0.7376
pound-foot or
foot-pound
ft∙lbf
8.8507
pound-inch or
inch-pound
in∙lbf
Torque
ha
Temperature
Degrees Celsius °C
°Cx1.8+32
Degrees
Fahrenheit
°F
Velocity
Metres per
minute
m/min
3.2808
Feet per minute
ft/min
Metres per
second
m/s
3.2808
Feet per second ft/s
Kilometres per
hour
km/h
0.6215
Miles per hour
mph
Litres
L
0.2642
US gallon
US gal.
Millilitre
ml
0.0338
US ounce
US oz.
Cubic centimetre
cm³
0.0610
Cubic inch
in³
Kilogram
kg
2.2046
Pound
lbs
Volumes
Weight
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
16
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Information on This Document
1
How to use this document
1.6
This page has been left blank deliberately.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
17
2
Safety
2.1
Intended use
2
Safety
2.1
Intended use
This machine is a self-propelled mower conditioner with 3 disc mowers with integrated mower
conditioners and is used to mow crops.
The crops designated for the intended use of this machine are stalk and leaf crops growing on
the ground. This includes different live agricultural grasses and legume crops from early stage
up to the end of the photosynthetic process.
The machine is designed exclusively for use in agriculture and may only be used when
•
•
all safety devices are available according to the operating instructions and are located in the
protective position.
all safety instructions of the operating instructions have been observed and complied with,
both in chapter “Basic safety instructions”, see Page 19, and directly in the chapters of the
operating instructions.
The machine may be used only by people who satisfy the personnel qualification requirements
designated by the machine manufacturer, see Page 19.
These operating instructions are part of the machine and must therefore be at hand when the
machine is in use. The machine may be operated only when the operator has received training
and in compliance with these operating instructions.
If the machine is used for applications which are not described in these operating instructions,
this may result in serious injuries or death and damage to the machine and other property.
Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt
the proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of
the manufacturer for consequential damage.
The intended use shall also include the adherence to the operating, maintenance and repair
conditions set by the manufacturer.
2.2
Reasonably foreseeable misuse
Any use beyond the intended usesee Page 18 is regarded as improper use and is therefore
misuse according to the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
resulting from this, the user alone bears the risk.
Such misuse is for example:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Processing of crops which are outside the intended use of the machine,see Page 18, such
as:
•
Undergrowth or bushes
•
Dead plants such as straw or maize stalks
•
Woody or very fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane
Transport of people
Transport of goods
Exceeding the permitted technical gross weight
Non-compliance with the safety labels on the machine and safety notes in the operating
instructions
Performing troubleshooting, setting, cleaning, repair and maintenance work contrary to the
information in the operating instructions
Unauthorised modifications to the machine
Attachment of unauthorised or unapproved additional equipment
Use of spare parts which are not KRONE original spare parts
Stationary operation of the machine
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
18
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Service life of the machine
2.3
Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt
proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications will exclude any liability of the
manufacturer for consequential damage.
2.3
Service life of the machine
•
•
•
After each operating season, inspect the entire machine for wear and other damage.
•
•
Replace damaged and worn components before recommissioning the machine.
Carry out a full technical inspection of the machine after five years of machine operation
and make a decision on further machine usage taking the results of this inspection into
account.
Theoretically, the service life of this machine is unlimited as all worn or damaged
components can be replaced.
•
2.4
The service life of this machine depends on its proper operation and maintenance as well
as the operating and harvesting conditions.
By heeding the instructions and information in these operating instructions, permanent
operational readiness and a long service life of the machine can be achieved.
Basic safety instructions
Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings
Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings may result in injuries and damage to
the environment and property.
2.4.1
Importance of operating instructions
The operating instructions are an important document and a part of the machine. They are
intended for the user and contain information that is relevant to safety.
Only the procedures specified in the operating instructions are safe. If the operating instructions
are not followed, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
„ Prior to using the machine for the first time, read and observe the "Basic safety notices"
completely.
„ Prior to starting work, read and observe the respective sections in the operating instructions
too.
„ Keep the operating instructions easily accessible for the machine user at all times.
„ Hand over the operating instructions to subsequent users.
2.4.2
Personnel qualification of the operating personnel
If the machine is not used properly, people may be seriously injured or killed. To avoid
accidents, each person who works with the machine must satisfy the following minimum
requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
•
He is physically capable of controlling the machine.
He can work safely with the machine in accordance with these operating instructions.
He understands the method of operation of the machine within the scope of his work and
can identify and avoid the dangers associated with the work.
He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating
instructions accordingly.
He is familiar with driving vehicles safely.
For road travel he has adequate knowledge of the highway code and has the stipulated
driving licence.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
19
2
Safety
2.4
Basic safety instructions
2.4.3
Personnel qualification of the technicians
If the work (assembly, conversion, modification, extension, repairs, retrofitting) is performed
improperly on the machine, people may be seriously or fatally injured. To avoid accidents,
everyone who performs work according to these instructions must meet the following minimum
requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.4.4
Qualified professional, with relevant training.
Capable of assembling the (partially) disassembled machine according to the assembly
instructions provided by the manufacturer.
He is capable, e.g. by attending a training course, of extending, modifying or repairing the
function of the machine according to the relevant instructions provided by the manufacturer.
He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating
instructions accordingly.
Ability to perform the work safely according to these instructions.
Understands the mode of operation of the work to be performed and the machine and is
able to identify and avoid risk in carrying out the necessary work.
Has read these instructions and is able to implement the information explained in these
instructions accordingly.
Children in danger
Children are not in a position to assess dangers and behave unpredictably.
Thus children are particularly at risk.
•
•
•
•
Children are especially at risk when climbing up and down the machine.
There is no possibility to secure children sufficiently on the self-propelled machine.
Vibrations can be particularly harmful to children's bodies.
Children may initiate dangerous movements of the machine.
„ Never take children on the self-propelled harvester.
„ Keep children away from the machine.
„ Keep children away from consumables.
„ Make sure that there are no children in the danger zone, especially when starting and
triggering machine movements.
2.4.5
Structural modifications on the machine
Structural modifications and extensions that were not approved by KRONE can impair the
functionality, operational safety and also the road traffic certification of the machine. As a result,
persons can be seriously injured or killed.
Any structural modifications and extensions that are not authorised by KRONE are not
permitted.
2.4.6
Additional equipment and spare parts
Additional equipment and spare parts that do not correspond to the requirements of the
manufacturer may affect the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.
„ To ensure operational safety, use original parts or standard parts which correspond to the
requirements of the manufacturer.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
20
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
2.4.7
Safety
2
Basic safety instructions
2.4
Jobs on the machine
Control of moving machine
The moving machine requires that the driver/operator is able to react quickly at any time.
Otherwise, the machine may move uncontrollably and cause serious injuries and death.
„ Start the engine from the driver's seat only.
„ While the vehicle is travelling, never leave the driver's seat.
„ Never climb in or out of the machine while the machine is moving.
Control of the machine during operation
While the machine is in operation, always ensure that the drivers/operators can intervene
quickly at any time in the machine control. Otherwise, the machine may move in an uncontrolled
manner and seriously injure or kill people.
When the machine is in operation, the driver/operator must be in the cabin.
On-board instructors when using the machine for work (passenger seat)
On-board instructors may fall and be injured due to movements of the machine.
•
•
Never use the passenger seat for road travel.
Use the passenger seat for instruction purposes during operation in the field only.
Passengers
Passengers may be seriously injured by the machine or fall off the machine and run over.
Ejected objects may strike and injure passengers.
„ Never carry passengers on the machine.
2.4.8
Operational safety: Technically sound condition
Operation only after proper commissioning
The operational safety of the machine is not guaranteed without proper commissioning in
accordance with these operating instructions. This may result in accidents and people may be
seriously or fatally injured.
„ Use the machine only after proper commissioning, see Page 120.
Technically sound state of the machine
Improper maintenance and setting could influence the operational safety of the machine and
cause accidents. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.
„ All maintenance and setting work must be performed according to the chapters
“Maintenance and Setting”.
„ Before performing any maintenance and setting work, shut down and safeguard the
machine, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
21
2
Safety
2.4
Basic safety instructions
Danger resulting from damage to the machine
Damage to the machine may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.
As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed. The following parts of the machine are
particularly important for safety:
•
•
Brakes
Steering
•
•
Safety Devices
Connecting devices
•
•
•
•
Lighting
Hydraulics
Tyres
Universal shaft
If there are doubts about the operational safety of the machine, for example due to an
unexpected change to the operational behaviour, visible damage or leaking consumables:
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Immediately eliminate potential causes of damage, for example heavy soiling, or tighten
slack screws.
„ Determine the cause of damage according to these operating instructions and repair the
damage, if possible, see Page 381.
„ In case of damage which may affect operational safety and cannot be repaired according to
these operating instructions: Have damage repaired by a qualified service centre.
Technical limit values
If the technical limit values of the machine are not observed, the machine may be damaged. As
a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured. With regard to
safety, it is especially important to observe the following technical limit values:
•
•
•
•
Maximum permitted total weight
Maximum permitted axle loads
Maximum permitted transport height and width
Maximum permitted speed
„ Comply with limit values, see Page 76.
2.4.9
Danger zones
If the machine is switched on, its surrounding can present a danger zone.
Avoid entering the danger zone of the machine by observing the minimum safety distance.
If the safety distance is not observed, people may be seriously injured or killed.
„ Do not switch on the drives and engine if the minimum safety distance has not been
observed.
„ If people fail to observe the minimum safety distance, switch off the drives.
„ Switch the machine off in shunting and field mode.
The safety distance is:
For machine in shunting and field mode
In front of the machine
30 m
Behind the machine
5m
On either side of the machine
3m
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
22
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Basic safety instructions
2.4
For machine switched on without driving motion
In front of the machine
3m
Behind the machine
5m
On either side of the machine
3m
The safety distances specified here are minimum distances in terms of intended use. If
necessary, these safety distances must be increased according to the operating and ambient
conditions.
„ Before working in the danger zone of the machine: Shut down and secure the machine, see
Page 33. This also applies to brief inspection work.
„ Consider the information in all relevant operating instructions:
•
•
the operating instructions of the machine
the operating instructions of universal shaft
Danger zone universal shaft
People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the universal shaft.
„ Observe operating instructions of universal shaft.
„ Ensure sufficient overlap of section tube and universal shaft guards.
„ Make sure that the universal shaft guards are mounted and that they are fully functional.
„ Allow the universal shaft locks to engage. There must be no areas of the locking device on
the PTO shaft fork which could cause catching or entrapment (e.g. by annular design,
protective collar around the locking pin).
„ Attach chains to prevent the universal shaft guards from rotating with the shaft.
„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.
„ Ensure that the selected rotational speed and direction of rotation of the PTO shaft of the
self-propelled machine match the permitted rotational speed and direction of rotation of the
mower.
„ Switch off the PTO shaft when the angles between the universal shaft and the PTO shaft
are too large. The machine may be damaged. Parts may be hurled up and cause injury to
people.
Danger zone PTO shaft
People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the PTO shaft and the driven
components.
Before switching on the PTO shaft:
„ Ensure that all protective devices are mounted and brought into protective position.
„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.
„ Switch off drives if they are not needed.
Danger zone between (self-propelled) mower conditioner and mowers
People situated between the high-performance mower conditioner and the mower may be
seriously injured or killed if they are careless or if the machine rolls away or moves.
„ Before working between the high-performance mower conditioner and mower: Shut down
and secure the machine, see Page 33. This also applies to brief inspection work.
„ If the lifting unit must be actuated, keep all people away from the range of movement of the
machine parts which are to be raised.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
23
2
Safety
2.4
Basic safety instructions
Danger zone ejected objects
Crops and foreign bodies may be forcefully flung out and injure or kill people.
„ Before starting the machine, instruct all people to leave the danger zone of the machine.
„ If people are in the danger zone of the machine, immediately switch off drives and diesel
engine.
Danger zone when drive is switched on
When the drive is switched on, there is a danger to life caused by rotating machine parts.
Ensure that there are no persons in the danger zone of the machine.
„ Before starting the machine, instruct all people to leave the danger zone of the machine.
„ In case of dangerous situations, immediately switch off drives and instruct people to leave
the danger zone.
Danger zone due to trailing machine parts
If machine parts are trailing, people may be seriously injured or killed.
After the drives have been switched off, the following machine parts will trail:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Universal shafts
Drive belt
Fan
Rotating screen
Cutting discs
Conditioner
Conveying devices
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Do not attempt to approach the machine until all moving machine parts have come to a
standstill.
2.4.10
Ensuring functionality of safety devices
If safety devices are missing or damaged, people may be seriously injured or killed by moving
machine parts.
„ Replace damaged safety devices.
„ Mount dismounted safety devices and machine parts again before start-up and move them
to protective position.
„ If it is doubtful whether all safety devices have been correctly installed and are functional,
have a service centre check them.
2.4.11
Personal protective equipment
The wearing of personal protective equipment is an important safety measure. Missing or
unsuitable personal protective equipment increases health risks and injuries.
Personal protective equipment includes, for example:
•
•
•
Suitable protective gloves
Safety shoes
Tight-fitting protective clothing
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
24
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
•
•
•
Safety
2
Basic safety instructions
2.4
Hearing protection
Protective goggles
If dust is generated: appropriate breathing protection
„ Specify and provide personal protective equipment for the particular job.
„ Use only personal protective equipment which is in proper condition and offers effective
protection.
„ Adjust personal protective equipment to the person, for example the size.
„ Remove unsuitable clothing and jewellery (e.g. rings, necklaces) and cover long hair with a
hairnet.
2.4.12
Safety sign on the machine
Safety labels on the machine warn of hazards at danger points and are an important component
of the machine's safety equipment. Missing safety labels increase the risk of serious and fatal
injuries.
„ Clean dirty safety labels.
„ Each time after cleaning, check to ensure that the safety labels are complete and legible.
„ Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.
„ Label spare parts with the required safety labels.
Descriptions, explanations and order numbers of the safety labels, see Page 35.
2.4.13
Road safety
Dangers during road travel
Other road users can be put at risk when you drive on public roads and the machine is not
properly illuminated and/or exceeds the maximum dimensions and weights laid down by
national law.
„ Prior to driving on public roads, ensure that the maximum permissible dimensions, weights
and axle, support and trailer loads are not exceeded which are applicable under national law
for driving on public roads.
„ Before driving on roads, switch on the road travel lighting and ensure that it functions
properly.
„ Before driving on roads, move the main mode switch to the “road mode” position.
Danger when driving on road and field
The self-propelled machine has special driving properties which also depend on the operating
state and on the ground. If changed handling characteristics are not considered, the driver may
cause accidents.
„ Observe measures for driving on road and field,see Page 165.
Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for road travel
If the machine is not prepared properly for road travel, serious accidents may occur with traffic.
„ Before driving on roads, prepare the machine for road travel, see Page 165.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
25
2
Safety
2.4
Basic safety instructions
Dangers when operating the machine on slopes
The machine may tilt when it is used on slopes. As a result, accidents may occur and people
may be seriously injured or killed.
„ Do not work and drive on a slope unless the ground of the slope is flat and the adhesion of
the tyres to the ground is ensured.
„ Turn the machine at low speed. Turn in a large arc.
„ Avoid driving across a slope because the centre of gravity of the machine will be changed
by payload and by executing machine functions.
„ Avoid abrupt steering movements on slopes.
„ Do not move the machine from working position to transport position or from transport
position to working position as long as the machine is used across a slope.
„ Do not park the machine on slopes.
„ Observe procedures for operating the machine on slopes, see Page 184.
2.4.14
Parking the machine safely
An incorrectly parked and insufficiently safeguarded machine can represent a danger for
people, especially children, and can be set into motion or fall over in an uncontrolled manner.
People may be injured or killed.
„ Park the machine on a horizontal and level ground capable of bearing the load.
„ Before adjusting, repairing, servicing and cleaning the machine, ensure that it is securely
positioned.
„ Observe section “Parking the Machine” in chapter Driving and Transport.see Page 179
„ Before parking: Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
2.4.15
Consumables
Unsuitable consumables
Consumables which do not comply with the requirements of the manufacturer may impair the
operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.
„ Use only consumables which comply with the requirements of the manufacturer.
For requirements on consumables, see Page 77.
Contamination of hydraulic system and/or fuel system
Foreign objects and/or liquids in the hydraulic system and/or fuel system may impair the
operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.
„ Clean all connections and components.
„ Close open connections by means of protective caps.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
26
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Basic safety instructions
2.4
Fuel is harmful
Fuels are carcinogenic. Swallowing fuel or inhaling fuel vapours may be harmful.
„ Do not inhale the vapours.
„ Do not swallow the fuel.
„ To prevent skin damage, avoid skin contact with the fuel.
„ Wear suitable protective gloves and protective goggles.
„ Immediately contact a doctor if Diesel fuel was swallowed.
Environmental protection and disposal
Consumables such as diesel fuel, brake fluid, antifreeze and lubricants (e.g. gearbox oil,
hydraulic oil) may damage the environment and the health of people.
„ Do not release consumables into the environment.
„ Fill consumables in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official
regulations.
„ Absorb leaked consumables with an absorbent material, fill them in a liquid-tight labelled
container and dispose of according to the official regulations.
2.4.16
Chemicals
Keep cabin free of chemicals
Harmful and aggressive chemicals will pollute the air in the cabin. Harmful and aggressive
reactive substances are for example:
•
•
•
•
•
Solvents
Fuels
Oils and greases
Detergents
Acids
These chemicals may stick to clothing and enter the cabin in this way. Gases and liquids may
escape even from closed tanks. The chemicals may impair health and the ability to concentrate.
As a result, accidents could be caused.
Electrical components could be damaged, for example control units and plug connections. This
may result in fire and accidents caused by malfunctions, system failures or short circuits.
„ Keep the inside of the cabin clean.
„ Do not store or transport any harmful and aggressive chemicals in the cabin.
„ Before entering the cabin, remove clothing which may be contaminated with harmful and
aggressive chemicals.
„ Before entering the cabin, remove soil and other substances from shoes or boots. The soil
may be contaminated with chemicals.
2.4.17
Dangers arising from environment
Fire hazard
Combustible materials may accumulate in the machine due to operation or animals, such as
rodents or nesting birds, or dust resuspension.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
27
2
Safety
2.4
Basic safety instructions
In case of dry usage conditions, dust, impurities and crop residue may ignite on hot parts and
the resulting fire may seriously injure or kill people.
„ Check and clean the machine every day before using it for the first time.
„ Check and clean the machine regularly during the working day.
„ Regularly check hydraulic oil lines for proper condition and position with sufficient clearance
to sharp edges.
„ Regularly check exhaust systems, tubes and turbocharger of engine system. Remove crop
residues.
„ While refuelling, do not smoke and do not place the machine near naked flames or
explosive sparks.
Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines
When the machine is in operation, it may reach the height of overhead lines. This may cause
voltage to flash over to the machine and cause a fatal electric shock or fire.
„ When folding the lateral mowers in and out, keep a safe distance from electric overhead
lines.
„ Never fold the lateral mowers in or out near pylons and overhead lines.
„ Keep a safe distance from electric overhead lines.
„ To avoid a potential electric shock caused by voltage flashover, never exit from or climb into
the machine under overhead lines.
Behavior in the case of voltage flashover of overhead lines
High electric voltage may be applied to electrically conducting parts of the machine due to
voltage flashover. In case of voltage flashover, a voltage drop where major voltage differences
are present is created on the ground around the machine. Due to major voltage differences in
the ground, people may be killed by electric shocks when making big steps, laying on the
ground or supporting themselves with their hands.
„ Do not leave the cabin.
„ Do not touch any metal parts.
„ Do not establish any conductive connection to the ground.
„ Warn people: Do not approach the machine. Electrical voltage differences on the ground
may lead to severe electric shocks.
„ Wait for help from professional rescue teams. The overhead line must be switched off.
If people have to leave the cabin despite the voltage flashover, for example because there is an
imminent danger to life due to fire:
„ Avoid simultaneous contact with machine and ground.
„ Jump away from the machine. Jump into a safe standing position. Do not touch the machine
from the outside.
„ Move away from the machine in very small steps keeping your feet close together.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
28
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
2.4.18
Safety
2
Basic safety instructions
2.4
Sources of danger on the machine
Noise may damage your health
The noise development of the machine during operation may cause health damage such as
hardness of hearing, deafness or tinnitus. When using the machine at high rotational speed, the
noise level also increases. The emissions value was measured with the cabin closed under
conditions according to DIN EN ISO 4254-1, Appendix B, see Page 76.
„ Before starting up the machine, estimate the risk caused by noise.
„ Depending on the ambient conditions, working hours and the working and operating
conditions of the machine, specify and use suitable hearing protection.
„ Specify rules for the use of hearing protection and for the working time.
„ During operation keep windows and doors of the cabin closed.
„ Remove hearing protection for road travel.
Liquids under high pressure
The following liquids are under high pressure:
•
Hydraulic oil
•
•
•
Diesel fuel
Engine coolant
Refrigerant for the air conditioning system
Liquids escaping under high pressure may penetrate through the skin and cause severe
injuries.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine and contact qualified specialist workshop upon
suspicion of damaged hydraulic system.
„ Never search for leaks with bare hands. Even a very pin-sized hole may lead to serious
injuries.
„ When searching for leaks, use suitable aids, e.g. a piece of cardboard to avoid injuries.
„ Keep body and face away from leaks.
„ If liquids penetrate the body, immediately consult a doctor. The liquid must be removed from
the body as quickly as possible.
Hot liquids
Persons can suffer burns and/or scalding when hot liquids are drained.
„ Wear personal protective equipment when hot consumables are drained.
„ If necessary, allow liquids and machine parts to cool down before you start repair,
maintenance and cleaning work.
Damaged compressor unit
Damaged compressed-air hoses of compressor unit can tear off. Hoses moving in an
uncontrolled manner can cause severe injuries.
„ Contact a specialist workshop immediately if you suspect that the compressor unit is
damaged.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
29
2
Safety
2.4
Basic safety instructions
Damaged hydraulic hoses
Damaged hydraulic hoses may tear off, burst or cause oil leaks. As a result, the machine may
be damaged and people may be seriously injured.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ If it is suspected that hydraulic hoses are damaged, immediately contact a service centre,
see Page 365.
Toxic exhaust gases
Exhaust gases can cause serious health problems or death.
„ Ensure sufficient ventilation when the engine is running so that people are not exposed to
the exhaust gases for a longer period of time.
„ In closed rooms, run the engine only when a suitable extraction system is in operation.
Hot surfaces
The following components may become hot during operation and may burn people:
•
•
•
•
•
Engine
Exhaust system
Engine piping
Hydraulic system
Gearbox
„ Maintain an adequate distance from hot surfaces and adjacent components.
„ Leave machine parts to cool down and wear protective gloves.
2.4.19
Dangers in connection with certain activities: climbing up and down
Climbing up and down safely
You can fall from the ladder if you are careless when climbing up and down. You can slip, fall
and seriously injure yourself when you climb onto the machine outside the ladders provided for
this purpose.
Dirt, operating fluids and lubricants can make it difficult to step or stand safely on the
equipment.
„ Always keep ladder steps and platforms clean and in a proper condition so that you can step
and stand on them safely.
„ Never climb up and down while the machine is moving.
„ Always climb up and down with your face towards the machine.
„ When getting on and off, ensure a three-point contact with steps and handrails (always
ensure that both hands and one foot, or both feet and one hand are in contact with the
machine).
„ Never use control elements as a handle when you climb up and down. Accidental actuation
of control elements can start functions inadvertently that may pose a danger.
„ Never jump off the machine when you climb down.
„ To climb up and down, use only the steps and platforms specified in these operating
instructions, see Page 62.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
30
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
2.4.20
Safety
2
Basic safety instructions
2.4
Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine
Only perform work when the machine is at standstill
If the machine is not shut down and safeguarded, parts may move unintentionally or the
machine may start moving. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.
„ Before carrying out any repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the machine, shutdown
and safeguard it, see Page 33.
Maintenance and repair work
Improper maintenance and repair work endanger operational safety. Thus there is a risk of
accidents, serious injuries or death.
„ Only perform work which is described in this operating instructions. Prior to any work, stop
and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ All other maintenance and repair work must only be performed by qualified specialist
workshop.
Working at or on heights of the machine
There is a risk of falling when working at or on heights of the machine. As a result, accidents
may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.
„ Prior to any work, stop and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Make sure you stand securely.
„ Use a suitable fall protection.
„ Secure the area below the assembly point against falling objects.
Raised machine and machine parts
The raised machine and machine parts may fall or tilt unintentionally. People may be seriously
injured or killed, as a result.
„ Do not stay under the raised machine or machine parts which are not safely supported, see
Page 33.
„ Prior to all work on raised machines or machine parts, lower the machine or machine parts.
„ Before performing any work under raised machines or machine parts, secure the machine or
machine parts with rigid safety support or with hydraulic shut-off device or by supporting
against lowering.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
31
2
Safety
2.4
Basic safety instructions
Danger associated with welding work
Improper welding work will endanger the operational safety of the machine. As a result,
accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.
„ Never perform welding work on the following components:
•
Engine
•
•
•
•
•
Gearbox
Components of the hydraulics
Components of the electronics
Frame or supporting components
Running gear
„ Before carrying out welding work on the machine, obtain consent by KRONE customer
service and, if required, identify alternatives.
„ Before performing welding work on the mowers, detach them from the machine.
„ Welding work must only be performed by experienced qualified personnel.
„ Attach the earthing of the welding device near the welding points.
„ Caution when performing welding work near electric and hydraulic parts, plastic parts and
pressure accumulators. The parts may be damaged, endanger people or cause accidents.
Before performing welding work on the forage harvester:
„ Switch off main battery switch.
„ Pull engine control plug out of the engine block.
„ Disconnect batteries.
„ Connect positive and negative cables of the machine by an electrical connection.
2.4.21
Dangers in connection with certain activities: checking and charging
batteries
If the battery is handled incorrectly, e.g. inadvertent connection of the battery poles to a metal
object, excessive charging in conjunction with a spark, the battery may explode. People may be
injured or burnt by the explosion or burnt by spraying battery acid.
„ Use a suitable voltmeter to check the condition of the battery.
„ Charge the battery only in well ventilated rooms with the battery compartment cover open.
„ To charge the battery, follow these operating instructions, see Page 367.
„ Keep fire, sparks and naked flames away from the battery.
„ To prevent acid from leaking, transport the battery in the installation position only.
2.4.22
Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and
tyres
Improper assembly or disassembly of wheels and tyres will endanger the operational safety. As
a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.
The fitting of wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and approved mounting tools.
„ If there is a lack of knowledge, have the wheels and tyres fitted by the KRONE dealer or by
a qualified tyre service.
„ When fitting tyres on the rims, never exceed the maximum permitted pressure specified by
KRONE, otherwise the tyre or even the rim may explode, see Page 76.
„ When mounting the wheels, mount the wheel nuts with the specified tightening torque, see
Page 312.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
32
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
2.4.23
Safety
2
Safety routines
2.5
Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents
Any measures not taken or incorrect measures in dangerous situations can make it difficult or
impossible to rescue exposed persons. Due to the impeded conditions of rescue, the chances
to help and heal injured people deteriorate.
„ As a matter of principle: Park the machine.
„ Get an overview of the existing danger and identify the reason.
„ Secure the accident site.
„ Save persons from the danger zone.
„ Leave danger zone and do not enter it again.
„ Alarm rescue workers and seek help, if possible.
„ Carry out immediate lifesaving actions.
2.5
Safety routines
2.5.1
Shutting down and safeguarding the machine
WARNING
Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts
If the machine has not been shut down, machine or machine parts may move unintentionally.
As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.
„ Before leaving the operating position: Shut down and safeguard the machine.
To shut down and safeguard the machine:
„ Park the machine on a stable, horizontal and level ground.
„ Switch off the drives and wait until coasting parts have come to a complete stop.
„ Secure the self-propelled machine against rolling away by applying the parking brake.
„ Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.
„ Switch off the main battery switch, see Page 178.
„ Use wheel chocks to secure the self-propelled machine against rolling away.
2.5.2
Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering
WARNING
Crushing hazard due to movement of machine or machine parts
If the machine or machine parts are not secured against lowering, the machine or machine
parts may roll, fall or sag. Thus people could be squeezed or killed.
„ Lower the raised machine parts.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Secure machine or machine parts
against lowering by means of hydraulic shut-off device (e.g. stop cock) on machine side.
„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Safely support machine or machine
parts.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
33
2
Safety
2.5
Safety routines
In order to safely support the machine or machine parts:
„ To support, only use suitable and sufficiently dimensioned materials that do not break or
yield.
„ Bricks and hollow blocks are not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine
parts. Therefore they must not be used.
„ Car jacks are also not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. They
must not be used, as well.
2.5.3
Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely
WARNING
Safely checking the oil level and changing oil and filter element
The operational safety of the machine can be impaired if oil level check and oil and filter
element changes are not carried out safely. This can lead to accidents.
„ Safely check the oil level and change oil and filter element.
To check the oil level and change oil and filter element safely:
„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling down, see Page 33.
„ „Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Observe the intervals for oil level check, oil and filter element changes, see Page 270.
„ Use only the oil grades/oil quantities specified in the consumables table, see Page 77.
„ Ensure that the oil and the equipment for filling are clean.
„ Clean the area around the components (for example gearbox, high-pressure filter) and
make sure that no foreign objects get into the components or the hydraulic system.
„ Check installed seal rings for damage. Replace them if necessary.
„ Collect leaking oil and/or waste oil in a container provided for this purpose, and dispose of it
properly, see Page 27.
2.5.4
Running actuator test
WARNING
Run actuator test safely
When actuators are energised, functions are carried out directly and without a safety prompt.
This may cause the unintentional movement of machine parts, trapping and seriously or
fatally injuring persons.
ü Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.
ü The person performing the test must know which machine parts are activated by
controlling the actuators.
„ Run the actuator test safely.
To run the actuator test safely:
„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling, see Page 33.
„ Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 33.
„ Cordon off the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts in a clearly visible
manner.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
34
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
„ Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts.
„ Switch on the ignition.
„ The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
Each safety sign is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the KRONE
dealer. Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety signs.
When attaching safety signs, the contact surface on the machine must be clean and free of dirt,
oil and grease to ensure optimum adhesion of the safety signs.
Location and meaning of the safety signs
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
35
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
Overview 1
WARNING
Read and understand
operator's manual
before opera�ng or
servicing machine.
Do not allow
unexperienced
personnel to
operate machine.
DANGER
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD
Keep sufficient distance
to avoid death or serious
injury from contact with
overhead electric power
lines.
WARNING
FALL HAZARD
Do not ride on pla�orm
or ladder.
Do not carry passengers.
WARNING
Shut off engine,
remove igni�on key
and keep it with you
while performing
maintenance,
repair work or
clearing blockages.
WARNING
Use parking brake and
wheel chocks to secure
machine against
inadvertent rolling.
Use both wheel chocks
at the front axle only.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not operate machine
unless an approved fire
ex�nguisher is installed.
Do not use hand to search
for leaks. High pressure
oil easily punctures skin
causing serious injury and
gangrene. If injured, seek
emergency medical help.
Relieve pressure before
performing repair work.
1
27 022 558 0
WARNING
To avoid possible injury:
Use only authen�c KRONE spare parts
and accessories authorised by KRONE.
The use of spare parts, accessories or
addi�onal equipment not manufactured,
tested or approved by KRONE will exclude
any liability for consequen�al damage.
27 008 200 1
7
3
2
7
4
WARNING
Hydraulic accumulators contain
oil and gas under high pressure.
Servicing while pressurized can
cause severe injury to eyes and skin.
Relieve pressure before servicing.
27 021 178 0
WARNING
Hydraulic accumulators contain
oil and gas under high pressure.
Servicing while pressurized can
cause severe injury to eyes and skin.
Relieve pressure before servicing.
27 021 178 0
5
5
4
6
3
BMG000-034
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
36
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
1. Order no. 27 022 558 0 (1x)
WARNING
Read and understand
operator's manual
before opera�ng or
servicing machine.
Do not allow
unqualified
personnel to
operate machine.
WARNING
FALL HAZARD
To avoid serious injury
or death:
Do not ride on pla�orm
or ladder.
Do not carry passengers.
Keep riders and children
off machine.
DANGER
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD To avoid serious injury
To avoid serious injury
Do not operate machine
or death, shut off engine, Keep sufficient distance or death, use parking
unless an approved fire
to avoid serious injury
remove igni�on key
brake and wheel chocks ex�nguisher is installed.
or death from contact
and keep it with you
to secure machine
with overhead electric
while performing
against inadvertent
power lines.
maintenance,
rolling. Use both wheel
repair work or
chocks at front axle only.
clearing blockages.
Do not use hand to search
for leaks. High pressure
oil easily punctures skin
causing serious injury and
gangrene. If injured, seek
emergency medical help.
Relieve pressure before
performing repair work.
WARNING
This safety sign includes the following warnings:
27 022 558 0
WARNING
• Read and understand operator´s manual before operating
or servicing machine.
• Do not allow inexperienced personnel to operate machine.
DANGER
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD
Keep sufficient distance to avoid serious injury or death from
contact with overhead electric power lines.
WARNING
FALL HAZARD
To avoid serious injury or death:
- Do not ride on platform or ladder.
- Do not carry passengers.
- Keep riders and children off machine.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death, shut off engine, remove ignition key and keep it with you while performing maintenance,
repair work or clearing blockages.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
37
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death, use parking brake and wheel
chocks to secure machine against inadvertent rolling. Use
both wheel chocks at front axle only.
WARNING
Do not operate the machine unless an approved fire extinguisher is installed.
WARNING
Do not use hand to search for leaks. High pressure oil easily
punctures skin causing serious injury and gangrene. If injured,
seek emergency medical help. Relieve pressure before performing repair work.
2. Order no. 27 008 200 1 (1x)
WARNING
WARNING
To avoid possible injury
27 008 200 1
To avoid possible injury:
Use only authen�c KRONE spare parts
and accessories authorised by KRONE.
The use of spare parts, accessories or
addi�onal equipment not manufactured,
tested or approved by KRONE will exclude
any liability for consequen�al damage.
Use only authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by KRONE. The use of spare parts, accessories or
additional equipment not manufactured, tested or approved by
KRONE will exclude any liability for consequential damage.
3. Order No. 27 002 057 0 (2x)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury.
Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be
moving.
4. Order no. 27 006 964 0 (2x)
WARNING!
To avoid possible injury.
Close the protective equipment before placing the machine in
operation !
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
38
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
5. Order No. 27 014 825 0 (2x)
WARNING
Hot surfaces
-Keep sufficient distance from hot surfaces.
-Allow to cool before servicing.
6. Order no. 27 014 829 0 (1x)
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death
-Do not touch any moving machine components.
-Wait until all machine components have completely stopped.
7. Order no. 27 021 178 0 (4x)
WARNING
High pressure oil can cause severe injury
Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high pressure.
Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.
Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a
qualified workshop only.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
39
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
Overview 2
2
1
4
3
8
1
3
5
6
3
7
3
BM000-223
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
40
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
1. Order no. 942 546 0 (2x)
WARNING
Avoid bodily injuries from rotating engine fan.
Keep hands out of fan discharge area when engine is running.
2. Order No. 27 014 825 0 (1x)
WARNING
Hot surfaces
-Keep sufficient distance from hot surfaces.
-Allow to cool before servicing.
3. Order no. 27 002 057 0 (5x)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury.
Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be
moving.
4. Order no. 27 021 178 0 (1x)
WARNING
High pressure oil can cause severe injury
Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high pressure.
Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.
Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a
qualified workshop only.
5. Order no. 27 002 055 0 (2x)
DANGER
Thrown objects can cause serious injury
or death.
• Stay clear of machine while in operation.
• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.
• Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.
6. Order No. 27 002 056 0 (2x)
DANGER
Blade can cause serious injury or death.
• Stay clear of machine while in operation.
• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
41
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
7. Order No. 27 002 057 0 (2x)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury.
Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be
moving.
8. Order no. 27 026 397 0 (1x)
DANGER
DANGER
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD
27 026 397 0
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD
Keep sufficient distance
to avoid serious injury
or death from contact
with overhead electric
power lines.
Keep sufficient distance to avoid serious injury or death from
contact with overhead electric power lines.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
42
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
43
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
Overview 3
4
4
3
1
6
2
5
6
3
4
6
5
5
5
7
1
2
5
6
BM000-224
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
44
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
1. Order No. 27 002 055 0 (4x)
DANGER
Thrown objects can cause serious injury
or death.
• Stay clear of machine while in operation.
• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.
• Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.
2. Order No. 27 002 056 0 (4x)
DANGER
Blade can cause serious injury or death.
• Stay clear of machine while in operation.
• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.
3. Order no. 27 009 598 0 (2x)
WARNING
Danger in the slewing range
• Keep distance while the machine is operating.
4. Order no. 27 021 178 0 (3x)
WARNING
High pressure oil can cause severe injury
Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high pressure.
Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.
Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a
qualified workshop only.
5. Order no. 27 002 057 0 (5x)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury.
Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be
moving.
6. Order No. 27 014 829 0 (4x)
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death
-Do not touch any moving machine components.
-Wait until all machine components have completely stopped.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
45
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
7. Order No. 27 006 964 0 (1x)
WARNING!
To avoid possible injury.
Close the protective equipment before placing the machine in
operation !
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
46
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
47
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
Overview 4
2
1
1
4
3
BM000-225
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
48
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
1. Order no. 27 003 029 0 (2x)
WARNING
To avoid injuries
Do not stay in the swivel area of the outrigger arms.
Keep your distance.
2. Order no. 27 014 824 0 (1x)
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death
- Do not ride on platform or ladder.
- Do not carry passengers.
3. Order no. 27 021 178 0 (2x)
WARNING
High pressure oil can cause severe injury
Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high pressure.
Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.
Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a
qualified workshop only.
4. Order No. 27 006 964 0 (1x)
WARNING!
To avoid possible injury.
Close the protective equipment before placing the machine in
operation !
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
49
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
Overview 5
Universal shafts
1
1
1
1
27 021 178 0
27 021 178 0
1
1
BM000-329
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
50
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
1. Order no. 949 228 0 (6x)
DANGER
ROTATING DRIVELINE – CONTACT CAN CAUSE DEATH.
KEEP AWAY!
DO NOT OPERATE WITHOUT• All driveline guards, tractor and equipment shields in place.
• Driveline securely attached at both ends.
• Driveline guards that turn freely on driveline.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
51
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
Overview 6
With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
BM000-378
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
52
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety sign on the machine
2.6
1. Order no. 27 004 016 0 (4x)
Warning
Rotating augers can cut arms, hands and fingers.
To avoid injury STAY AWAY from rotating augers.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
2. Order No. 27 002 057 0 (4x)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury.
Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be
moving.
3. Order No. 27 014 829 0 (4x)
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death
-Do not touch any moving machine components.
-Wait until all machine components have completely stopped.
4. Order No. 27 002 055 0 (4x)
DANGER
Thrown objects can cause serious injury
or death.
• Stay clear of machine while in operation.
• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.
• Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
53
2
Safety
2.6
Safety sign on the machine
Overview 7
With version "Standard swathing"
1
1
2
1
1
2
BM000-391
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
54
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Information signs on the machine
2.7
1. Order No. 27 002 057 0 (4x)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury.
Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be
moving.
2. Order no. 27 002 055 0 (2x)
DANGER
Thrown objects can cause serious injury
or death.
• Stay clear of machine while in operation.
• Keep discharge chute and shields in place.
• Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.
2.7
Information signs on the machine
Each information sign is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the
KRONE dealer. Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable information signs.
When attaching information signs, the contact surface on the machine must be clean and free of
dirt, oil and grease to ensure optimum adhesion of the information signs.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
55
2
Safety
2.7
Information signs on the machine
Location and meaning of the information signs
5
21
7
4
1
6
12
20
18 19
2
13
11
18
1
8
9
10
3
21
16
15
14
17
18
21
BMG000-069
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
56
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Information signs on the machine
2.7
1. Ord. no. 942 571 0 (3x)
There are 24 V connections on the machine which are marked
with this information sign.
24 V
942 571 0
2. Ord. no. 27 023 945 1 (1x)
Kältemittel / Refrigerant / Koudemiddel /
Fluide frigoriène / Agente frigorífico /
Refrigerante / Хладагент
Füllmenge / Filling quantity / Vulhoeveelheid /
Quantité de remplissage / Cantidad de Ilenado /
Quantità di riempimento / Заправочный объем
R 134a
g/г
HGWP-Treibhauseffekt / GWP-Greenhouse effect /
GWP-Broeikaseeffect /
HGWP-Effet de serre / GWP-Efecto invernadero /
HGWP-Effetto serra / GWP-парниковый эффект
CO2-Äquivalent / CO2 equivalent / CO2-Equivalent /
Équivalent CO2 / Equivalente a CO2 /
kg/кг
Equivalente di CO2 / Эквивалент CO2
1800
This information sign indicates the specification and filling
quantity of the refrigerant, see Page 77.
1430
2574
27 023 945 1
3. Ord. no. 27 016 518 1 (1x)
Use only Renolin Unisyn XT 220 gear oil, see Page 78.
Renolin Unisyn XT
CLP220
220
460
27 016
518
27 016
518
1
014
5872
4. Ord. no. 27 024 033 0 (1x)
This information sign is on the hydraulic oil tank. The horizontal arrow indicates the minimum filling quantity of the hydraulic oil when the side mounted mowers are folded in, see
Page 362.
27 024 033 0
5. Ord. no. 27 016 830 1 (1x)
Use only hydraulic oil HLP 46, see Page 78.
HLP 46
27 016 830 1
6. Ord. no. 27 019 241 0 (1x)
CAUTION / ACHTUNG
Avoid Engine Damage!
To avoid engine damage, only use diesel with ultra-low sulphur content, see Page 289.
Filling only with:
Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
15 PPM Sulfur MAXIMUM
Motorschäden vermeiden!
Befüllung nur mit:
Diesel mit ultraniedrigem Schwefelgehalt
15 PPM Schwefel MAXIMUM
27 019 241 0
7. Ord. no. 27 015 794 0 (1x)
CAUTION! / ACHTUNG
Initial filling only with coolant
Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT
Mixing 1/1 max. -36 °F
Initial filling only with coolant Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT; mixture 1/1 max. -38°C, see Page 80.
Erstbefüllung nur mit Kühlmittel
Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT
Mischung 1/1 max. -38 °C
27 015 794 0
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
57
2
Safety
2.7
Information signs on the machine
8. Ord. no. 27 006 778 1 (1x)
Measures before starting welding work on the machine, see
Page 32.
Elektroschweißen
- Bei Schweißarbeiten Hauptschalter ausschalten
- Stecker der Motorregelung am Motorblock abziehen!
- Batterien abklemmen
- Plus- und Minusleitung elektrisch leitend verbinden
- Erdung des Schweißgeräts nahe der Schweißstelle
anbringen
27 006 778 1
9. Ord. no. 942 287 1 (1x)
DE Beide Unterlegkeile nur an der Vorderachse verwenden.
EN Use both wheel chocks for the front axle
only.
ES Use ambos calzos de rueda solo para el
eje delantero.
FR N'utiliser les deux cales de freinage que
pour l'essieu avant.
IT Utilizzare entrambi i cunei solo per l'assale
anteriore.
NL Beide wielwiggen uitsluitend onder
de vooras gebruiken.
RU Используйте оба подлокотника только
на передней оси.
942 287 1
„ Use both wheel chocks only at the front wheels, see
Page 177.
10. Ord. no. 942 134 2 (1x)
DE Radmuttern nach erstem Einsatz nachziehen.
EN Retighten wheel nuts after the first use.
ES Apretar las tuercas de fijación de ruedas después de la
primera puesta en servicio.
FR Resserrer les écrous de fixation de roue après la
premièremise en service.
IT Stringere i dadi di fissaggio delle ruote dopo il primo
impiego.
NL Wielmoeren na het eerste gebruik natrekken.
RU После первого использования подтянуть гайки колес.
The wheel nuts must be retightened after the first use, see
Page 312.
942 134 2
11. Ord. no. 27 021 875 0 (1x)
„ Transport the machine only in the direction of travel, see
Page 181.
27 021 875 0
12. Ord. no. 942 038 1 (2x)
The areas marked with this information sign must be protected
from splash water. In particular, never direct the water jet of
the high-pressure cleaner at bearings and electric/electronic
components.
942 038-1
13. Ord. no. 27 023 058 0 (1x)
This information sign is on the battery compartment and
shows the jump-start connection points on the machine, see
Page 392.
24 V
27 023 058 0
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
58
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Information signs on the machine
2.7
This information sign specifies the order numbers for spare
blades.
118
939 567 1
14. Ord. no. 939 567 1 (1x)
139-888
139-889
139 888
139 889
15. Ord. no. 255 498 1 (1x)
For the "Bolted blades" version
Check the material thickness of the retaining bolts after each
blade change and after each contact with foreign objects. If
the material thickness of the retaining bolts is below 14 mm at
the weakest point, the retaining bolts must be replaced by authorised specialist personnel.
Ø17mm
min. 14 mm
255 498 1
16. Ord. no. 255 499 2 (1x)
For the "Quick-change blades" version
min. 3 mm
Ø 17 mm
min. 14 mm
255
2
255499
499-2
Check the material thickness of the retaining bolts after each
blade change and after each contact with foreign objects. If
the material thickness of the retaining bolts is below 14 mm at
the weakest point, the retaining bolts must be replaced by authorised specialist personnel.
17. Ord. no. 27 025 577 1 (1x)
800/65 R32
1,6 bar
23.2 psi
2 bar
29.0 psi
800/60 R32
1,2 bar
17.4 psi
1,6 bar
23.2 psi
600/65 R28
1,4 bar
20.3 psi
1,8 bar
26.1 psi
600/60 R30.5
1,2 bar
17.4 psi
1,6 bar
23.2 psi
This information sign gives the tyre pressures for the individual
tyre types, see Page 80, and the tightening torques and
maintenance intervals for the wheel nuts, see Page 312.
de: Bei hohem Straßenfahrtanteil den Luftdruck um 0,4 bar
erhöhen.
en: In case of a large amount of road travel, increase the air
pressure by 5.8 psi.
fr:
it:
En cas de circulation fréquente sur la route,
augmenter la pression d'air de 0,4 bar.
In caso di uso frequente su strada, aumentare la pressione
dell'aria di 0,4 bar.
es: Si la proporción de circulación por carretera es elevada,
aumente la presión atmosférica 0,4 bar.
ru: При большой длительности движения по дороге
увеличить давление воздуха на 0,4 бар.
pt: Com uma grande proporção de circulação em estrada,
aumentar o ar comprimido cerca de 0,4 bar.
630 Nm / 465 lbf ft
27 025 577 2
18. Order no. 27 011 190 0 (3x) for version without "hydraulically folding side guards"
The guards can be opened with a screwdriver.
27 011 190 0
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
59
2
Safety
2.7
Information signs on the machine
19. Ord. no. 27 009 074 0 (1x)
+
The degree of conditioning can be changed by adjusting the
conditioning sheet using the lever.
+
27 009 074 0
20. Ord. no. 27 021 179 0 (1x)
Two conditioner speeds can be selected on the belt drive of
the front mounted mower. This influences conditioning effect
and power requirement, see Page 254.
700 1/min
1000 1/min
27 021 179 0
21. Ord. no. 27 100 367 0 (3x)
The universal shafts of the machine must be lubricated regularly, see Page 351. The universal shafts from the machine to
the mowers have profile tube lubrication and are marked with
this information sign.
27 100 367 0
•
Ord. no. 27 018 170 0
There are car jacking points on the machine which are marked
by this information sign, see Page 402.
•
Ord. no. 27 021 260 0
27 021 260 0
•
There are several lubrication points on the machine which
must be lubricated at regular intervals, see Page 354. Lubrication points which are not directly visible are additionally
marked with this information sign.
Ord. no. 27 023 958 0
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
60
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Information signs on the machine
2.7
There are lashing points on the machine which are marked by
this information sign, see Page 182.
27 023 958 0
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
61
2
Safety
2.8
Safety features
2.8
Safety features
8
8
1
2
3
10
8
7
9
11
4
5
6
BMG000-047
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
62
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Safety
2
Safety features
2.8
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Emergency exit
In case of an emergency, the side window on the
right-hand side in the direction of travel, next to
the driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door,
see Page 82.
2
Wheel chocks
Wheel chocks can be used to secure the machine
from rolling away. The machine is equipped with
2 wheel chocks which are located above the front
right wheel in the storage compartment, see
Page 177.
3
Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is located on the cabin ladder, see Page 65.
4
Ladder
„ To enter the cabin safely at all timed, climb up
onto the machine using the left-hand side
ladder only. Use the handrails while doing so.
5
Main battery switch
The main battery switch is used to switch on or
interrupt the machine’s power supply, see
Page 178.
6
Ladder lighting
For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting"
version
To enable the rungs on the ladder to be easily
seen, even in the dark, the rungs can be illuminated, see Page 93.
7
Quick-stop switch
The quick-stop switch in the armrest is used to
stop the machine's working functions in an emergency. The traction drive remains active, see
Page 100.
8
Working lights
To ensure that the machine can be safely exited
in the dark, the working lights are switched off
after a delay, see Page 93.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
63
2
Safety
2.8
Safety features
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
9
Seat switch in driver's seat
The seat switch integrated into the driver's seat is
used to check whether the driver's seat is occupied or not.
Field mode:
If the driver's seat is not occupied for longer than
7 seconds, then all the mowers and the traction
drive are switched off.
Once the driver's seat is occupied again, the
mowers can be switched on and the traction drive
started up again.
„ Switch mowers on and off, see Page 185.
Road mode:
If the driver's seat is not occupied for longer than
7 seconds, then the traction drive's reverse drive
is switched off. During forward travel the traction
drive is switched off only after the machine comes
to a standstill.
2.8.1
10
SMV emblem
The Slow-Moving Vehicle emblem (SMV emblem)
is affixed to slow-moving machines or vehicles
travelling on public highways at a speed of less
than 40 km/h (25 mph), see Page 64.
11
Seatbelt
„ Always put on the safety belt before driving.
SMV emblem
KM000-567
The SMV emblem (Slow-Moving Vehicle) (1) is attached to slow-moving machines or vehicles
travelling on public highways at a speed of less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
The SMV emblem (1) is at the rear in the centre or at the rear on left.
When driving the machine on public highways, the SMV emblem must be mounted.
If the machine is transported on transport vehicles (for example lorry or train), the SMV emblem
must be covered or dismounted.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
64
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
2.8.2
Safety
2
Safety features
2.8
Fire extinguisher
BXG000-004
INFO
The machine must not be operated without a fire extinguisher which contains at least 20 lbs of
extinguishing agent.
The manufacturer recommends a powder fire extinguisher for fire classes A, B and C.
The support for fire extinguisher (1) is located in direction of travel left on the ladder (2) to the
platform.
Have the fire extinguisher registered. So you can be sure that maintenance is carried out
regularly and in good time (according to EN 3 at the latest every two years) and can be proven.
„ Prior to starting up the machine, check that the fire extinguisher is attached and ready for
use, see Page 314.
„ Consider the operating instructions of the fire extinguisher and the web page of the
manufacturer of the fire extinguisher.
„ Check fire extinguisher for external damage. In the event of anomalies, inform responsible
maintenance company.
The inspection intervals in other countries may be different. In such a case, the prescribed
inspection intervals of the country of operation apply.
„ Observe the provisions of the corresponding countries.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
65
3
3
Data memory
Data memory
A large number of electronic components of the machine contains data memories which save
temporarily or permanently technical information on machine condition, events and errors. This
technical information generally documents the condition of a part, a module, a system or the
environment:
•
•
•
•
•
Operating states of system components (e.g. filling levels)
Status messages of the machine and its individual components (e.g. number of revolutions
of wheel, wheel speed, motion delay, lateral acceleration)
Malfunctions and defects in essential system components (e.g. light and brakes)
Reactions of the machine in special driving situations (e.g. activation of the stability control
systems)
Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature).
This data, which is of an exclusively technical nature, is used to identify and eliminate faults and
to optimise machine functions. The data cannot be used to generate movement profiles of
travelled distances.
For service activities (e.g. repair services, service processes, warranty cases, quality
assurance), employees of the service network (including manufacturer) can use special
diagnostic units to read this technical information from the event and error data memories. If
necessary, you can obtain further information there. After the error has been eliminated, the
information in the error memory is either deleted or continuously overwritten.
When using the machine, situations are possible in which this technical data, in conjunction with
other information (accident protocol, damage to the machine, witness statements etc.) - if
necessary with the assistance of an expert - can be related to persons.
Additional functions, which are contractually agreed with the customer (e.g. teleservice), allow
the transmission of certain machine data from the machine.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
66
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
4
Machine Description
4.1
Machine overview
2
Machine Description
4
Machine overview
4.1
3
4
1
6
15
5
14
7
8
9
13
12
11
10
BMG000-049
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
67
4
Machine Description
4.1
Machine overview
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4.1.1
Exhaust aftertreatment
Storage compartment right
Cabin
Front mounted mower
Outrigger arm right
Right side mounted mower
Rear storage compartment
Combination cooler
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Engine
Side mounted mower left
Outrigger arm left
Battery compartment
Lifting unit
Main battery switch
Maintenance flap left
Content of the storage compartments on the machine
Right storage compartment (2)
•
•
•
2 wheel chocks
1 canister for fresh water
1 canister for windshield washer fluid
Rear storage compartment (7)
•
•
•
•
•
1 blade wrench
1 Drain hose with clamp for fluids
1 Special spanner for the shear bolt on the rotary hub
Several spare blades
Ring screws for lifting the side mounted mowers
Left maintenance flap (15)
•
•
1 Lever for operating the control block
1 Measuring hose
Possibilities for stowing on the front mowing unit
2
1
3
4
BM000-428
If required, the blade wrench (2) and the spare blades can be stowed on the front mowing unit.
Blade wrench (2):
„ Place the blade wrench (2) in the designated support / holder (4).
„ Secure the blade wrench (2) with the linch pin (3) on the support / holder (4).
Spare blades:
„ Stow the spare blades in the storage compartment (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
68
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
4.2
Machine Description
4
Labelling
4.2
Labelling
INFO
The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or
rendered illegible!
Type plate
1
2
KRONE Agriculture SE
Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10, 48480 Spelle, Germany
Type
VIN
DVG000-004
Example image
1 Model
2 Vehicle identification number
BMG000-062
The machine data can be found on type plate (1). The type plate is located on right-hand
machine side on vehicle frame below the cabin.
Location of the vehicle identification number
2
1
BM000-506
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
69
4
Machine Description
4.3
Lighting
In addition, the vehicle identification number (1) is stamped into the frame near the type
plate (2).
4.3
Lighting
4.3.1
Road travel lighting
1
5
7
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
BM000-064
1 Side direction indicator/flashing warning
lamp
2 Dipped beam/full beam
3 Front position lamp
4 Front direction indicator/flashing warning
lamp
5 Warning beacon
6 Licence plate lamp
7 Rear direction indicator/flashing warning
lamp
8 Rear position lamp/parking light/brake
lamp
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
70
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
4.3.2
Machine Description
4
Lighting
4.3
Working lights
WARNING
Risk of accident from dazzling working lights
If the working lights are not switched off when driving on the road, road users may be dazzled.
„ Switch the working lights off during road travel.
The working lights are operated via the "Lighting" menu on the terminal, see Page 246.
2
1
5
4
3
2
3
BM000-331
1 Front cabin working light
2 Rear cabin working light
3 Side working light
4.3.3
4 Rear working light
5 Front working light
Maintenance lighting
The maintenance lighting is operated via the "Lighting" menu on the terminal, see Page 246.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
71
4
Machine Description
4.4
Overload protection on the machine
For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version
BM000_236
1 Maintenance lamp left side hood
2 Maintenance lamp cooler compartment
4.4
3 Maintenance lamp right side hood
4 Maintenance lamp rear storage compartment
Overload protection on the machine
NOTICE
Machine damage due to load peaks
The overload protections protect the machine against load peaks. For this reason, overload
protections must not be modified. The warranty for the machine becomes void if other than
the factory-specified overload protections are used.
„ Only use the overload protections installed in the machine.
„ To avoid early wear of the overload protection, switch the PTO shaft off if the overload
protection responds for a longer period of time.
„ „Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Remedy the malfunction, see Page 381.
Universal shaft
To protect against overload, friction disc clutches are installed on the universal shafts to the
mowers.
To vent the friction clutch, see Page 346.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
72
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
4.5
Machine Description
4
Functional description of self-propelled mower conditioner
4.5
Functional description of self-propelled mower conditioner
The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with
3 disc mowers with integrated mower conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower
conditioner is used for mowing various live agricultural grasses and pulse crops (from the initial
stage to the end of the photosynthetic process).
The 3 mowers can be used individually or together, thereby allowing the working width to be
adjusted. The integrated mower conditioners accelerate the drying process of the mown crop.
4.6
Functional description of GNSS receiver
For the "GNSS receiver" version
The Hemisphere A631 is a GNSS receiver which provides position data in NMEA2000 and
NMEA0183 format via CAN and 2 serial interfaces.
EGNOS/WAAS
In the basic version that is supplied by KRONE, the GNSS receiver provides position data via
GPS with EGNOS/WAAS accuracy.
RTK
Via an internet connection, the KSC receives correction data that is sent to the GNSS receiver.
The correction data increases the accuracy of the GPS data.
Using the RTK function of the receiver requires a licence to be purchased. That licence can be
purchased via the KRONE add-on F019 "RTK GNSS receiver". In addition, the KRONE add-on
F013 "NTRIP service" is required for the KSC.
Horizontal accuracy
Signal type
RMS (in 67 % of the time)
2DRMS (in 95 % of the time)
RTK
8 mm
15 mm
SBAS (EGNOS/WAAS)
300 mm
600 mm
Autonomous, no SA
1,200 mm
2,500 mm
Displays in the CCI terminal
The following displays appear on the CCI terminal when the GNSS receiver is used in
conjunction with the CCI 800 or CCI 1200 terminal.
Icon
Explanation
RTK reception active
EGNOS / WAAS reception active
GPS reception active
No reception possible
RTK float – Restricted RTK accuracy
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
73
4
Machine Description
4.7
SectionControl function description
Recommendation for use
•
•
•
Section Control
Steering systems
Other applications which require a precise GNSS signal.
Supported satellite systems
•
•
•
GPS
GLONASS
Galileo
Status LED of the antenna
LED status
Explanation
Off
No power supply
Red
Power supply available, no GNSS signal
Yellow
GNSS signal reception successful
Green
GNSS signal reception successful
INFO
Deactivating GPS output of the KRONE SmartConnect
If a KRONE SmartConnect is installed in parallel to the GPS antenna, ensure that the
selection "Source ISOBUS/external receiver" is selected in the KRONE SmartConnect menu
"GPS, GPS source"; see supplement to the operating instructions "KRONE SmartConnect".
4.7
SectionControl function description
For the "SectionControl" version
SectionControl permits automatic GPS-based section control of the mowers. When the mowers
run over already worked fields again, the mowers are lifted automatically and GPS controlled.
The SectionControl system consists of a "server" (terminal), a "client" (machine), and a GPS
antenna. The "server" controls the machine via the GPS data and the machine data which the
"client" communicates to the "server". The "client" responds to the control commands sent by
the "server".
The area data is either determined during a first trip around the field or taken from the farm
management system.
4.8
Functional description of parallel tracking
For "Parallel Tracking Terminal" version
The add-on F017 "Parallel Tracking Terminal" enables the parallel tracking function on the CCI
terminal. This function enables the terminal to generate lanes on the basis of GPS data and
working width. These lanes are visualised on the terminal and serve as steering aids for the
driver.
Parallel tracking is also used for lane planning when the "GPS guidance" steering system is
used, see Page 162 and see Page 196.
For further information about parallel tracking see instructions for the CCI terminal.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
74
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
4.9
Machine Description
4
Functional description of GPS guidance
4.9
Functional description of GPS guidance
For "GPS guidance" version
The "GPS guidance" steering system permits automatic driving along assigned lanes. Using
GNSS data, the machine automatically follows a previously defined lane. As long as the "GPS
guidance" steering system is in use, the driver does not have to make any active steering
movements. To be able to use the steering system, an initial lane must be driven along
beforehand. On the basis of the working width of the vehicle, the system automatically
calculates all the other lanes. On the headland, the machine must be turned manually by the
driver.
Further information see Page 162 and see Page 196.
4.10
Function description of swath width CV
With the "Swath width CV" version
BM000-502
Certain operating conditions may require the crops to be laid in a narrower swath. To do this,
extensions are mounted on the auger conveyor and the auger tray.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
75
5
Technical Data
5.1
Dimensions
Technical Data
5.1
Dimensions
H
5
L
B
X
BMG000-064
Dimensions
5.2
Width [B]
3,000 mm
Height [H]
4000 mm
Height with axle fully raised
4,150 mm
Length [L]
8,450 mm
Working width [X]
9,900 mm
Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel)
The technically permitted maximum speed may be restricted by different equipment features
(e.g. coupling device, axle, brake, tyres, etc.) or by statutory regulations in the country of use.
Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel)
Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel)
5.3
40 km/h
Engine data
Engine data
Manufacturer
Liebherr Machines Bulle SA
Engine type
D946 A7-05
Design
6-cylinder diesel engine
Emissions level
V (EU)
Displaced volume
12 L
Sustained engine power
330 kW (449 HP)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
76
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
5.4
Technical Data
5
Traction drive
5.4
Traction drive
Traction drive
5.5
Type
Continuously variable hydrostatic drive
Forward speed in field mode
0–25 km/h
Electrical system
Electrical system
5.6
Alternator voltage
24 V
Alternator amperage
180 A
Battery voltage
24 V (2x12 V)
Battery capacity
(2x) 135 Ah
Airborne noise emission
Airborne noise emission
5.7
Emissions value (sound pressure level)
77 dB (A)
Measurement device
Bruel & Kjaer, Type 2236
Accuracy class
2
Measurement uncertainty (according to DIN EN ISO 11201)
4 dB
Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature
Temperature range for machine operation
5.8
-5 to +45 °C
Vibration values
Vibration values
5.9
Total vibration value (upper limbs)
≤2.5 m/s²
RMS value of the weighted acceleration (entire body)
≤0.5m/s²
Consumables
NOTICE
Machine damage due to mixing of oil
If oils, which have different specifications, are mixed with each other, the machine may be
damaged.
„ Never mix oils, which have different specifications, with each other.
„ Contact your KRONE service partner before using an oil with a different specification after
changing the oil.
The following filling quantities are reference values. The actual refiling quantity is determined
when checking the level.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
77
5
Technical Data
5.9
Consumables
Biodegradable consumables can be used on request.
5.9.1
Oils
Vehicle
Designation
Filling quant- Specification
ity
Initial filling at the factory
Hydraulic oil tank
60 L
Hydraulic oil
HLP 46
SRS Wiolan HS 46
General hydraulic system
110 L
Hydraulic oil
HLP 46
SRS Wiolan HS 46
Engine oil (diesel engine)
40 L
LIEBHERR en- LIEBHERR engine oil
gine oil 10W-40
10W-40
options: Fuchs
Titan Cargo
MC 10W-40,
Chevron
Texaco URSA
TDX 10W-40,
Shell Rimula
R6M 10W-40
or Total Rubia
Tir 8600
10W-40
Transfer gearbox
10 L
Renolin Unisyn Renolin Unisyn CLP220
CLP220 or Mobil SHC 630
Front wheel hub gearbox
2.5 L
Gear oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50
Rear wheel hub gearbox
1.5 L
Gear oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50
Mowers
Designation
Filling quantity
Specification
Input gearbox on front mounted mower
1.7 L
SAE 90
Main gearbox on front mounted mower
0.9 L
SAE 90
Main gearbox of side mounted 6.5 L
mowers
SAE 90
Front mounted mower cutterbar
7L
SAE 90
Cutterbar side mounted
mowers
8L
SAE 90
List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly, rapidly
biodegradable HEPG pressure fluids allowed to be used for hydraulic oil tank:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
78
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
ISO viscosity class
Manufacturer
HEPG VG 46
Technical Data
5
Consumables
5.9
HLP VG 46
ADDINOL
Hydraulic oil HLP 46
AGIP
OSO 46
ARAL
BAF 46Vitam
ASEOL
Aqua VG 46
AVIA
Avia Hydrosynth 46
BECHEM
Hydrostar UWF 46
BP
Biohyd PEG 46
Aral Vitam GF 46
AVILUB RSL 46
Avia Fluid ZAD 46
Energol HLP 46
CASTROL
HYSPIN AWS 46
COFRAN
Cofraline extra 46 S
DEA
Econa PG 46
Astron HLP 46
ELF
ELFOLNA 46
ELFOLNA DS 46
ENGEN
Engen TQH 20/46
ESSO
Hydraulic oil PGK 46
NUTO H 46
FINA
Hydraulic oil D3031.46
HYDRAN 46
FRAGOL
Hydraulic TR 46
FUCHS
Renolin PGE 46
RENOLIN
MR 15, VG 46, B15 VG 46
Houghton
Syntolubric 46
KLÜBER
LAMORA HLP 46
KUWAIT
Q8 Haydn 46, Q8 Holst 46,
hydraulics S46
LIQUI MOLY
HLP 46 ISO
Mobil
Mobil DTE 25
Mobil Hydraulic Oil Medium
SHELL
Fluid BD 46
Shell Tellus oil 46
Shell Hydrol DO 46
SRS
WIOLAN HS 46
WIOLAN HX 4
Stuart
Hydrocor E46
Cofraline
Theunissen
ISOCOR E46
extra 46 S
TOTAL
Azolla ZS 46
TRIBOL
Tribol 772
Tribol ET 1140-46
Tribol 943 AW 46
VALVOLINE
VERKOL
Ultrasyn PG 46
Vesta HLP 46
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
79
5
Technical Data
5.10
Tyres
5.9.2
Lubricating grease
Designation
Filling quantity
Specification
Central lubrication unit
3.5 L
Grease up to NLGI class 2
with EP additives adjusted to
the outside temperatures
(thickener: Lithium Complex),
basic oil viscosity at 40°C:
85 ... 180 mm²/s, see
Page 357.
1
Lubrication points (manual
lubrication)
As required
Intermediate gear
65 g (per side)
Mobilgrease XHP 222
1
Lubricate the lubrication point until grease comes out of the bearing position. After lubricating,
remove the grease coming out of the bearing position.
5.9.3
Coolant
Consumables/Initial filling at the factory
5.9.4
5.9.5
5.10
Designation
Filling quantity Specification
Engine coolant tank
54 L
Initial filling at the factory
See enclosed
• Tectrol Coolprotect SI-OAT
LIEBHERR operat- • Fully demineralised water
ing instructions
Refrigerant (air conditioning)
Designation
Filling quantity
Specification
Refrigerant
1,800 g
R134a
Oil
75 mL
PAG ISO100
Designation
Filling quantity
Specification
Fuel tank
800 L
Urea tank
70 L
See shipped operating instructions from LIEBHERR
Fuel/urea
Tyres
Before working on a slope, increase the tyre pressure by 0.4 bar more than the recommended
pressure indicated in the following table. After working on the slope, the tyre pressure must be
set to the recommended values in the table.
If there is a large amount of road travel, increase the tyre pressure by 0.4 bar more than the
recommended tyre pressure indicated in the following table.
Before putting the machine into storage at the end of the harvesting season, set the tyre
pressure to the maximum permitted value. Before starting the new season, set the tyre pressure
to the values in the table.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
80
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Technical Data
5
Tyres
5.10
Tyres
Recommended tyre
pressure
Max. permissible tyre
pressure
Front: 800/65 R32 (AC70N)
1.6 bar
4.0 bars
Rear: 600/65 R28 (AC65)
1.4 bar
2.0 bars
Front: 800/60 R32 (Flotation Trac)
1.2 bar
4.0 bars
Rear: 600/60 R30.5 (Flotation Trac)
1.2 bar
4.0 bars
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
81
6
Control and Display Elements
6.1
Overview of operating elements
6
Control and Display Elements
6.1
Overview of operating elements
4
3
7
1
8
5
9
6
10
11
2
12
BM000-034
1
2
3
4
5
6
6.2
Steering column with steering wheel
Brake pedal
Operation unit automatic climate control
Keypad for wiper and warning beacon
Mirror adjuster
Interior lighting/control lever lighting
switch
7
8
9
10
11
12
Main mode switch
Navigation module
Keypad
Ignition lock
Terminal
Control lever
Opening doors and windows of cabin
Opening right side window
In case of an emergency, the right side window can be opened as an exit door.
WARNING
Danger to life due to blocked escape route
If the right side window cannot be opened without obstruction, the escape route for the driver
is obstructed.
„ Make sure prior to travel that the right platform is free.
To fully open the window on the right next to the driver's seat:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
82
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Control and Display Elements
6
Opening doors and windows of cabin
6.2
BM000-067
„ Swivel the lever (1) forwards until it locks into position.
BM000-176
„ Pull the cotter pin (2) and remove it.
BM000-177
„ Open the side window (3) all the way.
Opening the cabin door
Opening the cabin door from outside
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
83
6
Control and Display Elements
6.2
Opening doors and windows of cabin
BX001-138
„ Unlock the door lock (1) with the door key.
„ Press in the door lock (1) and open the door.
Opening the cabin door from inside
1
BX001-139
„ Press up the door opening lever (1) and open the door outwards.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
84
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
6.3
Control and Display Elements
6
Control and display elements on the steering column
6.3
Control and display elements on the steering column
BM000-035
1
Steering wheel
2
Indicator and warning lamps, see
5
Page 89
Unlocking pedal for steering column adjustment bottom, see Page 128
3
6.3.1
Steering column switch
6.3.1.1
Activating horn
4
Release lever for horizontal steering
column adjustment and upper pivot
point, see Page 128
Steering column switch, see Page 85
BM000-055
„ To actuate the horn, press the momentary switch (1) for the horn on the steering column
switch (2).
Æ As long as the momentary switch is pressed, the horn sounds.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
85
6
Control and Display Elements
6.3
Control and display elements on the steering column
6.3.1.2
Switching direction indicators on/off
BM000-056
„ To switch on the right direction indicator, move the steering column switch (1) forwards.
Æ The right direction indicator is switched on.
„ To switch on the left direction indicator, move the steering column switch (1) backwards.
Æ The left direction indicator is switched on.
The direction indicator is switched off when the steering wheel is turned.
„ To switch off the direction indicator when the steering wheel is not turned, move the steering
column switch (1) in the opposite direction.
The "Direction indicator" indicator lamp lights up when the direction indicator lamps are switched
on, see Page 89.
6.3.1.3
Switching parking light, dipped beam and work lightings on/off
WARNING
Risk of accident from dazzling working lights
If the working lights are not switched off when driving on the road, road users may be dazzled.
„ Switch the working lights off during road travel.
2
1
I
II
III
IV
BM000-059
The lighting setting ring gauge (2) on the steering column switch (1) can be turned to the
following positions:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
86
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Pos.
Icon
Control and Display Elements
6
Control and display elements on the steering column
6.3
Explanation
I
Switches the light off.
II
Switches the parking light on.
III
Switches dipped beam on.
IV
Switches the work lights on.
„ To switch on the parking light, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) one notch forwards to
position II.
Æ Front parking light and rear parking light are lit, see Page 70.
ü The ignition is switched on, see Page 100.
„ To switch on the dipped beam, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) to the second notch
forwards to position III.
Æ The green "Dimmed beam" indicator lamp is lit, see Page 89.
Æ Dipped beam, front parking light, licence plate lamp and rear position lamp are on, see
Page 70
„ To switch on the working lights, turn the lighting setting ring gauge (2) to the third notch
forwards to position IV.
Æ The working lights are lit according to the pre-setting on the terminal, see Page 246.
„ To switch off the parking light, dipped beam and working lights, turn the lighting setting ring
gauge (2) to the last notch backwards to position I.
Æ All the lights are switched off.
6.3.1.4
Switching full beam on/off
BM000-057
ü The dimmed beam is switched on, see Page 86.
„ To switch on full beam, press the steering column switch (1) downwards.
Æ The steering column switch locks in this position and full beam is switched on.
Æ The blue "Full beam" indicator lamp lights up, see Page 89.
„ To switch off full beam, move the steering column switch (1) to the neutral position.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
87
6
Control and Display Elements
6.3
Control and display elements on the steering column
6.3.1.5
Actuating headlamp flasher
BM000-058
„ To activate the headlamp flasher, press the steering column switch (1) upwards.
Æ As long as the steering column switch is pressed upwards, the full beam and the blue "Full
beam" indicator lamp are lit, see Page 89.
6.3.1.6
Switching windshield wipers on/off
1
2
I
II
III
IV
BM000-060
The setting ring gauge (2) for the windshield wiper on the steering column switch (1) can be
turned to the following positions:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
88
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Pos.
Control and Display Elements
6
Control and display elements on the steering column
6.3
Icon
Explanations
I
Switches the windscreen wiper off.
II
Switches on interval mode of the windscreen
wiper.
III
Switches on continuous operation of the windscreen wiper.
IV
Switches on the windscreen washer system.
„ To switch on the wiper in interval mode, turn the setting ring gauge (2) one notch forwards to
position II.
Æ The windshield wiper operates in interval mode.
„ To switch on the wiper in continuous operation, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the second
notch forwards to position III.
Æ The windshield wiper operates in continuous operation.
„ To switch on the windscreen washer system, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the third
notch forwards to position IV.
Æ The windscreen washer system is operating.
„ To switch off the wiper, turn the setting ring gauge (2) to the last notch backwards to position
I.
Æ The wiper returns to the rest position and stops.
6.3.2
Indicator and warning lamps
BM000-263
1 "Left direction indicator" indicator
4 Warning lamp "Charging control"
lamp
2 "Full beam" indicator lamp
3 "Dimmed beam" indicator lamp
5 not assigned
6 "Right direction indicator" indicator lamp
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
89
6
Control and Display Elements
6.4
Actuating service brake
6.3.3
Switching the flashing warning light on/off
BM000-061
„ To switch on the flashing warning light, press the flashing warning light switch (1) to position
II.
Æ When the flashing warning light is switched on, all direction indicators flash simultaneously
and the warning lights for the direction indicators on the left and right are lit, see Page 89.
„ To switch off the flashing warning light, press the flashing warning light switch (1) to position
I.
Æ The warning lights for direction indicators on the left and right go out.
6.4
Actuating service brake
WARNING
Risk of accident due to defective service brake!
If the service brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in
time. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.
„ Before starting the machine, always check service brake and ensure its functionality.
BM000-062
„ Before driving, check the service brake, drive the machine at low speed one metre forwards
and actuate the brake pedal (1).
Æ If the machine brakes, the service brake is functioning correctly.
Æ If the machine does not brake, stop driving the machine.
„ Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 33.
„ Have a technician check and repair the service brake.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
90
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
6.5
Control and Display Elements
6
Mirror adjuster
6.5
Mirror adjuster
Setting outside rear-view mirrors
WARNING
Danger to life of persons next to and behind the machine due to impaired view of the
driver!
If the outside rear-view mirrors are not correctly set, the driver does not have a proper view of
the area around the machine, possibly placing people in danger when the machine is being
driven.
„ Before driving the machine, set the outside rear-view mirrors so that the driver has
maximum visibility of the rear area from the driver’s seat.
2
3
1
4
BX002-424
„ To set the left outside rear-view mirror, turn the knob (2) on the mirror adjuster until the
mark (3) is on the left mirror symbol (1).
„ Push the knob (2) in the direction in which the mirror is to be adjusted.
Æ The area of the left outside rear-view mirror moves in the desired direction.
„ To set the right outside rear-view mirror, turn the knob (2) on the mirror adjuster until the
mark (3) is on the right mirror symbol (4).
„ Push the knob (2) in the direction in which the mirror is to be adjusted.
Æ The area of the right outside rear-view mirror moves in the desired direction.
Mirror heating is set with the "Mirror heating" menu on the terminal, see Page 247.
6.6
Setting the anti-collision mirror
WARNING
Danger to life of persons on right next to the machine as the driver only has an
impaired view!
If the anti-collision mirror is not adjusted correctly, the driver does not have a proper view of
the ground area next to the right front wheel. This can endanger persons when the machine is
moving.
„ Before you start driving, adjust the anti-collision mirror such that the ground area next to
the right front wheel is sufficiently visible to the driver from the driver’s seat.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
91
6
Control and Display Elements
6.7
Keypad for wiper and warning beacon
BXG000-097
„ Manually set the anti-collision mirror (1) in such a way that the ground area next to the right
front wheel can be checked prior to starting.
Mirror heating is set with the "Mirror heating" menu on the terminal, see Page 247.
6.7
Keypad for wiper and warning beacon
1
2
4
3
BX002-425
Item
Designation
Explanation
1
Left wiper key
Switches the left wiper on/off
2
Right wiper key
Switches the right wiper on/off.
3
Warning beacon key
Switches the warning beacon on/off
4
Rear wiper key
Key is not assigned
„ To switch on a wiper, press the respective key (1, 2).
Æ The corresponding wiper wipes.
„ To switch off the wiper, press the respective key (1, 2).
Æ The corresponding wiper switches to park position.
„ To perform a wipe/wash process, hold down the respective key (1, 2).
Æ The nozzle of the corresponding wiper sprays water and the wiper wipes.
INFO
In some countries the warning beacons must be switched on for road travel. Observe the
respective national statutory regulations.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
92
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Control and Display Elements
6
Ladder lighting
6.8
The warning beacons are switched on automatically. If the main mode switch is in the "Road
mode" position.
„ To manually switch off the warning beacons, press the warning beacon key (3).
Æ The warning beacon is switched off.
6.8
Ladder lighting
For the "Ladder and maintenance lighting" version
To enable the rungs on the ladder up to the cabin to be easily seen, even in the dark, the rungs
can be illuminated
BM000-234
Leaving Home function
The Leaving Home function allows the cabin to be entered safely, even in the dark.
„ To activate the "Leaving Home" function, press the "Ladder lighting" (3) key.
Æ The lights (1), (2), (4) and (5) light up for a certain amount of time.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
93
6
Control and Display Elements
6.9
Interior lighting
Coming Home function
The Coming Home function allows the cabin to be left safely, even in the dark.
„ The activate the Coming Home function, turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.
Æ The lights (1), (2), (4) and (5) light up for a certain amount of time.
Lighting for refuelling
The lighting for refuelling serves to illuminate around the tank nozzle sufficiently in the dark.
„ To activate the lighting for refuelling, press the "Ladder lighting" key (3) 2 x or if either the
Coming Home function or Leaving Home function is active, press the "Ladder lighting" key
(3) 1 x.
Æ The lights (2) light up for a certain amount of time.
INFO
The time period for activation of the individual functions can be set in the terminal in the menu
cabin "Lighting settings".
6.9
Interior lighting
BM000-040
The interior lamp (2) is located on the cab roof and is switched with the switch (3).
The switch has 3 positions:
Pos.
Explanation
I
The interior lamp is switched via the door contact switch.
II
The interior lamp has been switched off.
III
The interior lamp has been switched on.
Switching logic when the switch (3) is in position II:
•
•
•
When the cabin door is opened, the interior lamp (2) is switched on and is switched off
again after a delay.
When the cabin door is being opened, the interior lamp (2) is switched on. As soon as
ignition stage II is switched on see Page 168, the interior lamp (2) goes out.
When the diesel engine has been switched off, the interior lamp (2) is switched on and goes
out after a short time.
In addition to the interior lamp (2), the lighting for the control lever (1) is switched on as soon as
the parking, dipped or full beam has been switched on.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
94
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
6.10
Control and Display Elements
6
Operating elements on control lever
6.10
Operating elements on control lever
The control lever is used to make important settings and issue commands for road and field
mode of the machine.
7
6
3
2
9
M4
M3
5
8
10
M2
4
11
12
M1
13
1.4
14
1.1
1.2
1
1.3
BXG000-010
The keys on the control lever are used to run machine functions. The keys are assigned either
to sensing mode, step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the particular key operating
mode involved, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:
•
•
Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The
function is not stopped by releasing the key.
Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.
The release button
designated in the following table is located on the keypad, see
Page 97.
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1.1
"Lower/fold down all mowers sim- Lowers all mowers simultaneously. (Sensing
ultaneously" key
mode)
With previously pressed release button
:
Folds down all mowers simultaneously from the
transport into the headland position. (Step mode)
For the "Hydraulically foldable side guards"
version:
The side guards of the mowers are automatically
actuated.
1.2
"Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" key
Raises all mowers simultaneously. (1.stage: step
mode; 2. stage: sensing mode)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
95
6
Control and Display Elements
6.10
Operating elements on control lever
Pos.
Designation
1.2
"Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" key
Explanation
With previously pressed release button
:
Folds up all mowers simultaneously from headland position to transport position. (Step mode)
For the "Hydraulically foldable side guards"
version:
The side guards of the mowers are automatically
actuated.
1.3
"Left front mower side shift" key
For the "Hydraulic side shift on front mower"
version:
Shifts front mower to left. (Step mode)
1.4
"Right front mower side shift" key For the "Hydraulic side shift on front mower"
version:
Shifts front mower to right. (Step mode)
2
"Acceleration behaviour" switch
Switches the value for the acceleration behaviour.
3
"Traction drive" key
Releases the traction drive.
4
"M1" key
Freely assignable memory key
5
"M2" key
Freely assignable memory key
6
"M3" key
Freely assignable memory key
7
"M4" key
Freely assignable memory key
8
"Automatic steering system" key
For the "Automatic steering" version:
Activates the automatic steering system. (Sensing mode)
9
"Lower front mower" key
Lowers the front mower. (Sensing mode)
10
"Raise front mower" key
Raises the front mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.
stage: sensing mode)
11
"Lower/fold down right side
mounted mower" key
Lowers the right mower (sensing mode).
With pressed release button
:
Folds down right mower from transport into headland position. (Step mode)
12
"Raise/fold in right side mounted
mower" key
Raises the right mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.
stage: sensing mode)
With previously pressed release button
:
Folds in the right mower from the headland position into the transport position. (Step mode)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
96
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Control and Display Elements
6
Control and display elements on the keypad
6.11
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
13
"Lower/fold down left side mounted mower" key
Lowers the left mower. (Sensing mode)
With previously pressed release button
:
Folds down left mower from transport into headland position. (Step mode)
14
"Raise/fold in left side mounted
mower" key
Raises the left mower. (1.stage: step mode; 2.
stage: sensing mode)
With previously pressed release button
:
Folds in the left mower from the headland position into the transport position. (Step mode)
6.11
Control and display elements on the keypad
BXG000-011
•
•
The keys that can be used to select functions light up.
The top left LED in each key flashes on and off or lights up when the selected function is
executed.
The keys on the keypad are used to run machine functions. The keys are designed either for
sensing mode or step mode or 2-stage operation. Depending on the operating mode of the
keys, there are 2 methods of running the machine functions:
•
•
Sensing mode: The function is activated and completely run by tapping the key. The
function is not stopped by releasing the key.
Step mode: The function is run for as long as the key is pressed.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
97
6
Control and Display Elements
6.11
Control and display elements on the keypad
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Release button for "Mowing units Release for:
and drives"
• Fold in/down mowing units
• Switch on drives (Sensing mode)
2
Not assigned.
3
"Switch on all drives" key
Switch on all drives. (Sensing mode)
4
"Switch off all drives" key
Switch off all drives. (Sensing mode)
5
"Switch on left drive" key
Switch on left drive. (Sensing mode)
6
"Switch off left drive" key
Switch off left drive. (Sensing mode)
7
"Switch on front drive" key
Switch on front drive (Sensing mode)
8
"Switch off front drive" key
Switch off front drive (Sensing mode)
9
"Switch on right drive" key
Switch on right drive. (Sensing mode)
10
"Switch off right drive" key
Switch off right drive. (Sensing mode)
11
"Increase diesel engine speed"
key
Increases the speed of the diesel engine. (Step
mode)
12
"Reduce diesel engine speed"
key
Reduces the speed of the diesel engine. (Step
mode)
13
"Diesel engine speed" key
Switches between saved speed of the diesel engine and idle speed of the diesel engine (sensing
mode).
14
"M-Power/Eco-Power" key
Switches between Eco‑Power mode and
M‑Power mode (Sensing mode)
15
"Parking brake" key
• Applies the parking brake. (Sensing mode)
• Releases the parking brake. (Sensing mode)
16
"Traction control system" key
Changes between TC I (low slip) and TC II (increased slip) and OFF. (Sensing mode)
17
"Raise front and rear axle" key
Raises front and rear axle. (Step mode)
18
"Lower front and rear axle" key
Lowers front and rear axle. (Step mode)
19
"Fold down side guard" key
Folds down side guard. (Sensing mode)
20
"Fold up side guard" key
Folds up side guard. (Sensing mode)
21
"Open left swath hood" key
Opens left swath hood. (Sensing mode)
22
"Close left swath hood" key
Closes left swath hood. (Sensing mode)
23
"Open right swath hood" key
Opens right swath hood. (Sensing mode)
24
"Close right swath hood" key
Closes right swath hood. (Sensing mode)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
98
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
6.12
Control and Display Elements
6
Main mode switch
6.12
Main mode switch
BM000-012
The Main Mode Switch (8) is used to select the operating mode of the machine.
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Quick-stop switch
Stops the working functions. The diesel engine
continues running.
2
Main Mode Switch tip
Indicates the selected operating mode.
3
"Neutral mode" switch position
Selects neutral mode.
4
"Road mode" switch position
Selects road mode.
5
"Maintenance mode" switch posi- Selects maintenance mode.
tion
6
"Field mode" switch position
Selects field mode.
7
Main Mode Switch unlocking
device
Pressed unlocking device releases the rotary
switch.
Released unlocking device locks the rotary
switch.
8
Main mode switch
Selects the operating mode of the machine.
To select an operating mode with the Main Mode Switch (8):
„ Press and hold down the unlocking device (7) on the Main Mode Switch (8) and
simultaneously turn the Main Mode Switch (8) to the required operating mode.
Æ The tip (2) indicates the selected operating mode.
To stop the working functions in an emergency:
„ Press the quick-stop switch (1).
To release the working functions again:
„ Unlock the quick-stop switch (1) by slightly turning it clockwise.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
99
6
Control and Display Elements
6.13
Quick-stop switch
6.13
Quick-stop switch
BXG000-006
The quick-stop switch (1) in the cabin is used to stop the working functions of the machine. The
diesel engine continues running.
„ To actuate it, press down the quick-stop switch (1) until it locks into position.
Æ The working functions are stopped. The switch is locked.
BXG000-058
„ To release it, turn the quick-stop switch (1) clockwise until the home position is reached.
Æ The working functions are released again and can be activated again. The switch has been
released.
6.14
Ignition lock
BM000-029
The ignition key (1) can be turned to 4 different positions in the ignition lock:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
100
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Control and Display Elements
6
Automatic climate control
6.15
Pos.
Explanation
STOP
The circuit is interrupted.
I
The circuit for the electronics is switched on.
II
The ignition is switched on
III
Start position
6.15
Automatic climate control
6.15.1
Overview of automatic climate control
The driver can use the automatic climate control operation unit to operate the air conditioning
and heating system of the cabin.
INFO
If the power supply to the control unit of the automatic climate control is interrupted, the
control unit performs a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last
setting to be saved appears.
BX000-140
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
101
6
Control and Display Elements
6.15
Automatic climate control
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Air conditioning mode key
Switches air conditioning mode on/off.
2
Plus key
In automatic mode: Increases the value for the required cabin temperature.
In manual mode: Increases the rotational speed
of the evaporator fan.
3
Icon for the cabin
Indicates the air flow in the cabin in REHEAT
mode.
4
Air conditioning mode icon
Air conditioning mode has been switched on.
5
REHEAT mode icon
REHEAT mode has been switched on.
6
Temperature unit
Indicates the temperature unit of the setpoint
value of the cabin temperature in °C or °F.
7
REHEAT key
Switches REHEAT mode (dehumidifying cabin
air) on/off.
8
Shift key for temperature units
Switches between temperature units °Celsius/
°Fahrenheit (key covered)
9
Shift key for operating mode
Automatically/manually switches between rotational speed of the evaporator fan.
10
Numeric display
Indicates the setpoint value of the cabin temperature or the error code.
11
Manual fan mode icon
Appears in manual fan mode.
12
Bar icon for the rotational speed
of the evaporator fan
Indicates the rotational speed of the evaporator
fan in manual mode.
13
Fully automatic mode icon
Fully automatic mode has been switched on.
14
Minus key
In automatic mode: Reduces the value for the required cabin temperature.
In manual mode: Reduces the rotational speed of
the evaporator fan.
15
6.15.2
Control unit on/off key
Switches the control unit on/off.
Switching on automatic climate control
„ To switch on automatic climate control, press
.
When the automatic climate control has been switched on, the control unit performs a self test.
The software version is displayed for approx. 5 seconds.
EQ002-096
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
102
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Control and Display Elements
6
Automatic climate control
6.15
Then the operating hours of the air conditioning are displayed for 5 seconds (e.g. 6 operating
hours).
EQ002-095
Then the last saved setting appears in the display.
6.15.3
Setting cabin temperature
EQ002-098
The display shows the following information:
•
•
The current cabin temperature in °C.
That the control unit is in automatic mode (AUTO).
„ To change the cabin temperature, gradually press
or
until the required value is
shown on the display.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
103
6
Control and Display Elements
6.15
Automatic climate control
6.15.4
Switching air conditioning mode on/off
EQ002-101
„ To switch on air conditioning mode, press
Æ The icon
.
is shown on the display. Air conditioning mode has been switched on.
Æ The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.
„ To switch off air conditioning mode, press
Æ The
.
icon goes out on the display. Air conditioning mode has been switched off.
Æ The compressor is switched off by the control unit.
6.15.5
Switching REHEAT mode on/off
During REHEAT mode the cabin air is dehumidified.
EQ002-094
„ To switch on REHEAT mode, press
Æ The icon
.
is shown on the display. REHEAT mode has been switched on.
In REHEAT mode
•
•
•
the compressor is permanently switched on,
the rotational speed of the evaporator fan can be manually adjusted further,
the control unit switches on the heater as required to keep the room temperature at the
setpoint value.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
104
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Control and Display Elements
6
Automatic climate control
6.15
REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 60 minutes.
„ To switch off REHEAT mode, press
Æ The
6.15.6
.
icon goes out on the display. REHEAT mode has been switched off.
Manually setting the evaporator fan speed
EQ002-093
„ To switch on the manual setting of the rotational speed of the evaporator fan,
press.
Æ The manual setting of the rotational speed of the evaporator fan is active.
Æ The bargraph
shows the currently set fan speed (full bargraph =
100%).
Æ The AUTO icon goes out on the display. AUTO mode has been switched off.
Æ The
icon flashes for 5 s.
During this period the fan speed can be increased or reduced in 10% steps.
„ To increase the fan speed, press
„ To reduce the fan speed, press
.
.
INFO
The lowest adjustable fan speed is 30% (three bars are displayed).
„ To activate AUTO mode, press
twice.
Æ The AUTO icon is shown on the display. AUTO mode has been switched on.
Æ The
and
icons are no longer displayed.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
105
6
Control and Display Elements
6.15
Automatic climate control
6.15.7
Switching temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees
Fahrenheit
EQ002-092
„ To switch the temperature display between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit, hold
down the concealed key (1) and also press the
key.
EQ002-091 / EQ002-101
Æ The temperature display switches to the other temperature unit.
6.15.8
Malfunctions indicated on display
Error code (F0)
EQ002-099
A defective ambient temperature sensor is displayed by the flashing display (F0):
•
The control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no
longer ready for operation.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
106
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Control and Display Elements
6
Sockets
6.16
INFO
In case of an error, the climate control continues working with the setting that was valid before
the fault was recorded.
Possible causes of fault:
•
•
Short circuit or discontinuance of sensor line.
The plug connection on sensor or control unit temperature sensor is defective.
After the error has been eliminated, the climate control is ready for operation again.
The fault is no longer displayed.
Error code (F1)
EQ002-100
Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1):
•
The control unit has recorded an error of blow-out temperature sensor, the control is no
longer ready for operation.
INFO
In case of an error, the climate control continues working with the setting that was valid before
the fault was recorded.
Possible causes of fault:
•
•
Short circuit or discontinuance of sensor line.
The plug connection on sensor or control unit temperature sensor is defective.
After the error has been eliminated, the climate control is ready for operation again.
The fault is no longer displayed.
6.16
Sockets
6.16.1
Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket
WARNING
Risk of burns from the hot cigarette lighter
During operation the cigarette lighter generates such high temperatures that it may cause
burns.
„ Do not held the cigarette lighter (1) in the depressed position.
„ Hold the hot cigarette lighter (1) by the handle only.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
107
6
Control and Display Elements
6.16
Sockets
BX001-203
On the right side of the cabin next to the ignition lock are:
•
•
Cigarette lighter (12 V) (1)
Socket (24 V) (2)
„ Press in the cigarette lighter (12 V) (1) to heat it up:
Æ When the required lighter temperature has been reached, the cigarette lighter (12 V) (1)
jumps back out automatically.
Electrical consumers with 24 V and maximum 15 A can be connected to the socket (24 V) (2).
If the diesel engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged.
6.16.2
12 V sockets
BX001-204
Located on the right side of the cabin next to the ignition lock is the 3-pin 12 volt socket
(15 A) (1).
BX001-206
The 12 volt socket (1) is located behind the driver's seat.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
108
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
6.16.3
Control and Display Elements
6
Sockets
6.16
Diagnostics sockets
1
3
2
BMG000-068
There is the following diagnostics interfaces behind the driver's seat:
•
•
•
ISOBUS diagnostics socket (1)
KRONE diagnostics socket (2)
For "GPS guidance" version: Ethernet diagnostics socket (3)
„ Ensure that only devices authorised by KRONE are connected to the diagnostics interfaces.
6.16.4
USB connection
BX001-207
The USB connection (1) is located in the right armrest.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
109
7
Initial operation
7.1
Checklist for initial operation
7
Initial operation
This chapter describes assembly and adjustment work on the machine which may be carried
out by qualified technicians only. Here, the notice “Personnel qualification of technicians”
applies,see Page 20.
For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 278.
WARNING
Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to faulty initial operation
If the initial operation is carried out incorrectly or incompletely, the machine may present
defects. As a result, people may be injured or killed or the machine may be damaged.
„ Initial operation must only be carried out by authorised technicians.
„ Read in full and observe the “Personnel qualification of technicians”,see Page 20.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
7.1
Checklist for initial operation
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
There are no leakages present in the machine.
All cable and plug connections are properly connected and laid.
All hoses are properly laid.
All guard cloths are mounted, see Page 113
All screws and nuts are checked for tightness, and are tightened to the specified tightening
torques, see Page 278.
The machine is fully lubricated, see Page 354.
The universal shafts are lubricated, see Page 351.
The wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use, see Page 62.
The platforms, steps and standing areas are clean and in proper condition, see Page 62.
The fire extinguisher is mounted, see Page 111.
The licence plate is mounted, see Page 112.
The blades have been installed, in "quick-change blades" version see Page 332, in "bolted
blades" version see Page 331.
The tyres have been checked and the tyre pressure is adjusted correctly, see Page 312.
The hub covers of the rear axle have been checked for damage and tight fit (for "front wheel
drive" version), see Page 309.
The anti-twist locks are mounted on the left and right of the lighting module, see Page 119.
The enclosed operating instructions are in the drawer below the driver's seat.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
110
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
7.2
Initial operation
7
Mounting fire extinguisher
7.2
Mounting fire extinguisher
BPG000-034
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Insert the fire extinguisher (1) into the support at the front on the left ladder so that the
operating instructions on the type plate are readable and are facing outwards.
WARNING! Risk of injury due to falling fire extinguisher! In order to secure the fire
extinguisher, adjust the tensioning straps with sufficient tension according to the
circumference of the fire extinguisher.
„ Adjust the length of the tensioning straps according to the circumference of the fire
extinguisher.
„ Shorten the length of the tensioning straps by a few millimetres and close the fasteners to
guarantee that the closed tensioning straps are tensioned sufficiently.
Æ The tensioning straps have been properly adjusted if the fasteners can only be closed by
means of an auxiliary tool (e. g. screwdriver).
Æ If it is possible to close the fasteners manually:
„ Shorten the length of the tensioning straps so far that the fasteners can only be closed
by an auxiliary tool (e. g. screwdriver).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
111
7
Initial operation
7.3
Mounting licence plate
7.3
Mounting licence plate
Mounting the licence plate on the licence plate holder at the front
X1
1
X3
X3
X2
X2
X1
2
X4
X4
BM000-525
X1=222 mm
X2=100 mm
X3=194 mm
X4=215.5 mm
This is an example of how to mount the license plate holder (1) at the front. The dimensions of
the licence plate holder (1) may vary depending on the country.
„ To mount the licence plate holder (1) on the front spoiler of the machine, drill 4 boreholes (2)
in the front spoiler according to the specified dimensions.
„ Mount the licence plate holder (1) on the front spoiler (use the drilled boreholes (2)).
„ Mount the licence plate in the licence plate holder (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
112
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Initial operation
7
Mounting guard cloths
7.4
Mounting the rear licence plate
1
BM000-100
„ Mount the rear licence plate on the licence plate holder (1) at the tailgate.
7.4
Mounting guard cloths
ü All mowing units are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
Side mounted mowers
1
BMG000-056
„ Mount the guard cloths (1) on the right and left side mounted mower.
To do this:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
113
7
Initial operation
7.4
Mounting guard cloths
BM000-187
„ Remove the screw (1).
„ Dismount the cover cap (2).
BM000-188
„ Push the guard cloth (2) into the protective profile (1).
BM000-189
„ Mount the cover cap (2) with the screw (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
114
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Initial operation
7
Mounting guard cloths
7.4
2
2
3
1
2
1
BMG000-057
„ Mount the screw connections (3).
„ Close the turnlock fasteners (1) on the guard cloths (2).
Front mounted mowers
BMG000-043
„ Mount the guard cloths (1) on the front mounted mower.
To do this:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
115
7
Initial operation
7.4
Mounting guard cloths
BM000-187
„ Remove the screw (1).
„ Dismount the cover cap (2).
BM000-188
„ Push the guard cloth (2) into the protective profile (1).
BM000-189
„ Mount the cover cap (2) with the screw (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
116
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Initial operation
7
Mounting guard cloths
7.4
BMG000-044
„ Mount the screw connections (1).
„ Mount the screw connections (3) with the clamping strap (4).
„ Close the turnlock fasteners (5) on the guard cloth (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
117
7
Initial operation
7.4
Mounting guard cloths
Cross conveyor
For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
1
2
4
3
4
5
5
BM000-121
ü The side mounted mowers are in headland position.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The side mounted mowers have been securely supported, see Page 33.
„ Mount one deflector curtain (3) each on the right and left cross conveyor.
To do this:
„ Remove the deflector curtain (3) from the rear storage compartment.
„ Mount the deflector curtain (3) with the screw connections (5) and the clamping straps (4) on
the cross conveyor.
„ Insert the support rod (1) through the eyes of the deflector curtain (3), attach them to the
machine frame and secure them with the spring cotter pin (2).
Swath cloth under the machine
BM000-235
„ Remove the swath cloth (1) from the rear storage compartment.
„ Mount the swath cloth (1) on the cover sheet (3) with the screw connections (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
118
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
7.5
Initial operation
7
Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module
7.5
Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module
1
3
2
3
4
BM000-339
„ Take the 2 anti-twist locks (2) and the screw connections (1) (each with 2 discs, 1 screw
(M4 x 20), 1 locknut) from the rear storage compartment.
„ Perform the following steps on the right and left of the lighting module.
„ To remove the sheet (4) from the lighting module, remove the screw connections (3).
„ Mount the anti-twist lock (2) on the support tube using the screw connection (1).
„ Mount the sheet (4) with the screw connections (3).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
119
8
Start-up
8.1
Check before start-up
8
Start-up
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
8.1
Check before start-up
INFO
Compliance with the stipulated checks on the machine significantly increases the safety and
the lifetime of the machine.
A machine with established defects must not be started.
„ If it is established that the machine has defects, shut down the machine and eliminate these
defects or have them eliminated by technicians.
„ Before starting up the machine, carry out the inspections listed below and checks from the
maintenance table "Every 10 hours, at least daily", see Page 273.
General
ü
ü
ü
ü
There are no leakages present in the machine.
All cable and plug connections are properly connected and laid.
All hoses are properly laid.
The safety devices are mounted and checked for completeness and damage.
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
The platforms, steps and standing areas are clean and in proper condition, see Page 62.
The wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use, see Page 62.
The horn is functioning properly, see Page 85.
The fire extinguisher is mounted in its support / holder and is ready for use, see Page 314.
The machine has been prepared for mowing operation, , see Page 134.
Cabin
ü The position of the mirrors and the camera are set, outside rear-view mirror see Page 91,
anti-collision mirror see Page 91, interior rear-view mirror and camera see Page 121.
ü The driver's seat is adjusted correctly, see Page 121.
ü All emergency exits are freely accessible and can be opened unhindered, see Page 82.
ü All windows and mirrors are cleaned.
ü All wiper blades are in good condition.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
120
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Start-up
8
Setting driver’s seat
8.2
Lighting and labeling
ü The lighting and the warning beacon are correctly set and function perfectly, see Page 92.
ü All red-white warning panels for making the machine visible are mounted in accordance with
national laws.
8.2
Setting driver’s seat
8.2.1
Air-cushioned comfort seat
WARNING
Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts!
When the control lever cannot be moved freely in all directions, it is not possible to execute all
functions of the control lever. It may then not be possible to respond quickly and correctly to
hazardous situations.
„ After comfort seat, right armrest and steering column have been set, check whether the
control lever can be moved freely in all directions.
„ Adapt the setting when the control lever cannot be moved freely in all directions.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to incorrectly set driver's seat!
When the driver's seat is not adjusted individually to the driver, the driver may damage his
health due to bad posture while working.
„ Before starting up the machine, adjust the driver's seat ergonomically and individually to
the driver.
WARNING
Danger of injury resulting from unintentional movement of machine parts
If the vibration damper has been set too softly, the seat may hit the floor when driving on a
bad road and contact with the operating elements is no longer guaranteed. It may then not be
possible to respond quickly and correctly to hazardous situations. Thus there is a risk of
serious injuries or death.
„ Always set the vibration damper of the comfort seat tightly enough to prevent the seat
from hitting the floor even when driving on a bad road.
WARNING
Risk of accident due to brief distraction of the driver
When the driver's seat or steering column is adjusted while driving, the driver cannot pay
adequate attention to the travel path. This may result in serious accidents.
„ Adjust the driver's seat and the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
121
8
Start-up
8.2
Setting driver’s seat
8.2.1.1
Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "Standard" version)
BXG000-100
1
2
3
4
5
6
Driver's seat
Seat depth adjustment
Seat angle adjustment
Longitudinal adjustment
Horizontal suspension
Height setting
7
8
9
10
11
12
Adjustment of the backrest
Left armrest
Lumbar support
Headrest
Cover cap armrest adjustment
Vibration damper setting
The air comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.
Height adjustment
The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent
damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.
„ Pull lever (6) completely upward.
ð The driver's seat (1) is moved upwards.
„ Press lever (6) completely down.
ð Move driver's seat (1) downwards.
Æ When the upper or lower end stop of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the
height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.
Horizontal suspension
The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the
horizontal suspension.
„ To activate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the front.
„ To deactivate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the rear.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
122
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Start-up
8
Setting driver’s seat
8.2
Longitudinal adjustment
„ Pull locking lever (4) up, push driver's seat (1) forward or backward into the desired position
and permit the locking lever (4) to lock in place.
„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. The driver's seat must no longer be
movable into another position.
Seat angle adjustment
„ Pull the key (3) up and set the inclination of the seat base by simultaneously increasing or
decreasing the pressure on the seat base.
Seat depth adjustment
„ Pull key (2) up and move seat base to the desired position by moving it forward and
backward simultaneously.
Adjustment of the backrest
„ Pull locking lever (7) up, set the inclination of the backrest and allow the locking lever (7) to
engage.
„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. Make sure that the backrest cannot
be moved.
Weight adjustment
In order to prevent damage to health, the individual driver’s weight setting should be checked
and adjusted prior to starting up the machine. The setting should be carried out whilst sitting
absolutely stationary.
„ Briefly pull the lever (6) upwards.
Headrest
The headrest has been optimally set when the upper edges of the head and headrest are at the
same height.
„ Pull out or push in the headrest (10) over the perceptible notches until the correct height has
been reached.
Lumbar support
„ Turn the hand wheel (9) to the left or right in order to individually adjust the height as well as
the intensity of the arching in the backrest.
Adjusting the vibration damper
The vibration behaviour of the driver's seat can be optimally adjusted to each driving situation
from "soft" to "hard" using the infinitely adjustable vibration damper.
„ Pull (12) lever upwards to set soft seating comfort.
„ Pull (12) lever downwards to set hard seating comfort.
Setting the left armrest
BM000-047
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
123
8
Start-up
8.2
Setting driver’s seat
Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.
„ Remove cover cap (11) to adjust the armrest height.
„ Loosen hexagon nut, move armrest into desired position and tighten hexagon nut.
„ Press cover cap (11) on hexagon nut.
Setting the right armrest
BM000-048
The right armrest (13) and the control lever form a unit.
„ To set the right armrest, raise lever (14).
„ Fold right armrest up or down, forward or backward and release the lever (14).
Æ The setting remains the same.
8.2.1.2
Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for "ACTIVO" version)
BXG000-099
1
2
3
4
Air-cushioned comfort seat
Seat depth adjustment
Seat angle adjustment
Longitudinal adjustment
8
9
10
11
Left armrest
Seat heating and air conditioning on/off
Headrest
Cover cap armrest adjustment
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
124
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
5
6
7
Horizontal suspension on/off
Weight and height setting
Adjustment of the backrest
12
13
14
Start-up
8
Setting driver’s seat
8.2
Vibration damper setting
Lumbar support setting at bottom
Lumbar support setting at top
The air comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.
Height adjustment
The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent
damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.
„ Pull lever (6) completely upward.
ð The driver's seat (1) is moved upwards.
„ Press lever (6) completely down.
ð Move driver's seat (1) downwards.
Æ When the upper or lower end stop of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the
height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.
Horizontal suspension
The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the
horizontal suspension.
„ To activate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the front.
„ To deactivate horizontal suspension, reverse lever (5) to the rear.
Longitudinal adjustment
„ Pull locking lever (4) up, push driver's seat (1) forward or backward into the desired position
and permit the locking lever (4) to lock in place.
„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. The driver's seat must no longer be
movable into another position.
Seat angle adjustment
„ Pull the key (3) up and set the inclination of the seat base by simultaneously increasing or
decreasing the pressure on the seat base.
Seat depth adjustment
„ Pull key (2) up and move seat base to the desired position by moving it forward and
backward simultaneously.
Adjustment of the backrest
„ Pull locking lever (7) up, set the inclination of the backrest and allow the locking lever (7) to
engage.
„ Check whether the locking is fitted into place correctly. Make sure that the backrest cannot
be moved.
Weight adjustment
The weight is automatically adjusted when the seat is loaded by the driver.
Setting the vibration damper
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
125
8
Start-up
8.2
Setting driver’s seat
BM000-050
The oscillating behaviour of the driver’s seat can be adapted ideally to each driving situation via
the adjustable vibration damper.
Damping level II is the default setting recommended by the manufacturer at average driver’s
weight.
The lever (12) for the setting of the oscillating behaviour has three settings:
Pos.
Explanation
I
Soft damping
II
Medium damping
III
Hard damping
„ To set the vibration damper, turn lever (12) to desired stage and release it.
The damping behaviour can be coordinated between the damping levels by two additional
setting positions each.
Lumbar support
BM000-051
The intensity of the arching of seat backrest can be adapted individually so that the spine is
supported and the pressure on the back is relieved.
„ In order to adapt the intensity of the arching in the upper area of the backrest, press „+“ or
„-“ on switch (14) until the desired setting is reached.
„ In order to adapt the intensity of the arching in the lower area of the backrest, press on “+”
or “-” on switch (13) until the desired setting is reached.
Seat heating and seat climate control
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
126
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Start-up
8
Setting driver’s seat
8.2
BM000-052
The seat surface can be vented via seat climate control so that a cool and dry seating is
enabled.
The switch (9) has three positions:
Pos.
Explanation
0
Seat heating and seat climate control OFF
I
Seat climate control ON (seat heating OFF)
II
Seat heating ON (seat climate control OFF)
„ In order to switch on seat climate control, switch the switch (9) to position I.
Æ The left light indicates the operation of seat climate control.
„ To switch on the seat heating, switch the switch (9) to position II.
Æ The right lamp indicates the operation of the seat heating.
Setting the left armrest
BM000-047
Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.
„ Remove cover cap (11) to adjust the armrest height.
„ Loosen hexagon nut, move armrest into desired position and tighten hexagon nut.
„ Press cover cap (11) on hexagon nut.
Setting the right armrest
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
127
8
Start-up
8.2
Setting driver’s seat
BM000-048
The right armrest (13) and the control lever form a unit.
„ To set the right armrest, raise lever (14).
„ Fold right armrest up or down, forward or backward and release the lever (14).
Æ The setting remains the same.
8.2.2
Steering column adjustment
WARNING
Risk of accident due to brief distraction of the driver
When the driver's seat or steering column is adjusted while driving, the driver cannot pay
adequate attention to the travel path. This may result in serious accidents.
„ Adjust the driver's seat and the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
128
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Start-up
8
Setting driver’s seat
8.2
BM000-054
„ To adjust the inclination of the steering column around the lower pivot point (a), actuate the
unlocking pedal (1) and move the steering column (3) into the required position.
„ To lock the steering column (3), release the unlocking pedal (1).
„ To adjust the height of the steering wheel (c) and the inclination of the steering column
around the upper pivot point (b), release the release lever (2) and move the steering column
(3) into the required position.
„ To lock the steering column (3), lock the release lever (2).
8.2.3
Setting the terminal
BXG001-114
The position of the terminal can be adjusted to the driver and to the visible conditions by turning
the support (11) and the terminal.
Adjusting the inclination of the terminal forwards/backwards:
„ Loosen the lever (2) and adjust the inclination of the terminal forwards/backwards (8).
„ Tighten the lever (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
129
8
Start-up
8.2
Setting driver’s seat
Adjusting the inclination of the terminal sideways:
„ Loosen the screw (1) and adjust the inclination of the terminal sideways (7).
„ Tighten the screw (1).
Rotating the terminal to the left/right:
„ Loosen the screw (3) and rotate the terminal to the left/right (6).
„ Tighten the screw (3).
Adjusting the height of the terminal:
„ Loosen the screw (4) and rotate (10) the support (11) until the required height has been
reached.
„ Tighten the screw (4).
Swiveling the terminal to the left/right:
„ Loosen the lever (5) and swivel the support (11) to the left/right (9).
„ Tighten the lever (5).
8.2.4
Sun visor
BM000-044
„ Manually adjust the position of the sun visor (1) as required.
8.2.5
Adjustable air nozzles
BXG000-044
Adjust the air nozzles (1) to prevent the discs from misting over.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
130
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
8.2.6
Start-up
8
General aspects
8.3
Inside rear mirror
BM000-042
„ Manually set the inside rear mirror (1) so that the required outside area is visible in the
mirror.
8.3
General aspects
8.3.1
Instructional seat
WARNING
Danger of accident due to distraction of the driver
The driver may be distracted by a second person in the cabin, possibly causing him not to pay
adequate attention to his driving. This may result in serious accidents with personal injury.
„ The passenger seat may only be used while the driver is being instructed.
„ While the machine is being operated, there must be no other person in the cabin or on the
machine except for the driver, unless the driver is being instructed.
BXG000-042
„ Before using the passenger seat (1), fold down its seating area.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
131
8
Start-up
8.3
General aspects
8.3.2
Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox")
BX001-142
The cooling box (1) is located below the instructional seat (2) in the cabin.
„ To use the cooling box, connect the 12 V plug (4) to the 12 V socket (3) on the left next to
the driver's seat.
8.3.3
Topping up fresh water
BMG000-065
The reservoir for fresh water (2) is in the storage compartment above the right front wheel.
„ Open the storage compartment (1).
„ In order to top up the reservoir (2), open the cover (3).
„ Close the cover (3).
„ Close the storage compartment (1).
8.3.4
Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions
BM000-085
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
132
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Start-up
8
General aspects
8.3
The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the
driver’s seat (1).
„ To remove the first-aid kit or the operating instructions, pull the drawer (2) forwards.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
133
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.1
Connecting the front mounted mower
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
Checks before commissioning – mowing operation
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
9.1
The hunting community is informed about the mowing time.
The area is searched for wildlife and clutches of eggs.
The front mounted mower has been mounted, see Page 134.
The side mounted mowers have been mounted, see Page 140.
The "swathing" components or the cross conveyors are mounted. For "swathing" see
Page 147, for cross conveyor see Page 154.
All mowers have been checked for missing and worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs
and mowing discs or mower drums, and replacements have been made as necessary see
Page 327.
The tine conditioners have been checked for wear and any that were missing have been
replaced, see Page 326.
All guard cloths are complete and undamaged, see Page 346.
The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
Connecting the front mounted mower
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine
During the connecting/decoupling process of the front mounted mower, the machine may start
to move unexpectedly and may therefore result in injury.
„ Only one person may carry out the connecting/decoupling process.
„ Make sure there is nobody in the danger zone during the connecting/decoupling process.
„ Stop the connecting/decoupling process immediately if there is somebody in the danger
zone.
INFO
It is recommended to couple/uncouple the front mowing unit using the support jack and the
top link support. The materials can be purchased from KRONE.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The front mounted mower is safety supported, see Page 33 or with the "Parking support"
version: The parking support is in the support position, see Page 193.
ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "II" position , see Page 100.
ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position, see Page 99.
ü The mowing functions menu "Connect front mounted mower" has been opened in the
terminal.
„ Press "Connect" in the terminal.
„ To start the connecting process, press
„ To depressurise the lower links, press the
in the terminal.
key on the control lever and keep it pressed
until the next screen is displayed on the terminal.
„ Press both lower links down to the bottom position.
„ Press "Next" in the terminal.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
134
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Connecting the front mounted mower
9.1
„ Start the diesel engine.
„ Turn the Main Mode Switch to "Field mode".
„ Press the
or
key to approach field position, see Page 97.
„ Press "Next" in the terminal.
„ Move the machine up to the front mounted mower in such a way that the lower link hooks
are below the holding fixture at the front mounted mower.
2
1
BM000-420
„ Set the main mode switch to "Maintenance mode".
„ Press the
key on the control lever until the lower link hooks (2) of the lower links (1)
engage on the front mowing unit.
If the two lower links do not raise evenly, control the lower links separately:
„ Raise the left lower link separately by simultaneously pressing the
key and the
"M1" key.
„ Raise the right lower link separately by simultaneously pressing the
key and the
"M2" key.
If the two lower link hooks do not engage in the two holding fixtures at the front mounted mower,
rectify the machine position in the following way:
„ Set the main mode switch to "Field mode" position.
„ Move the machine up to the front mounted mower in such a way that the lower link
hooks can run into the holding fixtures.
„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
135
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.1
Connecting the front mounted mower
„ Press the
key on the control lever until the lower link hooks (2) of the lower
links (1) engage on the front mowing unit.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Turn the ignition key to the "II" position.
„ To depressurise the top link and the side guards for version with "Hydraulically folding
side guards", press the
key on the control lever and keep the key pressed until the
next screen is displayed on the terminal.
1
3
2
4
BM000-248
„ Mount the bolt (3).
„ Mount the linch pin (2).
„ For version with "Top link support": Remove the top link support (4).
1
3
2
2
BM000-252
„ Fit the locking screws (3) of the lower link hooks (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
136
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Connecting the front mounted mower
9.1
BM000-253
„ Position the universal shaft (1).
„ Tighten the nut (3) with a socket wrench (2) (tightening torque=80 Nm).
„ Pull the universal shaft guard forwards and let it engage.
„ Proceed in the same manner to mount the universal shaft at the front mounted mower.
BM000-250
„ Connect the lubrication line (3) at the front mounted mower.
„ Attach the plug connection (1) on the machine side.
„ For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards": Connect the hydraulic hoses
(2) to the machine.
„ To complete the connecting process, press "Finish" .
„ With the "Parking support" version: Move the parking support into the transport position,
see Page 192.
„ Set the parameter KMC-60 "Top link position" in the mowing functions menu "Cutting height
settings".
„ Check the lifting unit functions.
„ Calibrate the cutting height, see Page 396.
„ Finely calibrate the cutting height, see Page 398.
„ Calibrate the mower load relief, see Page 393.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
137
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.2
Decoupling the front mounted mower
9.2
Decoupling the front mounted mower
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine
During the connecting/decoupling process of the front mounted mower, the machine may start
to move unexpectedly and may therefore result in injury.
„ Only one person may carry out the connecting/decoupling process.
„ Make sure there is nobody in the danger zone during the connecting/decoupling process.
„ Stop the connecting/decoupling process immediately if there is somebody in the danger
zone.
INFO
It is recommended to couple/uncouple the front mowing unit using the support jack and the
top link support. The materials can be purchased from KRONE.
ü
ü
ü
ü
With the "Parking support" version: The parking support is in the support position.
The diesel engine has been started.
The main mode switch is in "Field mode" position.
The mowing functions "Connect front mounted mower" menu has been opened in the
terminal.
„ Press "Decouple" on the terminal.
„ To start the decoupling process, press
„ Press the
or
.
key to approach field position, see Page 97.
„ Press "Next" in the terminal.
„ To lower the front mowing unit, press the
key the control lever and keep the key
pressed until the next screen is displayed on the terminal.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Turn the ignition key to position II.
„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.
„ To depressurise the top link and the side guards for version with "Hydraulically folding
side guards", press the
key on the control lever and keep the key pressed until the
next screen is displayed on the terminal.
„ If the front mounted mower is uncoupled without "Parking support" version, securely support
the front mounted mower, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
138
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
2
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Decoupling the front mounted mower
9.2
3
5
6
4
1
4
1
BM000-418
„ For version with "Top link support": To mount the top link support (1), insert the
2 bolts (2) and secure with the linch pins (3).
„ Dismount the top link (4) from the front mowing unit, dismount the linch pin (6) and the
bolt (5).
„ For version with "Top link support": Place the top link (4) on the top link support (1).
„ If decoupling is done without a top link support, fix the top link (4) using a lashing strap.
BM000-250
„ Detach the plug connection (1).
„ Detach the lubrication line (3) from the front mounted mower.
„ For "Hydraulically foldable side guards" version: Decouple both hydraulic hoses (2).
BM000-251
„ Using a suitable tool, loosen and push down the universal shaft guard (1).
„ To dismount the universal shaft (2) from the machine, use a fork spanner (3) to unscrew the
nut (4).
„ Proceed in the same manner to dismount the universal shaft (2) from the front mounted
mower.
„ Put the universal shaft (2) aside.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
139
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.3
Mounting the side mounted mowers
1
3
2
2
BM000-252
„ Unscrew the locking screws (3) of the two lower link hooks (2).
„ Pull on the lower link hooks (2) to loosen them.
„ Press "Next" in the terminal.
„ To depressurise the lower links (1), press the
key on the control lever and keep it
pressed until the next screen is displayed on the terminal.
„ Press down both lower links.
„ To complete the decoupling process, press "Finish".
9.3
Mounting the side mounted mowers
The assembly of the side mounted mowers is described using the right side mounted mower as
an example.
„ Proceed in the same way to assemble the left side mounted mower.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Carefully raise the mower onto the machine until the mower can be mounted on the
outrigger arm. To raise the mower, see Page 348.
„ Securely support the mower, see Page 33.
For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 278.
1
2
1
3
4
BM000-278
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
140
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Pos.
Quantity
Designation
(A)
1
Retaining ring 40 x 1.75
(B)
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Mounting the side mounted mowers
9.3
Material
surface
Shim ring 40 x 50 x 2
Strength
class
Zn8
„ To mount the mower on the outrigger arm, insert the bolt (1) and compensate with shim
rings (B) in the positions (4).
„ Mount 1 retaining ring (A) in position (3) on the end of the bolt (1) and, if required,
compensate with shim rings (B) in position (2).
2
1
2
3
BM000-283
Pos.
Quantity
Designation
Material
surface
Strength
class
(A)
1
Hexagon head screw M8 x 25
Zn8
8.8
(B)
1
Detent edged washer SKM 8
ZLÜ
(C)
1
Roll pin 6 x 35
ZLÜ
„ Push in the bolt (2).
„ Mount the screw connection (A, B) in position (3).
„ Mount the roll pin (C) in position (1).
1
2
BM000-467
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Lift/lower left side mounted
mower
Horizontal position: closed
Lift/lower right side mounted
mower
Horizontal position: closed
2
Vertical position: opened
Vertical position: opened
„ To hydraulically depressurize the lifting cylinder for the mowing unit, open the stop cock (2)
"Lift/lower right side mounted mower". (For assembly of the left side mounted mower, open
the stop cock (1) "Lift/lower left side mounted mower".)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
141
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.3
Mounting the side mounted mowers
3
1
4
2
BM000-284
Pos.
Quantity
Designation
Material
surface
(A)
2
Roll pin 6 x 35
ZLÜ
Strength
class
„ Push in the bolt (2).
„ Mount the roll pin (A) in position (1).
„ Push in the bolt (4).
„ Mount the roll pin (A) in position (3).
3
1
3
2
4
4
5
2
5
6
BM000-285
„ Connect the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) to the central support; observe the correct
assignment and sequence.
„ Mount the pipe clamps (1, 6); route the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) so that abrasion points
and pinch points are avoided.
1
2
BMG000-054
„ Mount the lubrication line (1).
„ Mount the plug (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
142
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Dismounting the side mounted mowers
9.4
1
2
BM000-467
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Lift/lower left side mounted
mower
Horizontal position: closed
Lift/lower right side mounted
mower
Horizontal position: closed
2
Vertical position: opened
Vertical position: opened
„ Close the stop cock (2) "Lift/lower right side mounted mower". (For assembly of the left side
mounted mower, close the stop cock (1) "Lift/lower left side mounted mower".)
1
3
5
2
4
BM000-410
„ Push the universal shaft (1) onto the PTO shaft end on the mower.
„ Tighten the screw (2) with a tightening torque of MA=85 Nm.
„ Push the universal shaft guard (4) over the housing (3).
„ Mount the clamp (5).
„ Calibrate the cutting height, see Page 396.
„ Finely calibrate the cutting height, see Page 398.
„ Calibrate the mower load relief, see Page 393.
9.4
Dismounting the side mounted mowers
The disassembly of the side mounted mowers is described using the right side mounted mower
as an example.
„ Proceed in the same way to disassemble the left side mounted mower.
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The side mounted mower is securely supported, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
143
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.4
Dismounting the side mounted mowers
1
2
BM000-467
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Lift/lower left side mounted
mower
Horizontal position: closed
Lift/lower right side mounted
mower
Horizontal position: closed
2
Vertical position: opened
Vertical position: opened
„ To hydraulically depressurize the lifting cylinder for the mowing unit, open the stop cock (2)
"Lift/lower right side mounted mower". (For assembly of the left side mounted mower, open
the stop cock (1) "Lift/lower left side mounted mower".)
3
1
3
2
4
4
5
2
5
6
BM000-285
„ Dismount the pipe clamps (1, 6).
„ Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (2, 3, 4, 5) at the central support.
1
2
BMG000-054
„ Remove the lubrication line (1) and seal both sides to prevent dirt ingress.
„ Remove the plug (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
144
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Dismounting the side mounted mowers
9.4
3
1
4
2
BM000-284
„ Dismount the roll pin (3).
„ Unscrew the bolt (4).
„ Dismount the roll pin (1).
„ Unscrew the bolt (2).
1
2
BM000-467
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Lift/lower left side mounted
mower
Horizontal position: closed
Lift/lower right side mounted
mower
Horizontal position: closed
2
Vertical position: opened
Vertical position: opened
„ Close the stop cock (2) "Lift/lower right side mounted mower". (For assembly of the left side
mounted mower, close the stop cock (1) "Lift/lower left side mounted mower".)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
145
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.4
Dismounting the side mounted mowers
2
1
2
3
BM000-283
„ Remove the screw connection (3).
„ Dismount the roll pin (1).
„ Unscrew the bolt (2).
1
2
1
3
4
BM000-278
„ Dismount the washer (2) and the retaining ring (3) at the end of the bolt.
„ Dismount the bolt (1) with the washers (4).
1
4
2
3
BM000-411
„ Dismount the clamp (2).
„ Push down the universal shaft guard (1).
„ Loosen the screw (4).
„ Remove the universal shaft (3) from the PTO shaft end on the mower.
„ Raise the mower using a suitable hoist and put it aside, see Page 348.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
146
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
9.5
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Mounting components "swathing"
9.5
Mounting components "swathing"
With version "Standard swathing"
1
BM000-394
Assembly of the "swathing" components (1) is described using the right-hand side mounted
mower as an example.
„ Proceed in the same way to assemble the "swathing" components on the left side mounted
mower.
For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 278.
4
1
7
6
5
3
2
BM000-386
ü
ü
ü
ü
The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The side mounted mowers have been securely supported, see Page 33.
The cross conveyors have been removed, see Page 157.
NOTE! Damage to the sensor due to carelessness when working on the pulley! When
mounting and dismounting the pulley, ensure that the sensor behind the pulley is not
damaged.
„ To dismount the support (2), remove the screw connections (3).
„ Dismount the belt pulley (1), see Page 262.
„ Dismount the roll pin (4).
„ Pull out the bolt (6).
„ Remove the entire segment (5).
„ Remove the journal (7) from both sides of the mower.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
147
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.5
Mounting components "swathing"
1
2
1
2
8
7
5
X
6
4
3
BM000-387
Pos.
Quantity
Designation
Material
surface
Strength
class
(A)
6
Hexagon head screw M10 x 25
Zn8
8.8
(B)
6
Detent edged washer SKM 10
ZLÜ
(C)
1
Disc 14 x 58
Zn8 A
(D)
2
Support disc S 35 x 45 x 2.5
Zn8
(E)
2
Ring 35 x 80 x 20
S355MC
S355MC
„ In the following sequence push the mounting material (D, E), the timing disc (1) and the
mounting material (E, D) onto the shaft.
„ Mount the screw connection (2) (C, B, A).
„ Mount the support (3) using the screw connections (4) (B, A).
„ Align the sensor (5) so that the distance between sensor (5) and timing disc (1) X=3 mm.
Ensure that the sensor (5) is aligned at right angles to the timing disc (1) and is centred over
the holes in the timing disc.
„ To set the distance between sensor (5) and timing disc (1), loosen both nuts (6).
„ Turn the nuts (6) until the dimension X=3 mm has been reached.
„ Tighten the nuts (6) to a tightening torque of MA=10 Nm.
„ Mount the guard (8) using the screw connections (7) (B, A).
2
1
1
3
BM000-388
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
148
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Mounting components "swathing"
9.5
Item
Quantity
Designation
Material
surface
Strength
class
(A)
2
Hexagon head screw M16 x 50
Zn8
8.8
(B)
2
Hexagon head screw M16 x 130
Zn8
8.8
(C)
4
Locknut low shape M16
Zn8
10
(D)
8
Detent edged washer SKM 16
ZLÜ
(E)
8
Disc 17 x 40 x 6
Zn8
„ Using a suitable hoist, lift the pre-assembled "swathing" components (2) to the mower.
„ Using the screw connections (1) (B, D, E, E, D, C) and the screw
connections (3) (A, D, E, E, D, C), mount the "swathing" components (2) on both sides.
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
BM000-397
Pos.
Quantity
Designation
Material
surface
Strength
class
(A)
2
Square coach screw M12 x 80
Zn8
8.8
(B)
4
Square coach screw M8 x 30
Zn8
8.8
(C)
4
Locknut low shape M8
Zn8
8
(D)
2
Ring nut M12
Zn8
C15
(E)
4
Detent edged washer SKM 8
ZLÜ
(F)
2
Disc 13 x 37 x 3
Zn8
(G)
4
Disc 8.4 x 24 x 2
Zn8
(H)
2
Disc 17 x 37 x 3
PA 6
„ Mount the swath flaps (3) on both sides using the screw connection (1) (D, F, H, A).
„ Mount the screw connections (2) (B, G, E, C).
„ "Deflector sheets" version: Tighten the palm knobs (4) on the deflector sheets as tightly
as possible, as they can easily get lost due to vibrations.
„ In the mowing functions menu "Mower drive settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath
merging system with hydraulic hood installed" to "No".
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
149
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.6
Dismounting the "swathing" components
9.6
Dismounting the "swathing" components
WARNING
Risk of injury from ejected objects
If the machine is used without cross conveyor or the "swathing" components, crops and
foreign objects will be ejected and may injure or kill people.
„ Use the machine only with cross conveyor or the "swathing" components.
For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 278.
1
BM000-394
Disassembly of the "swathing" components (1) is described using the right-hand side mounted
mower as an example.
„ Proceed in the same way to disassemble the "swathing" components on the left side
mounted mower.
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
BM000-389
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The side mounted mowers have been securely supported, see Page 33
„ Remove the screw connections (2).
„ Remove the screw connections (1) and put aside with the swath flaps (3).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
150
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Dismounting the "swathing" components
9.6
2
1
1
3
BM000-388
„ Using a suitable hoist, pick up the "swathing" components (2) and secure the swathing (2) to
prevent it from dropping.
„ Remove the screw connections (1, 3).
„ Using the hoist, put the "swathing" components (2) to the side.
3
2
1
6
4
5
BM000-392
„ Remove the screw connections (1) and put aside with the guard (2).
„ Remove the screw connections (5) and put aside with the support (4).
„ Remove the screw connection (3).
„ Remove the timing disc (6) and the mounting material from the shaft and put aside.
2
4
7
1
3
6
5
BM000-393
Pos.
Quantity
Designation
Material
surface
Strength
class
(A)
2
Hexagon head screw M10 x 25
Zn8
8.8
(B)
2
Hexagon head screw M16 x 65
ZN8
8.8
(C)
2
Locknut low shape M18 x 1.5
Zn8
8
(D)
2
Detent edged washer SKM 10
Dacromet
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
151
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.7
Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV" components
Pos.
Quantity
Designation
Material
surface
(E)
2
Detent edged washer SKM 16
ZLÜ
(F)
2
Disc 17 x 40 x 6
(G)
2
Disc (20) 21 x 37 x 3
Zn8
Strength
class
140 HV
„ Mount the belt tensioner (3) with the bolt (1) and the roll pin (2).
„ Mount the journal (7) on both sides of the mower using the mounting
material (B, E, F, G, C).
„ Mounting the belt pulley (4), see Page 263.
„ Mount the support (5) using the screw connections (6) (A, D).
„ Mounting the cross conveyor, see Page 154.
1
1
2
3
4
3
X
BM000-395
„ Align the sensor (3) behind the belt pulley on the conditioner so that the distance between
sensor (3) and inside (2) of the belt pulley (1) X=3 mm. Ensure that the sensor (3) is aligned
at right angles to the belt pulley (1) and is centred over the holes in the belt pulley.
„ To set the distance between sensor (3) and the inside (2) of the belt pulley (1), loosen
both nuts (4).
„ Turn the nuts (4) until the dimension X=3 mm has been reached.
„ Tighten the nuts (4) to a tightening torque of MA=10 Nm.
9.7
Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV" components
With the "Swath width CV" version
Certain operating conditions may require the crops to be laid in a narrower swath. To do this,
extensions are mounted on the auger conveyor and the auger tray.
Mounting"swath width CV" components
NOTICE
Risk of machine damage due to less ground clearance
When the "Swath width CV" components are mounted, the ground clearance underneath the
side mounted mowers is reduced in transport position. Carelessness can cause damage to
the machine.
„ When driving on roads or crossing fields, take the reduced ground clearance into account
and adjust the driving speed accordingly.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
152
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV" components
9.7
1
2
BM000-501
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ To dismount the shaft guard (1), dismount the screw connections (2).
1
4
2
3
BM000-500
„ Mount the ancillary conveyor (3) with the linch pin (4).
„ Mount the auger tray extension (1) with the 6 screw connections (2) (hexagon head screw
M10 x 30 ZLÜ, detent edged washer SKM 10 ZLÜ and disc 10.5 x 25 x 4 Zn8) montieren.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
153
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.8
Mounting the cross conveyor
Dismounting "swath width CV" components
1
4
2
3
BM000-500
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ To dismount the auger tray extension (1), remove the 6 screw connections (2).
„ To dismount the ancillary conveyor (3), remove the linch pin (4).
1
2
BM000-501
„ Mount the shaft guard (1) with 2 hexagon head screws (M10 x 20 Zn8) and 2 detent edged
washers(SKM 10 ZLÜ).
9.8
Mounting the cross conveyor
With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33
For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 278.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
154
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Mounting the cross conveyor
9.8
WARNING
Risk of injury due to raised cross conveyor
There is a risk to individuals from the cross conveyor falling or swivelling in an uncontrolled
manner.
„ Use only approved hoists and slings which have a load-bearing capacity of at least
1000 kg.
„ Note the information on the suspension points provided.
„ Make sure the slings are properly secured.
„ Never stand under the raised cross conveyor.
1
3
1
4
2
BM000-282
„ To be able to hook the cross conveyor into a suitable hoist, mount 1 ring nut (M16 Zn8) with
2 discs (17 x 40 x 6 Zn8) and 1 hexagon head screw (M16 x 90 Zn8) on each of the lifting
points (1).
„ To raise the cross conveyor, use the lifting points (1, 2).
„ Carefully raise the cross conveyor onto the machine and before lowering it, ensure that the
position of the journal support (3) and the journal (4) is the same on both sides.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
155
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.8
Mounting the cross conveyor
2
2
3
1
1
2
BM000-281
„ Fit the screws (1, 2).
„ Mount the hydraulic hoses according to the respective version; observe the correct
sequence.
2
1
4
3
BMG000-042
„ Connect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3).
„ Attach the plug connection (4).
1
2
3
BMG000-041
„ Attach the lubrication line (2) to the coupling point (3).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
156
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Dismounting the cross conveyor
9.9
BM000-196
„ Mount the hydraulic hoses (1); observe the correct sequence. The ball (2) must be in
alignment with the groove (3).
BM000-195
„ Mount the pipe clamp (1); route the hydraulic hoses in such a way as to prevent abrasion
points and pinch points.
„ Mount the guard cloth between the cross conveyor and the machine frame, see Page 113.
„ Ensure that the belt pulleys are in alignment. If required, compensate with support discs.
„ Place the kraftband on the auger drive and tension, see Page 321.
„ Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 317.
„ In the mowing functions menu "Mower drive settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath
merging system with hydraulic hood installed" to "Yes".
9.9
Dismounting the cross conveyor
With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
WARNING
Risk of injury from ejected objects
If the machine is used without cross conveyor or the "swathing" components, crops and
foreign objects will be ejected and may injure or kill people.
„ Use the machine only with cross conveyor or the "swathing" components.
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
157
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.9
Dismounting the cross conveyor
For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 278.
„ Remove the guard of the auger drive, see Page 317.
„ Relieve the pressure on the auger drive kraftband and remove the kraftband, see Page 321.
„ Dismount the deflector curtain between the cross conveyor and the machine frame from the
machine frame and fold it back, see Page 113.
BM000-195
„ To dismount the pipe clamp (1), loosen both nuts using two socket wrenches.
BM000-196
„ Clean the area around the hydraulic hoses at the central support.
„ Dismount both hydraulic hoses (1) of the swath hood, remember the sequence of the
connections and make sure the ball (2) is in alignment with the groove (3).
1
2
3
BMG000-041
„ Disconnect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3). Seal the end of the lubrication
line at the cross conveyor to prevent dirt from getting into the system.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
158
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Dismounting the cross conveyor
9.9
If the machine is used with swath hoods:
„ Remove the sealing plug on the connecting piece (1) and retain for subsequent assembly.
„ Mount end of the lubrication line (2) at the mower to the connecting piece (1).
2
1
4
3
BMG000-042
„ Disconnect the plug connection (4).
„ Disconnect the lubrication line (2) at the coupling point (3). Seal the end of the lubrication
line at the cross conveyor to prevent dirt from getting into the system.
If the machine is used with swath hoods:
„ Remove the sealing plug on the connecting piece (1) and retain for subsequent assembly.
„ Mount end of the lubrication line (2) at the mower to the connecting piece (1).
WARNING
Risk of injury due to raised cross conveyor
There is a risk to individuals from the cross conveyor falling or swivelling in an uncontrolled
manner.
„ Use only approved hoists and slings which have a load-bearing capacity of at least
1000 kg.
„ Note the information on the suspension points provided.
„ Make sure the slings are properly secured.
„ Never stand under the raised cross conveyor.
1
1
2
BM000-279
„ To be able to hook the cross conveyor into a suitable hoist, mount 1 ring nut (M16 Zn8) with
2 discs (17 x 40 x 6 Zn8) and 1 hexagon head screw (M16 x 90 Zn8) on each of the lifting
points (1).
„ Hook the hoist into the lifting points (1, 2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
159
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.10
Mounting the rear weight
2
2
3
1
1
2
BM000-281
„ To unscrew the screws (2), at first the hydraulic screw connections (3) of the hydraulic
cylinder must be unscrewed according to the respective version. Pay attention to the
sequence of the connections to ensure the hydraulic hoses are not mixed up. Seal the open
hydraulic connections to prevent dirt ingress.
„ Dismount the screws (1).
„ Carefully raise the entire cross conveyor and put it aside.
„ If the machine is used with swath hoods, in the mowing functions menu "Mower drive
settings", set the parameter KMC-183 "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood installed"
to "No".
9.10
Mounting the rear weight
For "rear weight" version
ü The rear axle is raised completely, see Page 97.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
1
1
2
BM000-493
The rear weight weighs approx. 285 kg.
„ Raise the pre-assembled rear weight (1) on the pallet and rest its front end safely on a
suitable support (2) (a squared timber, for example).
„ Using a suitable device, such as a forklift, move the pallet with the rear weight from the rear
below the machine so that the rear weight (1) can be mounted.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
160
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Removing the rear weight
9.11
1
1
3
2
BM000-494
Item
Quantity
Designation
(A)
2x
Square coach screw M12 x 35 Zn8
(B)
2x
Disc (12) 13 x 37 x 3 Zn8 140 HV
(C)
6x
Detent edged washer SKM 12 ZLÜ
(D)
6x
Locknut low shape M12 Zn8
(E)
2x
Square coach screw M12 x 55 Zn8
(H)
2x
Square coach screw M12 x 30 Zn8
Take the following steps on both sides of the machine:
WARNING! Risk of injury due to suspended load. Never work under a suspended load.
Mount the rear weight only from the side.
„ Tighten the screw connection (2) (A, B, C, D) with your fingers.
„ Mount the screw connection (1) (E, C, D) and tighten it with your fingers. Ensure that the
screw connection (1) sits completely in the recess provided on the machine.
„ Remove the pallet from underneath the machine.
„ Tighten the screw connection (3) (H, C, D) with your fingers.
„ Tighten the screw connection (2) with the tightening torque specified in see Page 278.
„ Tighten the screw connection (1) with the tightening torque specified in see Page 278.
„ Tighten the screw connection (3) with the tightening torque specified in see Page 278.
9.11
Removing the rear weight
For "rear weight" version
ü The rear axle is raised completely, see Page 97.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
161
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.12
Adjusting GPS guidance
3
4
2
1
BM000-495
The rear weight weighs approx. 285 kg.
Take the following steps on the right-hand and left-hand side of the machine.
WARNING! Risk of injury due to suspended load. Never work under a suspended load.
Dismount the rear weight only from the side.
„ Remove the screw connection (1).
„ Position a suitable device, such as a forklift with a pallet, directly underneath the rear
weight (2) so that the rear weight (2) cannot drop down during removal.
„ Remove the screw connection (3).
„ Remove the screw connection (4).
„ Using a suitable device, such as a forklift, remove the rear weight (2) from underneath the
machine.
9.12
Adjusting GPS guidance
For "GPS guidance" version
Settings on the CCI terminal
Make the following settings in the CCI terminal when the CCI terminal is used as a Task
Controller server.
Verifying the licence data
„ To open the "CCI.Config" menu, press
„ To display the licence data, press
.
.
„ Ensure that "Parallel tracking" is activated at
.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
162
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Commissioning – mowing operation
9
Adjusting GPS guidance
9.12
Activating apps
„ To open the "Apps" menu, press
.
„ Open "App administration".
„ Activate
.
„ Activate
.
Deactivating TECU
„ Deactivate TECU in the
app.
Machine profile
The machine profile is automatically recognised and loaded. The active machine profile is
displayed on the CCI terminal.
Status displays of the GPS guidance steering system on the CCI terminal
Icon
Explanation
The "GPS guidance" steering system is not ready. The requirements for
activation are not completely satisfied.
The "GPS guidance" steering system is ready. All requirements for activation are satisfied.
The "GPS guidance" steering system is active and the machine is in
threading mode.
The "GPS guidance" steering system is active and the machine moves
on the lane.
Displaying the GPS quality on the CCI terminal
Icon
Explanation
RTK reception active (corrected GPS reception)
EGNOS / WAAS reception active (corrected GPS reception)
GPS reception active (uncorrected GPS reception - quality not sufficient
for using the "GPS guidance" steering system)
No GPS reception
9.12.1
Adjusting overlapping and beds
Adjusting working width overlapping
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
163
9
Commissioning – mowing operation
9.12
Adjusting GPS guidance
Depending on ground conditions, inclination and driving speed, overlapping of 35 ... 60 cm is
recommended. This value describes the overlapping of the entire machine. Half of the selected
value overlaps on each side of the machine.
The working width of the machine is loaded automatically with the profile.
„ Select the overlapping in the
app at Settings, "Parallel tracking". See the
instructions for the CCI terminal in the chapter "Map view, commissioning, adjusting parallel
tracking".
Adjusting beds
„ If necessary, select beds in the
app at Settings, "Parallel tracking". See the
instructions for the CCI terminal in the chapter "Map view, commissioning, adjusting parallel
tracking".
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
164
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
10
Driving and Transport
10
Preparing the machine for road travel
10.1
Driving and Transport
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
10.1
Preparing the machine for road travel
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü Soiling and crop residue have been removed from the machine, in particular from the
lighting and identification elements.
ü All mowers are in transport position, see Page 95
ü The side guards of the mowers are in transport position, see Page 189, see Page 166.
ü For the "Side shift of front mounted mower" version: The front mounted mower is in
central position, see Page 185.
ü The lockings of side mounted mowers are engaged, see Page 166.
ü The wheel chocks are located in the storage compartment above the front right wheel, see
Page 177.
ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "Road mode" position, see Page 99.
ü The permitted weights of the machine are observed, see Page 76.
10.1.1
Transport position
The machine must be in transport position when travelling on roads; to this end:
„ Fold up side mounted mowers, see Page 95.
„ Check the lock for side mounted mowers, see Page 166.
„ Lift the front mounted mower into the transport position, see Page 95.
„ For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version: Move the front mounted mower into
the central position, see Page 185.
„ Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mower into transport position, see Page 189.
„ Make sure that the side guards of the side mounted mowers are in the transport position,
see Page 166. For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards": Move the side
guards of the side mounted mowers manually into transport position, see Page 189.
„ The main mode switch is in the "Road mode" position, see Page 99. The axles lower
automatically to the road position.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
165
10
Driving and Transport
10.1
Preparing the machine for road travel
10.1.2
Checking lockings of lateral mowers
WARNING
Danger of accident due to the side mounted mowers coming folded out during road
travel
If the mowing units are not correctly locked in the transport position, they may unintentionally
come folded out. This can result in serious accidents.
„ Perform a visual inspection to determine whether the side mounted mowers are locked
correctly.
„ Do not place the machines in operation or stop them immediately if error messages
appear regarding the transport position or locking of the side mounted mowers.
BM000-008
„ Perform a visual inspection on the left-hand and right-hand side of the machine to determine
whether the catch (1) has completely enclosed the journal (2) of the side mounted mower.
If not:
„ Check the area for soiling and clean if required.
„ Check the catch for damage.
„ Fold in the side mounted mower again.
10.1.3
Checking side guards of lateral mowers
NOTICE
Machine damage due to increased machine height.
If the side guards of the side mounted mowers in transport position are not folded in, the
machine height is raised considerably and this may cause damage to the machine.
„ Before travelling on the road, always ensure that the side guards of the side mounted
mowers are folded in.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
166
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Driving and Transport
10
Starting engine
10.2
BM000-005
„ Before travelling on the road, always check that the side guards (1) on the right/left of the
side mounted mowers are folded into the transport position, see Page 189.
ð The side guard are not in transport position:
For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards":
„ To fold up the side guards, actuate the "Fold up side guards" key, Operating and
display elements on the keypad, see Page 97.
For the "series" version:
„ Fold down side mounted mowers.
„ Check locking of the side guards, see Page 259 .
„ Move the side guards of the side mounted mowers manually into transport position.
„ Fold up side mounted mowers.
10.2
Starting engine
WARNING
Risk of poisoning from toxic exhaust gases
If the machine is operated in closed rooms without adequate ventilation, the pollutant load
increases in the air.
Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.
„ Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms.
„ Vent the room sufficiently.
WARNING
Impact and crushing hazard for people in the vicinity of the machine due to movement
of the machine!
When the machine is put into motion, there is a risk for people in the vicinity of the machine of
being overrun or crushed by the machine.
„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.
„ Actuate the horn before starting the engine.
„ Only start the engine from the driver's seat.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
167
10
Driving and Transport
10.2
Starting engine
WARNING
Risk of injury during operation
If the driver is not protected from the engine noise while working, his hearing will be
permanently damaged.
„ Make sure that the doors and windows of the cabin are closed while the machine is used.
„ If the engine was shut down beforehand for longer than 30 days, take measures to start up
and start the engine following shutdown, see Page 300.
1
2
3
BXG000-059
ü The Main Mode Switch (2) is in the "Neutral" position (3), see Page 99.
„ Press the main battery switch (1) to close the circuit, see Page 178.
Æ The main battery switch LED is lit.
BMG000-005
„ Turn the ignition key (1) in the ignition lock clockwise to position "II".
Æ Warning lamp "Charging control" (2) lights up.
„ Wait for at least 2 seconds, then turn the ignition key in the ignition lock to position "III".
When the engine starts:
„ Immediately release the ignition key.
Æ The ignition key automatically jumps to the operating position.
Æ Warning lamp "Charging control" (2) goes out.
„ Leave the engine to idle until the temperature display coolant rises.
If the warning lamp "Charging control" (2) lights up:
„ Switch off the engine and eliminate the malfunction.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
168
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Driving and Transport
10
Behaviour after the engine has stalled
10.3
If the engine does not start within 30 s:
„ Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.
„ After a 1 minute delay repeat the starting process.
If the engine still does not start:
„ Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.
„ Rectify the cause of the poor starting behaviour, see applicable engine manufacturer
operating instructions.
10.2.1
Observing indicator and warning lamps
1
BMG000-006
„ As long as the diesel engine is running, the indicator and warning lamps on the steering
column must be observed.
Warning lamp "Charging control" (1):
"Charging control" warning lamp does not light up at all when the ignition key is in ignition stage
I, lights up continuously in ignition stage II and lights up briefly after the diesel engine has
started.
If the warning lamp "Charging control" is lit continuously while the diesel engine is running, the
output voltage of the alternator is not adequate to charge the batteries.
„ Check the cables and connections on the alternator and the batteries, batteries see
Page 368.
„ Check the V-belt on the alternator.
10.3
Behaviour after the engine has stalled
NOTICE
Heat accumulation after the engine has stalled
If a warm engine stalls, the heat accumulation, caused by the lack of cooling, may damage
the engine.
„ Immediately start again when a warm engine is stalled.
„ Before finally switching engine off, allow it to run at idle speed for at least 3 minutes.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
169
10
Driving and Transport
10.4
Starting up the machine
10.4
Starting up the machine
WARNING
Danger to life by movements of the machine
People are at risk from the large movements of the machine, unusual driving behaviour and
the option of riding on the outside of the machine while it is being driven.
„ Make sure that there is no second person on the machine when travelling.
„ Adapt driving speed of machine on road and field to the given conditions.
„ When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to
environmental conditions.
„ Make sure when driving around curves that the machine does not swing out.
10.4.1
Setting the acceleration behaviour
BM000-017
Four different acceleration stages can be selected, even while driving, with the "Acceleration
stage" switch (2) attached to the control lever (1).
If the control lever (1) is actuated constantly in one direction and at a constant engine speed,
the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration stage
IV.
„ Switch to the required acceleration stage using the "Acceleration stage" switch (2).
Æ The selected acceleration stage (3) is displayed on the working screen of the terminal.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
170
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
10.4.2
Driving and Transport
10
Starting up the machine
10.4
Notices on driving the machine
BM000-019
„ Adapt driving behaviour to the modified handling of the machine due to rear steering.
„ Take into consideration the different ways the machine handles in acceleration stages 1 - 4.
„ React to the different handling of the machine in road mode and field mode
„ If an error message is indicated on the terminal, immediately stop and eliminate the error. If
this is not possible, inform a KRONE service partner.
„ Adapt driving behaviour to the particular terrain and ground conditions, see Page 184.
Emergency steering forces
The steering also operates when the engine has stopped. However, considerably more force
must be applied.
10.4.3
Driving forwards and stopping
BM000-018
Driving forwards from standstill:
„ Set the main mode switch to "road mode" or "field mode" position, see Page 99.
„ Release the parking brake, see Page 175.
„ Press and hold down the activation key for traction drive (2).
„ Push the control lever (1) forwards.
Æ The machine moves forwards and accelerates.
„ Release the control lever (1) to keep the speed at a constant level.
Æ The control lever automatically returns to the central position (0).
„ To slow down the machine, pull the control lever (1) backwards while driving or depress the
brake pedal.
Æ The machine is decelerated until it stops.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
171
10
Driving and Transport
10.4
Starting up the machine
10.4.3.1
Cruise control
The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards.
When cruise control is activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set
acceleration stage to the speed saved for operation with the cruise control.
Saving speed for operation with cruise control
BM000-022
„ Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.
„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2) and at the
same time, move the control lever (1) to the right and back to the central position.
Æ The current driving speed is saved.
The saved speed (3) is displayed on the working screen of the terminal display.
The speed is saved for the operating mode the machine is currently in. One speed each can be
saved for road travel and field mode.
If the operating mode (“Road mode”/”Field mode”) is changed, the display switches to the value
saved for the corresponding operating mode (road or field speed).
Activating cruise control
BMG000-004
„ While driving, actuate the control lever (1) to the right.
Æ The machine is started with the set speed.
The icon
with the value of the set speed appears on the display.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
172
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Driving and Transport
10
Stopping the machine
10.5
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise control is deactivated by overriding the control lever, actuating the service brake or
switching off the traction drive.
10.4.4
Driving backward and stopping
BM000-018
Reverse from standstill:
„ Set the main mode switch to “road mode” or “field mode” position, see Page 99.
„ Release the parking brake, see Page 175.
„ Press and hold down the activation key for traction drive (2).
„ Pull control lever (1) to the rear.
Æ The machine moves backward and accelerates.
„ Release the control lever (1) to keep the speed at constant level.
Æ The control lever automatically returns to central position (0).
„ To decelerate the machine, push control lever (1) to the front while driving.
Æ The machine is decelerated until it is at standstill.
10.5
Stopping the machine
The machine can be stopped with both control lever and service brake.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
173
10
Driving and Transport
10.5
Stopping the machine
10.5.1
Stopping machine by using control lever
Stopping from forward travel
BM000-025
„ Pull the control lever (1) backwards while driving.
Æ The machine decelerates until it stops.
Stopping from reverse travel
BM000-026
„ Push the control lever (1) forwards while driving.
Æ The machine decelerates until it stops.
Quickly braking the machine
BM000-027
„ To brake the machine quickly, move the control lever (1) to the left while driving.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
174
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Driving and Transport
10
Applying parking brake
10.6
Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)
When fast reversing during forward travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and
accelerates backwards to 70% of the previous driving speed.
When fast reversing during reverse travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and
accelerates forwards to 100% of the previous driving speed.
Fast reversing is possible in field mode only.
BMG000-007
ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.
To activate fast reversing:
„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2), move the
control lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.
10.5.2
Stopping machine with the service brake
WARNING
Risk of injury due to defective service brake
If the service brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in
time and people and material assets are at risk.
„ Before starting the machine, always check service brake and ensure its functionality.
Braking the machine slightly
„ Depress the foot brake slightly.
Æ When the brake pedal is released, the machine continues moving at the reduced driving
speed.
Braking the machine forcefully (hazard braking)
„ Depress the service brake very forcefully.
Æ The machine is braked to an immediate standstill.
10.6
Applying parking brake
WARNING
Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away
If the unsecured machine starts moving, there is a risk of people being struck or run over.
„ When the “Parking brake” key has been pressed, check the status of the parking brake on
the terminal or via the LED in the “Parking brake” key.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
175
10
Driving and Transport
10.6
Applying parking brake
INFO
If the "Parking brake" key is pressed while driving, the traction drive is braked and, when the
machine has stopped, the parking brake is applied.
The parking brake is automatically released or applied under certain operating conditions and
can be manually actuated by pressing the "Parking brake" key (1).
BXG000-013
To apply the parking brake manually via the keypad:
„ Press the "Parking brake" key (1).
To release the parking brake manually via the keypad:
„ When the diesel engine is running, depress the brake pedal.
„ Press the "Parking brake" key (1).
The status of the parking brake is indicated by the LED in the "Parking brake" key:
„ The parking brake has been applied when the LED is lit.
„ The parking brake has been released when the LED is not lit.
EQG002-020
The status of the parking brake is also displayed on the working screen of the terminal:
•
The parking brake has been applied when the "Parking brake"
indicator lamp appears
on the terminal.
•
The parking brake has been released when the "Parking brake" indicator lamp is not lit on
the terminal.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
176
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Driving and Transport
10
Switching off the engine
10.7
Automatic actuation of the parking brake:
•
•
•
•
10.7
The parking brake is automatically applied when the driver's seat is not occupied.
The parking brake is automatically applied when the diesel engine is switched off.
The parking brake is automatically released when the machine starts.
The parking brake is automatically released when the brake pedal is depressed
Switching off the engine
NOTICE
Engine will be damaged by heat accumulation
If the engine is immediately switched off after operation under load, the heat accumulation,
caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the engine.
„ Before switching off the engine, let it run at idle speed for at least 3 minutes.
„ Stop the machine, see Page 173.
„ To cool down the engine, leave the engine running for three minutes at a low idle speed.
BM000-029
„ Turn the ignition key (1) anti-clockwise to the "STOP" position.
„ Move the main mode switch into the "Neutral" position, see Page 99.
„ If the engine will be shut down for longer than 30 days, take measures to shut it down, see
Page 300.
10.8
Fitting wheel chocks
1
1
1
BXG000-003
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
177
10
Driving and Transport
10.9
Main battery switch
The wheel chocks (1) secure the machine against rolling away. 2 wheel chocks are affixed to
the machine.
ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Remove the wheel chocks (1) from the storage compartment above the right front wheel.
„ Place the wheel chocks (1) tightly in front of and behind the same wheel of the front axle to
prevent the machine from rolling away.
10.9
Main battery switch
The main battery switch is used to switch on or interrupt the machine’s power supply.
1
2
BXG000-002
The main battery switch (2) is located in the storage compartment (1) below the left platform.
The main battery switch is designed as a momentary switch with integrated LED.
The power supply is automatically interrupted after 24 hours.
If the main battery switch is pressed for not longer than 1 second, the power supply is
automatically interrupted after a delay of about 120 seconds. This guarantees the run-down
time (cleaning) of the exhaust aftertreatment system.
If the main battery switch is pressed for longer than 2 seconds, the power supply is interrupted
immediately. There is no run-down time (cleaning) of the exhaust aftertreatment system.
„ After using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs, interrupt the power supply.
NOTE! Damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system Do not press the main battery
switch for longer than 1 second.
„ To switch on or interrupt the power supply, press the main battery switch:
Æ When the LED is lit, the power supply is switched on
Æ When the LED is flashing, the run-down time is running (approx. 120 second) to allow
cleaning of the exhaust aftertreatment system.
Æ When the LED is not lit, the power supply is interrupted.
„ To interrupt the power supply as quickly as possible in an emergency, press the main
battery switch for 2 seconds.
Æ The power supply is interrupted immediately.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
178
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Driving and Transport
10
Parking the machine 10.10
10.10
Parking the machine
WARNING
Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away
If the machine is not secured against rolling away when it has been switched off, there is a
risk of people being injured by the machine rolling away in an uncontrolled manner.
„ Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.
WARNING
Fire hazard due to hot exhaust gases
There is a risk of fire due to very hot exhaust gases when the diesel particulate filter is being
regenerated. Regeneration of the diesel particulate filter starts automatically.
„ Ensure that the machine is not in the vicinity of flammable materials.
„ If required, suppress the diesel particulate filter regeneration in the menu Diesel engine,
"Settings" or stop a diesel particulate filter regeneration which is already running in the
menu Diesel engine "Maintenance".
„ Fold up side mounted mowers, see Page 95.
Æ The lockings of side mounted mowers are engaged, see Page 166.
„ Ensure that the outer side guards of the right/left side mounted mowers have been folded
into transport position, see Page 166.
„ Fold up the side guards of front mounted mower, see Page 189.
„ Move front mounted mower to central position, see Page 185.
„ Switch Main Mode Switch to "neutral" position, see Page 99.
„ Apply the parking brake, see Page 175.
„ Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 33.
10.11
Recovering the Machine
WARNING
Danger of accidents due to uncontrolled movement of the machine!
When recovering the machine there is a danger that the driver will loose control of the
machine, since the diesel engine is stopped, which increases steering and braking forces. As
a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.
„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone.
„ Only move the machine out of the danger zone.
„ Note that steering and braking forces are increased when the diesel engine is stationary.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
179
10
Driving and Transport
10.11 Recovering the Machine
NOTICE
Damage to the machine due to incorrect operation
If retrieval is not performed correctly, power transmission components or the diesel engine
may be damaged.
„ If using the suspension points at the rear of the machine, ensure not to damage the
hydraulic cylinders at the rear axle.
„ Turn the main mode switch to "Neutral mode".
„ Release the parking brake, if required release manually, see Page 175, see Page 180.
„ Switch off the diesel engine.
„ Pull the fuses F30 and F98 so that the hydraulic motors are at idle, see Page 381.
„ Switch on the ignition so that the direction indicators/flashing warning lamps and the
brake lamps function.
„ Only move the machine out of the danger zone (at max. 8 km/h).
2
1
3
4
BM000-330
„ To retrieve the machine, use the suspension points (1, 2) on the rear or the suspension
points (3, 4) on the front of the machine.
„ If using the suspension points at the rear (1, 2), ensure not to damage the hydraulic
cylinders at the rear axle.
„ Turn the main mode switch to "Neutral mode".
„ Release parking brake, see Page 175.
If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure required for releasing the parking brake:
„ Release the parking brake manually, see Page 180.
„ Switch off the diesel engine.
„ Pull the fuses F98 and F30, see Page 381.
„ Turn the ignition key in the ignition lock to the "I" position so that the direction indicators/
flashing warning lamps and the brake lamps function.
„ Move the machine out of the danger zone.
10.11.1
Release the parking brake manually
The parking brake can be released manually via the hand pump (1) on the "hand pump" control
block (2). This may be required when recovering the machine if the machine no longer builds up
the oil pressure to release the parking brake.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
180
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Driving and Transport
10
Preparing the machine for shipment 10.12
II
I
1
4
1
2
2
3
3
BM000-257
1 Hand pump
3 Stop cock
2 "Hand pump" control block
4 Pump lever (behind the maintenance
flap, see Page 67)
Stop cock (3) in position (I)
The "hand pump" control
block (2) is in normal mode.
The parking brake is released/
applied under certain operating conditions.
Stop cock (3) in position (II)
The "hand pump" control
block (2) is in manual mode.
The parking brake can be released manually.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The machine has been secured from rolling away with wheel chocks.
Releasing the parking brake
„ Swivel the stop cock (3) to position (II).
Æ The "hand pump" control block (2) is blocked for normal mode.
„ Remove the pump lever (4) from the maintenance flap and insert it into the holder on the
hand pump (1).
„ To release the parking brake, manually operate the pump lever (4) until the pumping force
increases sharply.
ð The parking brake is released. As long as the stop cock (3) is in position (II), the parking
brake remains released.
„ Check whether the parking brake has been released by moving the machine.
„ When the parking brake is released, put the pump lever (4) back into the maintenance flap.
„ To restore the braking function on the parking brake, swivel the stop cock (3) to position (I).
10.12
Preparing the machine for shipment
NOTICE
Damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system due to ingress of water through the
exhaust pipe
If the machine is being transported on a transport vehicle against the direction of travel, rain
water may penetrate the exhaust aftertreatment system via the exhaust pipe and damage the
exhaust aftertreatment system.
„ Transport the machine in the direction of travel only.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
181
10
Driving and Transport
10.12 Preparing the machine for shipment
NOTICE
Risk of accident if machine not correctly prepared
If the machine is not correctly prepared for transportation by vehicle, this may result in
accidents and damage to the machine.
„ Carry out the following measures to prepare for conveyance of the machine.
ü The mowers are in transport position.
ü Ensure that the side guards have been folded in, see Page 166, see Page 189.
ü For version with "Side shift of front mounted mower": The front mounted mower is in
central position, see Page 185.
ü The axles have been lowered, see Page 97.
ü After parking the machine, shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
ü Ensure that the cabin door, the side window and the hoods are closed.
ü Secure the machine using suitable lashing material at the designated lashing points, see
Page 182.
ü For "SMV emblem" version: The SMV emblem is covered or removed, see Page 64.
10.12.1
Lashing the machine
WARNING
Danger to life caused by uncontrolled machine movement
If the machine is not properly lashed for transportation by vehicle, the machine may move in
an uncontrolled manner and endanger people.
„ Before transporting the machine, secure it properly to the designated lashing points using
suitable lashing material.
Appropriate lashing points are provided on the machine for attachment of the lashing material.
2
1
4
3
BM000-330
1 Lashing point at rear left
2 Lashing point at rear right
10.12.2
3 Lashing point right front
4 Lashing point left front
Removing the machine wheels
The wheels must be removed if this is necessary to transport the machine. The machine may
only be jacked up by authorised technicians, see Page 403.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
182
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
11
Operation
11
Field Mode
11.1
Operation
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
11.1
Field Mode
WARNING
Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts
If people remain in or enter the danger zone of the machine during operation, there is an
increased risk of injury.
„ Do not start the machine until all safety devices have been fitted and are in sound
condition.
„ Make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine (safety distance, see
Page 22).
If people enter the danger zone:
„ Stop the machine immediately.
„ Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.
„ Do not restart the machine until there is nobody in the danger zone.
The settings for field mode, including mowing functions, sidehill levelling (for the "Hydraulic side
shift front mounted mower" version), settings for cutting height and headland, see Page 205 and
see Page 233.
Game animal protection
EQ003-725
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
183
11
Operation
11.1
Field Mode
When mowing from “outside to inside”, the animals are slowly forced from the safe boundary
area into the centre of the area, which makes the possibility for a life-saving escape for the
animal more difficult or takes it away.
A remedy for this issue is the mowing method from “inside to outside” of the area.
Instead of mowing any edge sections at first, the operator drives straight into the middle of the
field and then mows in a left-handed spiral "from the inside to the outside". This allows animals
to escape from the field unharmed by following their natural instinct to flee.
11.1.1
Working position
For use in the field, the machine must be in the working position, for this:
„ Turn the main mode switch in the "Field mode" position, see Page 99.
„ Fold down the mowers into working position, see Page 95.
„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower or with the "Hydraulically foldable
side guards" version ensure that the side guards are folded down into the working
position, see Page 189.
„ Make sure that the side guards of the side mounted mowers are folded down into the
working position, see Page 189.
„ Checks before commissioning – observe mowing operation, see Page 134.
11.1.2
Field mode on slopes
„ Dangers when operating the machine on slopes, see Page 26.
„ Before working on a slope, increase the tyre pressure by 0.4 bar more than indicated in the
technical data, see Page 80
„ After working on the slope, the tyre pressure must be set to the values in the tyre pressure
table, see Page 80.
BM000-267
„ Do not bring the machine from the transport position into the working position or from the
working position into the transport position as long as the machine is positioned and used
across a slope.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
184
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
11.1.2.1
Operation
11
Field Mode
11.1
Moving front mounted mower into the central position
For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version
1
2
BM000-139
„ To move the front mounted mower to the central position, actuate the "Side shift front
mounted mower left" key or the "Side shift front mounted mowing right" key on the control
lever alternately, see Page 95.
Æ The front mounted mower is in the central position when the top link (1) and the marking (2)
on front guard of the cabin are in line.
11.1.3
Operating mowers
WARNING
Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine due to uncontrolled lowering of a
mower
When lowering a mower into the working position, people or animals in the swivel range may
be seriously injured.
„ Do not lower the mowers until you are absolutely sure that neither people, animals nor
objects are in the swivel range of the mowers.
NOTICE
Damage to the mower due to overload
If the machine is operated in field mode with one mower only, excessively fast driving may
result in mower overload.
„ To prevent mower overload when operating in the field with a single mower, do not drive
faster than you would if you were operating all mowers simultaneously.
ü The circuit is closed (LED on main battery switch is lit), see Page 178.
ü The main mode switch is in the “field mode” position,see Page 99.
„ Start the engine, see Page 168.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
185
11
Operation
11.1
Field Mode
Operating all mowers simultaneously
„ To fold out all mowers from the transport position into the headland position, press the
release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out all mowers simultaneously" key on
the control lever, see Page 95.
„ To lower all mowers, press the "Lower/Fold out all mowers simultaneously" key on the
control lever, see Page 95.
„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower, see Page 189
„ Make sure the side guards of the side mounted mowers have been folded down
automatically; if not, set the locking, see Page 259.
„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.
„ To fold in all mowers from the headland position into the transport position,
„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".
„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in all mowers
simultaneously" key on the control lever, see Page 95.
„ Make sure the side guards of the side mounted mowers have been folded up automatically;
if not, set the locking, see Page 259.
„ Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mowers, see Page 189.
„ To raise all mowers, press the "Raise/Fold in all mowers simultaneously" key on the control
lever, see Page 95.
Raising/lowering the front mower
„ To lower the front mounted mower, press the "Lower front mounted mower" key on the
control lever, see Page 95.
„ Fold down the side guards of the front mounted mower, see Page 189
„ To raise the front mounted mower, press the "Raise front mounted mower" key on the
control lever, see Page 95.
„ Fold up the side guards of the front mounted mowers, see Page 189.
Moving the front mounted mower to the side (for "Hydraulic front mounted
mower side shift" version)
„ To move the front mounted mower to the left, press the "Front mounted mower left" key on
the control lever, see Page 95.
„ To move the front mounted mower to the right, press the "Front mounted mower right" key
on the control lever, see Page 95.
Operating the right side mounted mower
„ To fold out the right side mounted mower from the transport position into the headland
position, press the release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out right side
mounted mower" key on the control lever, see Page 95.
„ To lower the right side mounted mower, press the "Lower/Fold out right side mounted
mower" key on the control lever, see Page 95.
„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded down automatically;
if not, set the locking, see Page 259.
„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.
„ To fold in the right side mounted mower from the headland position into the transport
position,
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
186
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Operation
11
Field Mode
11.1
„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".
„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in right side mounted
mower" key on the control lever, see Page 95.
„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded up automatically; if
not, set the locking, see Page 259.
„ To raise the right side mounted mower, press the "Raise/Fold in right side mounted mower"
key on the control lever, see Page 95.
Operating the left side mounted mower
„ To fold out the left side mounted mower from the transport position into the headland
position, press the release button, subsequently press the "Lower/Fold out left side mounted
mower" key on the control lever, see Page 95.
„ To lower the left side mounted mower, press the "Lower/Fold out left side mounted mower"
key on the control lever, see Page 95.
„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded down automatically;
if not, set the locking, see Page 259.
„ Connect the guard cloths "front" and "side guard" using the turnlock fastener.
„ To fold in the left side mounted mower from the headland position into the transport position,
„ loosen the turnlock fasteners of the guard cloth "front" and "side guard".
„ Press the release button, subsequently press the "Raise/Fold in left side mounted
mower" key on the control lever, see Page 95.
„ Make sure the side guard of the side mounted mowers has been folded up automatically; if
not, set the locking, see Page 259.
„ To raise the left side mounted mower, press the "Raise/Fold in left side mounted mower"
key on the control lever, see Page 95.
11.1.4
Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)
When fast reversing during forward travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and
accelerates backwards to 70% of the previous driving speed.
When fast reversing during reverse travel, the machine decelerates to a standstill and
accelerates forwards to 100% of the previous driving speed.
Fast reversing is possible in field mode only.
BMG000-007
ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.
To activate fast reversing:
„ While driving, press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2), move the
control lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
187
11
Operation
11.1
Field Mode
11.1.5
Switching the mower drive on and off
NOTICE
Damage to the mower due to overload
If the machine is operated in field mode with one mower only, excessively fast driving may
result in mower overload.
„ To prevent mower overload when operating in the field with a single mower, do not drive
faster than you would if you were operating all mowers simultaneously.
ü The circuit is closed (LED on main battery switch is lit), see Page 178.
ü The engine is started, see Page 168.
ü The Main Mode Switch is in the "field mode" position, see Page 99.
ü All the mowers are in the headland position, see Page 185.
ü The side guards are folded down, see Page 97 and see Page 189.
„ To check the operating state of the mower drives, observe the LED at top left on the
respective key, see Page 97.
For more detailed information on the keypad see see Page 97.
Switching all mower drives on or off
„ To switch on all mower drives, first press
and then
„ To switch off all mower drives press the
on the keypad.
key on the keypad.
Switching the front drive on or off
„ To switch on the front drive, first press
„ To switch off the front drive press
and then
on the keypad.
on the keypad.
Switching the right/left mower drives on or off
„ To switch on the left mower drive, first press
„ To switch off the left mower drive press
„ To switch on the right mower drive, first press
„ To switch off the right mower drive press
and
on the keypad.
on the keypad.
and
on the keypad.
on the keypad.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
188
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
11.2
Operation
11
Folding up/folding down side guards
11.2
Folding up/folding down side guards
For the "Series" version
Front mounted mowers
1
2
1
4
3
BMG000-040
ü The front mounted mower is in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
Folding up side guard (transport position)
„ Open the turnlock fasteners (3).
„ In order to unlock the side guard (1), press down the ratchet by means of a screwdriver (2).
„ Fold up the side guard (1) until the side guard engages in the latch.
Folding down side guard (working position)
„ To fold down the side guard (1), pull the side guard out of the latch while the locking is (4)
pulled and fold it down.
„ Secure the guard cloths by means of the turnlock fasteners (3).
Side mounted mowers
The side guards of the side mounted mowers fold up and down automatically when folding the
mowers up and down.
„ Before the side mounted movers are folded into the transport position, release the turnlock
fasteners on the guard cloths.
„ After folding the side mounted mowers into the working position, close the turnlock fasteners
on the guard cloths.
„ Make sure that the side guards on the side mounted mowers have folded automatically into
the transport position and have also folded down automatically into the working position, see
Page 166.
For the version with "Hydraulically foldable side guards"
The side guards on the front mounted mower and the side mounted mowers are folded up and
down hydraulically.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
189
11
Operation
11.2
Folding up/folding down side guards
WARNING
Crush hazard caused by lowering the loading side guards
While the hydraulic side guard is being lowered there is a crush hazard between the side
guard and the top guard sheet .
„ Make certain while the hydraulic side guard is being lowered that there are no persons
remaining in the danger zone.
1
2
1
1
2
BMG000-046
Folding up side guards into transport position
„ Open the turnlock fasteners (2).
„ To fold up the side guards (1), actuate the "Fold up side guards" key, see Page 97.
Folding down side guards into working position
„ To fold own the side guards (1), press the "Fold down side guards" key see Page 97.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Secure the guard cloths using the turnlock fasteners (2).
Automatic folding up/down of the side guards
WARNING! Risk of injury from automatic fold-up and fold-down of the side guards! When
pressing the keys "Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" and "Lower/fold down all mowers
simultaneously", ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine.
„ Before the mowers are folded into transport position, make sure that the turnlock fasteners
on the guard cloths are open.
•
•
If the key "Raise/fold in all mowers simultaneously" is actuated and the release button has
already been pressed, the side guards will automatically fold up as of the headland position,
see Page 97.
If the "Lower/fold down all mowers simultaneously" key is pressed and the release button
has already been pressed, the side guards fold down automatically as of the headland
position, see Page 97.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
190
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
11.3
Operation
11
Front guard
11.3
Front guard
WARNING
Risk of injury due to objects being flung out
If the front guard/side guard is folded up during work, objects may be flung out. As a result,
people may be seriously injured.
„ Fold down the front guard/side guard.
„ Connect the guard cloths of the front guard and the side guard using the turnlock
fasteners.
11.3.1
Folding up the front guard
The front guard can be folded up for repair and maintenance.
This is described below using the example of the side mounted mower; the procedure for the
front mounted mower is identical.
2
3
4
1
KMG000-006
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Open the turnlock fasteners (3).
„ To fold up the front guard (1), press the catch with a screwdriver (2) and fold up the front
guard.
„ Fix the front guard (1) in place with the wedge (4).
11.3.2
Fold down the front guard
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
191
11
Operation
11.4
Operating support jack
3
2
4
1
KMG000-082
„ Hold the front guard (1) firmly in place and push the wedge (4) upwards.
„ Fold down the front guard (1).
„ Ensure that the front guard (1) is engaged in the lock (2) on the right and left sides of the
machine.
„ Close the turnlock fasteners (3).
11.4
Operating support jack
For the version with “support jack”
INFO
In order to increase the base of the support jack when the ground is soft, use a suitable
support.
11.4.1
Moving support jack into transport position
2
1
1
2
KMG000-065
„ Raise the machine via front hydraulics until the support jack (2) can be inserted.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
WARNING! Crush hazard due to the support jack! Keep hands and feet out of the danger
zone of the support jack.
„ Pull the tension bar (1), insert the support jack (2) and lock it with the tension bar (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
192
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
11.4.2
Operation
11
Inclination sensor
11.5
Moving support jack into support position
2
1
1
2
KMG000-064
„ Raise the machine via the front hydraulics until the support jack (2) can be lowered.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
WARNING! Crush hazard due to the support jack! Keep hands and feet out of the danger
zone of the support jack.
„ Pull the tension bar (1), lower the support jack (2) and lock it with the tension bar (1).
„ Lower the machine via the front hydraulics.
11.5
Inclination sensor
11.5.1
Distribution of traction
Active mode improves traction on slopes by distributing traction to all 4 wheels depending on
the inclination.
11.5.2
Side shift front mounted mower
The active curve mode moves the front mounted mower sideways depending on the steering
angle.
The active inclination mode moves the front mounted mower sideways depending on the
steering angle and inclination.
11.6
PowerSplit
The PowerSplit is used to increase the efficiency of the machine. The continuous engine
performance is adjusted to the application conditions, thereby helping to optimise fuel
consumption.
The PowerSplit automatically switches between ECO-Power and M-Power, depending on the
speed of the diesel engine.
ECO-Power automatically switches to M-Power if the engine speed drops below 1550 min-1.
M-Power automatically switches to ECO-Power when the engine speed exceeds 1550 min-1
again and the engine load is above the switchover load (factory basic setting 80%).
M-Power always switches back to ECO-Power mode abruptly as soon as the engine is relieved
accordingly.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
193
11
Operation
11.6
PowerSplit
EQ003-142
EQ003-141
Setting the PowerSplit:
„ In the main menu -> Menu Engine -> Submenu "Diesel engine settings" set the "PowerSplit"
changeover type to "Abrupt switchover" or "Stepless changeover".
In the case of abrupt changeover, the changeover occurs abruptly at the set rotational speed.
In the case of stepless changeover, the changeover occurs continuously and starts 100 min -1
before the set rotational speed.
EQ003-143
Following activation of the PowerSplit, the indicator lamp on the terminal is lit for the engine
management (1)
or
for the automatic changeover of the engine management.
As soon as the "ECO/M-Power" key for manual ECO-Power/M-Power changeover is pressed on
the keypad, the automatic operation of the PowerSplit is interrupted and the selected engine
characteristic ECO-Power or M-Power is retained.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
194
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
11.7
Operation
11
Operating SectionControl
11.7
Operating SectionControl
With "SectionControl" version
ü Section control is allocated to one of the memory keys on the control lever, in the menu
Cabin "Control lever".
ü Section Control is enabled and activated, see menu Machine "Electronics, E-solutions,
Activated add-ons".
ü SectionControl is activated in the CCI terminal.
ü The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position, see Page 99.
ü The mowers are in headland position or working position, see Page 95.
ü At least one mower drive has been switched on, see Page 97
ü The machine is at a standstill or moves forwards.
„ On the control lever, press the memory key that has SectionControl allocated.
ð The status of SectionControl is shown in the status line in the terminal of the machine,
see Page 206.
„ Start up the machine, see Page 170.
Æ The mowers are automatically raised and lowered via SectionControl.
SectionControl is switched off automatically as soon as there is a manual intervention in mower
control (for example raising/lowering the mowers or switching the mower drives on/off).
INFO
The lowering times of the mower can be selected in the menu Machine, "ISOBUS". The
higher the value, the earlier the mower is lowered.
Recommended procedure
•
•
•
•
Create a new job.
Mow the headland with the machine.
Draw in the field boundaries.
Use SectionControl automatic.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
195
11
Operation
11.8
Operating GPS guidance
11.8
Operating GPS guidance
For "GPS guidance" version
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine
By activating the "GPS guidance" steering system, the machine is automatically threaded and
held in previously defined lanes. As a result, people can be seriously or fatally injured.
The "GPS guidance" steering system is not an autonomous steering system. Moving the
steering wheel manually overrides and deactivates the steering system.
„ Never leave the driver's position during operation. Watch the behaviour of the machine
continuously and intervene if necessary.
„ Manually drive around obstacles in the field/lanes, such as electricity pylons. The steering
system does not automatically recognise obstacles.
„ At the end of a lane, steer the machine to the next lane. The steering system does not
steer automatically to the next selected lane.
„ Deactivate and/or override the steering system at once and stop and secure the machine
if there are persons in the danger zone.
„ Deactivate the steering system if poor visibility does not allow safe operation.
„ Do not use the "GPS guidance" steering system on public roads and paths.
ü The lanes are established, see chapter "Map view, lanes" in the instructions for the CCI
terminal.
ü All necessary settings are made, see Page 162.
ü The correct machine profile was recognised, see Page 163.
ü A GPS signal is available, see Page 163.
ü The main mode switch is in "Field mode" position.
ü The machine moves forward at a speed between 0.5 km/h and 12 km/h.
ü The "GPS guidance" steering system is ready, see Page 162.
ü The driver does not actively manipulate the steering wheel.
„ For operation of the CCI terminal, see instructions for the CCI terminal.
„ To activate the "GPS guidance" steering system, press the "Automatic steering system"
button on the control lever, see Page 95.
Æ The "GPS guidance" steering system threads the machine onto the marked lane and holds
it in the lane until the driver intervenes.
At the end of the lane, the driver must intervene manually and steer to the next lane. Without
intervention by the driver, the steering system would keep steering the machine straight ahead.
The machine would also move beyond field boundaries.
Adjusting track detection and steering response
If the machine steers too strongly or too weakly when threading onto the marked lane, the
intensity of the steering can be adjusted. To do this:
„ In CCI.Command, open the menu Settings, "AutoGuidance".
„ Adjust track detection
.
Æ The higher the set value, the sharper the steering of the machine.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
196
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Operation
11
Operating GPS guidance
11.8
If the machine steers too much when holding the lane, the steering response can be adjusted.
To do this:
„ In CCI.Command, open the menu Settings, "AutoGuidance".
„ Adjust the steering response
.
Æ The higher the set value, the sharper the steering of the machine.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
197
12
Terminal
12.1
Display design
12
Terminal
WARNING
Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored
If error messages are ignored and the fault is not rectified, there is a risk of injury to persons
and/or severe damage to the machine.
„ When an error message is displayed, eliminate the disturbance; see chapter "Error list" in
the supplement to operating instructions "Error messages, information messages and
parameters".
„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.
INFO
The working screens and menus in the following chapters show all possible machine
versions. Therefore, the working screen and the menus on the terminal of your machine may
differ.
12.1
Display design
1
2
EQG002-015
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Display
Touch display and input interface on the terminal.
2
"On/Off" key
Switches the display on/off.
As the terminal is switched on and off via the
ignition, do not press the "On/Off" key until
the terminal does not respond when the ignition is switched on/off.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
198
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
12.2
Terminal
12
Description display
12.2
Description display
EQG002-014
The display is used for displaying and entering data. It provides information about the current
operating status of the machine. Settings can be made and different functions can be run.
To provide menu guidance and entry of values/data, the terminal is equipped with a touchcapable display. Touching the display enables you to call up and change values.
NOTICE
Operate the display only with your finger tips to avoid damaging the surface. Never use a pen,
pencil or other pointed objects.
„ To run a specific function, press the appropriate key on the display.
„ To change a value quicker, press the respective key for more than 2 seconds.
„ To scroll in selection windows, drag a finger over the display.
12.3
Navigation module
EQ002-035
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
199
12
Terminal
12.3
Navigation module
The function keys (1–6) of the navigation module provide direct access to the most important
keys on the display.
The navigation scroll wheel (7) can be used to select the keys on the terminal, make settings on
the machine and start and stop functions.
Description of the keys
Pos.
Icon
Designation
Explanation
1
"Step back" key
Goes back one input step.
2
"Step forwards" key
Goes forwards one input step.
3
"Home" key
Switches to the working screen
"Road mode" or "Field mode".
4
"Main menu" key
Opens the main menu.
5
"F2" key
Not assigned.
6
"F1" key
Not assigned.
7
Navigation scroll wheel
Navigates on the display.
"Navigation scroll wheel" function
BXG000-055
Besides inputting data through the touch display, the navigation scroll wheel can also be used
to navigate on the terminal and change numerical values.
To do this, the "navigation scroll wheel" can be pressed, rotated and slid to the side.
Navigating on the terminal
•
•
•
Turning: Changes the selection of keys on the terminal in the direction of rotation.
The selected key has a yellow border.
Pushing: Changes the selection of keys on the terminal in the sliding direction.
The selected key has a yellow border.
Pressing: Actuates the selected key.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
200
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal
12
Possible terminals
12.4
Changing an adjustable numerical value
„ To navigate to the required adjustable value, rotate or slide the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).
Æ The selected key has a yellow border.
„ To switch the adjustable value to input mode, press the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).
Æ The key has an orange background.
„ To change the value, rotate the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).
„ To save the adjusted value, press the "navigation scroll wheel" (1).
12.4
Possible terminals
I
II
EQG003-140
An 8" terminal (I) or a 12" terminal (II) can be installed in the machine.
The following description is explained in the example of the 12" terminal (II), but applies to both
terminals. However, menus or displays may be arranged differently on the 8" terminal (I).
12.5
Input window
If a parameter with a numerical value is selected in a menu, an input window opens. The input
window can be used to enter and then to release a new setpoint value for the parameter via a
keypad.
EQG000-008
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
201
12
Terminal
12.5
Input window
Operate input window
EQG002-061
Pos.
Icon
Designation
Explanation
1
Cancel
Cancels the entry and closes the
input window without saving the
entry.
2
Save
Saves the entered value and
closes the input window.
3
Value
Indicates the currently saved or
newly entered value, in this example the value 50%.
4
Delete last digit
Deletes the last digit of the value.
5
Delete value
Deletes the input value.
6
Standard value (example) Sets the value to the preset standard value (in this example the value
50).
7
Point
Inputs a decimal point.
8
Keys "0" to "9"
Input the numerical values 0 to 9.
Plus/minus
Switches the algebraic sign of the
value.
9
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
202
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Pos.
Icon
Terminal
12
Selection window
12.6
Designation
Explanation
10
-100 (example)
11
-10 (example)
12
+10 (example)
• Each time the key is pressed,
the current value is increased or
reduced by the indicated value.
• If the key is pressed and held
down, the value changes
continuously by the indicated
value.
13
+100 (example)
14
Minimum/maximum value
Indicates the minimum and maximum value of the parameter.
15
Parameter designation
Indicates the parameter designation, in this example "sensitivity".
If a value is input which is less than the minimum value, the value cannot be saved and the
minimum value (14) is shown in red.
If a value is input which is greater than the maximum value, the value cannot be saved and the
maximum value (14) is shown in red.
„ Input the required value via the keys (7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13).
ð The value appears in the "Value" display range (3).
„ To save the entered value, press
12.6
.
Selection window
If there are several selection options for an input field, a corresponding selection window opens.
EQG002-060
Pos.
Icon
Designation
Explanation
1
Cancel
Cancels the entry and closes the selection window without saving the
entry.
2
Save
Saves the entered value and closes
the selection window.
3
Up
Moves the slide controller upwards.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
203
12
Terminal
12.6
Selection window
Pos.
Icon
Designation
Explanation
4
Down
Moves the slide controller downwards.
5
Possible selection
Can be selected.
6
Current selection
Indicates the selection made or the
saved setting.
„ To choose the required setting, press
.
ð The chosen selection is highlighted with
„ To save the chosen selection, press
.
.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
204
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal machine functions
13
13
Terminal machine functions
WARNING
Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored
If error messages are ignored and the fault is not rectified, there is a risk of injury to persons
and/or severe damage to the machine.
„ When an error message is displayed, eliminate the disturbance; see chapter "Error list" in
the supplement to operating instructions "Error messages, information messages and
parameters".
„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.
2
1
3
4
6
3
2
1
6
5
5
EQG002-011
After switching on the ignition the working screen "Road mode" or the working screen "Field
mode" is opened in the main window, depending on the position of the Main Mode Switch.
•
•
The working screen "Road mode" shows the most-important engine and driving data.
The working screen "Field mode" shows information about the field mode. Several settings
for the field mode can be made when in the working screen.
The working screen is divided up into the following display ranges:
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Status line
Shows the current states of the machine, see
Page 206.
2
Malfunction warning panel
Indicates error states of malfunctions.
Is only visible when malfunctions occur, see
Page 209.
3
Title bar
Keys for counter menu, error menu and main
menu, see Page 213.
4
Direct input field mode
Keys for direct input of the most important settings in field mode (on "Field mode" working
screen only), see Page 226.
5
Information section
Freely assignable keys, see Page 227.
6
Engine and driving data
Indicates current fuel levels, engine and traction
drive data, see Page 227.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
205
13
Terminal machine functions
13.1
Status line
13.1
Status line
1
3
2
4
6
5
7
EQ003-389
1
Customer counter
5
2
3
4
Side mounted mower left
Front mounted mower
Right side mounted mower
6
7
Assignment of control lever keys M1,
M2, M3 and M4
Automatic steering system
SectionControl
The keys in the status line display the current status of the corresponding parts via colours and
icons.
Customer counter (1)
Icon
Explanation
Customer counter is inactive.
Customer counter is active.
Area counter is active.
If the key is pressed, the menu "Customer counter" appears.
Left side mounted mower (2)
Icon
Explanation
Side mounted mower in transport position and locked in place
Side mounted mower in transport position and not locked in place
Side mounted mower between transport and headland position
Side mounted mower in headland position
Side mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief not
active)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
206
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Icon
Terminal machine functions
13
Status line
13.1
Explanation
Side mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)
Error condition
Position of side mounted mower not available
When the key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Side mounted mowers" is opened.
Front mounted mower (3)
Icon
Explanation
Front mounted mower in headland position
Front mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief
not active)
Front mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)
Warning state, faulty on one side
Error condition, faulty on two sides
Position of front mounted mower not available
When a key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Front mounted mower" is opened.
Right side mounted mower (4)
Icon
Explanation
Side mounted mower in transport position and locked in place
Side mounted mower in transport position and not locked in place
Side mounted mower between transport and headland position
Side mounted mower in headland position
Side mounted mower below headland position (mowing unit load relief not
active)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
207
13
Terminal machine functions
13.1
Status line
Icon
Explanation
Side mounted mower in working position (mowing unit load relief active)
Error condition
Position of side mounted mower not available
When a key is pressed, the mower functions menu "Side mounted mowers" is opened.
Assignment of control lever keys M1, M2, M3 and M4 (5)
The 4 control lever keys can be assigned with all the functions (the table shows an assignment
using the M1 key):
Icon
Explanation
Key assignment M1 is inactive.
Call up saved cutting height 1.
Call up saved cutting height 2.
Call up open/close right swath hood (for version with "Swath merging
system with hydraulic hood").
Call up open/close left swath hood (for version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood").
Call up saved mowing unit load relief 1.
Call up saved mowing unit load relief 2.
Call up mirror front mowing unit side shift (for version with "Hydraulic
front mowing unit side shift").
INFO: When the automatic side shift is active, only the manual shift is
mirrored.
Call up mirroring of front mounted mower side shift centre position (for
version with "Hydraulic front mounted mower side shift").
INFO: When the automatic side shift is active, only the manual side shift
is reset.
Reverse front mowing unit side shift effective direction at steering angle
(for version with "Hydraulic front mowing unit side shift").
Activate Section Control (for the "Section Control" version).
When a key is pressed, the cabin "Control lever" menu is opened.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
208
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal machine functions
13
Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel
13.2
Automatic steering system (6)
For the "Automatic steering system" version
Icon
Explanation
ISOBUS automatic steering system is inactive.
ISOBUS automatic steering system is ready.
The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release
switches have been actuated.
ISOBUS automatic steering system is active.
The automatic steering system is ready when the associated release
switches and the "Automatic steering system" key have been actuated.
When a key is pressed, the driving functions menu "Automatic steering system" is opened.
Section Control (7)
For the "SectionControl" version
+
Icon
Explanation
SectionControl is inactive.
SectionControl is ready.
SectionControl is active.
When a key is pressed, the "ISOBUS" machine menu opens.
13.2
Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel
EQG002-021
The following warnings and faults may appear in the “Malfunction warning panel” display
range:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
209
13
Terminal machine functions
13.2
Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel
Icon
Designation
Explanation
"Exhaust aftertreatment system"
warning lamp
Shows the status of the exhaust aftertreatment
system.
Yellow "Engine" warning lamp
The engine electronics have detected a fault with
the engine.
Red "Engine" warning lamp
The engine electronics have detected a serious
fault with the engine.
„ Immediately stop the engine and eliminate the
fault.
Yellow warning lamp load condition DPF
Indicates the soot / ash load condition of the
diesel particulate filter (DPF).
Red warning lamp load condition
DPF
Indicates the soot / ash load condition of the
diesel particulate filter (DPF).
Condition of DPF regeneration:
active
The diesel particulate filter regeneration (DPF regeneration) is active. The soot particles are combusted in the diesel particulate filter (DPF).
„ Ensure that the machine is not in the vicinity of
flammable materials.
Condition of DPF regeneration:
suppressed
The diesel particulate filter regeneration (DPF regeneration) is suppressed.
"Limited operation" warning lamp If the control electronics establish a fault with the
traction drive, the speed of the machine is limited
to 0 to 20 km/h depending on the severity of the
fault.
WARNING! In addition, the traction control
system, cruise control and anti-lock braking
system functions are deactivated. Eliminate
the error immediately. Restricted operation is
used only for recovery of the machine.
"Frost protection mode" indicator
lamp
13.2.1
Frost protection mode is activated when the ambient temperature and the engine coolant temperature fall below a defined limit. In frost protection
mode, the engine speed is limited. A progress bar
below the indicator lamp shows for how long the
frost protection will continue to be active.
Warning lamps – urea tank filling level
The combinations of warning lamp status displays listed in the table indicate the drop in the
filling level in the urea tank as a percentage.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
210
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Status of the warning lamps
Terminal machine functions
13
Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel
13.2
Explanation
10 % ≥ urea tank filling level > 5 %
• 1. Warning
on
off
5 % ≥ urea tank filling level > 2.5 %
on
flashing
• The available torque is reduced to 80%
of the maximum torque.
2.5 % ≥ urea tank filling level > 2 %
flashing
flashing
• The available torque is reduced from
80% to 20% of the maximum torque.
Urea tank filling level = 2 %
flashing
on
• The available torque is reduced to 20 %
of the maximum torque.
„ To reach full engine performance and driving speed again, fill an adequate amount of urea
in the specified quantity into the urea tank.
13.2.2
Warning lamps – urea quality, errors or manipulation on the exhaust
aftertreatment system
The combinations of warning lamp status displays listed in the table indicate errors or
manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system as well as unacceptable urea quality.
Status of the warning lamps
on
off
Explanation
Up to 60 min engine running time after a
fault or manipulation to the exhaust aftertreatment system or impermissible urea
quality has been detected.
• 1. Warning
From 60 min – 170 min engine running
time after the cause has been detected.
on
flashing
• The available torque is reduced to 80%
of the maximum torque.
From 170 min – 200 min engine running
time after the cause has been detected.
flashing
flashing
• The available torque is reduced from
80% to 20% of the maximum torque.
From 200 min engine running time after the
cause has been detected.
flashing
on
• The available torque is reduced to 20 %
of the maximum torque.
To reach full engine performance and driving speed again:
„ Add an adequate amount of urea of the specified quality to the urea tank.
„ Search for and remedy the error on the exhaust aftertreatment system, get in touch with
your KRONE service partner.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
211
13
Terminal machine functions
13.2
Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning panel
13.2.3
Warning lamps – load condition diesel particulate filter
WARNING
Fire hazard due to hot exhaust gases
There is a risk of fire due to very hot exhaust gases when the diesel particulate filter is being
regenerated. Regeneration of the diesel particulate filter starts automatically.
„ Ensure that the machine is not in the vicinity of flammable materials.
„ If required, suppress the diesel particulate filter regeneration in the menu Diesel engine,
"Settings" or stop a diesel particulate filter regeneration which is already running in the
menu Diesel engine "Maintenance".
The combinations of warning lamps listed in the table indicate the soot and ash load condition of
the diesel particulate filter.
Status of the warning lamps
Explanation
Soot load of diesel particulate filter=75 %–100 %
„ Manually start DPF regeneration in the menu Engine
"Diesel engine maintenance" and ensure that the
machine is not in the vicinity of flammable materials.
on
Ash load of diesel particulate filter=100 %–133 %
The warning lamp appears after 4500 operating hours.
„ Have the diesel particulate filter changed by
authorised specialists.
on
Soot load of diesel particulate filter=100 %–105 %
on
on
• The available torque is reduced to 75% of the
maximum torque.
If the DPF regeneration is not manually started or the
DPF regeneration is suppressed, the DPF regeneration
can be implemented by the KRONE service partner
only.
„ Manually start DPF regeneration in the menu Engine
"Diesel engine maintenance" and ensure that the
machine is not in the vicinity of flammable materials.
Ash load diesel particulate filter≥133 %
• The available torque is reduced to 75% of the
maximum torque.
„ Have the diesel particulate filter changed by
authorised specialists.
Soot load diesel particulate filter≥105 %
on
on
• The available torque is reduced to 50% of the
maximum torque.
„ Have DPF regeneration implemented by the KRONE
service partner.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
212
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
13.3
Terminal machine functions
13
Keys in the title bar
13.3
Keys in the title bar
EQG002-022
Icon
13.3.1
Designation
Explanation
"Counter" menu
Opens the "Counter" menu.
"Error" menu
Opens the "Error" menu.
Main menu
Opens the main menu.
“Counters” menu
EQG002-083
Current machine data can be retrieved via sub-menus in the “Counters” menu.
ü The working screen is active.
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The display shows the “Counters” menu with its sub-menus.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
213
13
Terminal machine functions
13.3
Keys in the title bar
“Customer Counter” menu
EQG002-055
Customer records can be created in the “Customer Counter” menu.
ü The “Counters” menu is active.
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The list with the created customers is displayed.
Creating customer data record
EQG002-056
„ To create a customer data record, press
.
ð The alphanumeric input field "Last name" opens.
„ Enter or change the data of the customer in the alphanumeric input field.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
214
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal machine functions
13
Keys in the title bar
13.3
Operation alphanumeric input field
„ To change from capital letters to lower case letters and vice versa, press
„ Press
to change from alphabetical to numerical keyboard.
„ To change from numerical to alphabetical keyboard, press
„ Press
.
.
to enter special sign.
„ To save the customer record, press
.
„ To cancel the entry and keep the old setting, press
.
EQG003-027
„ To enter more customer data, press
.
ð The menu with the input fields for the customer record is displayed.
EQG003-029
„ To enter the customer data, press the appropriate key.
„ Enter the data via the alphanumeric input field.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
215
13
Terminal machine functions
13.3
Keys in the title bar
EQG003-028
Æ The created customer data records are indicated in a list on the customer counter.
„ To create another customer data record, press
„ To select a customer data record, press
.
.
„ To select the surface counter for a customer, press
.
EQG003-032
Æ The display shows the "Surfaces" overview for the particular customer.
Æ One "Surface 01" is automatically created for each new customer.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
216
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal machine functions
13
Keys in the title bar
13.3
Renaming surface
„ To open the “Details surface” window, press
.
EQG003-020
„ To rename a surface, press the corresponding key; in this example, press
.
Æ The alphanumeric input field opens.
„ Rename the surface in the alphanumeric input field,see Page 215.
„ To delete the surface, press
.
Creating a surface
EQG003-021
„ To create a surface for the customer, press
.
Æ The alphanumeric input field opens.
„ Enter the name for the new surface in the alphanumeric input field, see Page 215.
Æ The created surfaces are displayed in a table in the "Surfaces" window.
If several surfaces are created for a customer, a line with the total values for the created
surfaces of the customer appears at the end of the table.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
217
13
Terminal machine functions
13.3
Keys in the title bar
Deleting a surface
EQG002-074
„ To delete one or more surfaces, press
.
Æ A selection view opens.
„ Select the surface or the surfaces that are to be deleted in the square at the end of the line.
„ To delete the selected surfaces, press
.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
218
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal machine functions
13
Keys in the title bar
13.3
Starting and stopping surface counter
EQG003-022
„ To start the counter for each surface, press
in the "Surfaces" window or
in the "Surface details" window.
Æ The counter starts and records the surface data until the counter is stopped again.
EQG002-059
Æ The currently recorded surface is shown in the "Customer counter" window and the
"Surfaces" window in the "Active customer counter" area The icon for the surface and for
the customer is highlighted in green
„ To stop the counter, press
in the "Surfaces" window or
in the
"Surface details" screen.
INFO
If the key
is pressed for a surface, although the customer counter has
been started for another surface, a direct change is made to the surfaces being recorded. In
other words, the counter of the previously recorded surface is stopped and - at the same time
- the counter for the other surface is started.
Viewing current surface data
The “Details surface” window displays the current surface data.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
219
13
Terminal machine functions
13.3
Keys in the title bar
EQG003-020
"Day counter" menu
EQG003-024
ü The "Counter" menu is open.
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ Three day counters are shown that permanently record the current work and consumption
data of the machine for the three currently running working periods. Date and time show
when the day counters were last reset.
„ Press
to complete the work periods and to reset the day counter.
„ To select the values for a day counter, press
in the corresponding line.
Æ The "Day counter details" window opens.
EQG003-023
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
220
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal machine functions
13
Keys in the title bar
13.3
The "Day counter details" window shows the following current data for the selected work period:
•
•
Operating hours of the diesel engine
Operating hours of mowers
•
•
•
Operating hours mowers swathing
Operating hours mowers partial wide spreading
Operating hours mowers wide spreading
•
•
•
•
Fuel consumption
Fuel consumption per area
Odometer (road, field, total)
Area counter
•
•
•
Area swathing
Area partial wide spreading
Area wide spreading
The work periods can be reset individually so that each counter starts counting the data again
from 0.
„ Press
to complete the work period and to reset the day counter.
INFO
Fuel consumption measurement is not calibrated and can therefore not be used for billing
purposes.
“Total Counter” menu
EQG002-012
ü The “Counters” menu is active.
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The current work and consumption data of the machine is displayed.
The following current data is displayed:
•
•
•
•
•
Operating hours of the diesel engine
Operating hours of the mowers
Area counter
Fuel consumption
Odometer (road, field, total distance)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
221
13
Terminal machine functions
13.3
Keys in the title bar
INFO
Fuel consumption measurement is not calibrated and can therefore not be used for billing
purposes.
13.3.2
“Error” menu
EQG002-024
ü The working screen is active.
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The display shows the “Errors” menu with its sub-menus.
“Active Errors” menu
EQG003-025
ü The “Errors” menu is active.
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The display shows the “Active Errors” menu with the active errors on the machine with error
number and error designation.
„ To call up information on an error, press
next to the error message.
Æ The error description window is displayed.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
222
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
1
Terminal machine functions
13
Keys in the title bar
13.3
5
2
3
4
EQ003-072
1 Error number
2 Brief description of the error
5 "Close" key
3 Error description
4 Selection "Hide message until restart"
„ To close the error description, press
.
"Error history" menu
The error history can be cleared by a KRONE service technician only.
EQG003-090
ü The "Error" menu has been selected.
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The display shows the "Error history" menu with error messages that have occurred since
the error history was last cleared.
„ To call up information on an error, press
next to the error message.
Æ The error description window is displayed.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
223
13
Terminal machine functions
13.3
Keys in the title bar
1
5
2
3
4
EQ003-072
1 Error number
2 Brief description of the error
5 "Close" key
3 Error description
4 Selection "Hide message until restart"
„ To close the error description, press
.
"Control units overview" menu
The "Control units overview" menu displays the control units of the machine on a diagram.
EQG002-048
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The display shows the "Control units overview" menu.
„ To open the overview of the control units for the machine bus, press
.
The respective brief descriptions are on the squares for the control units.
The status of the individual control units is indicated by the colour of the squares.
Icon
Explanation
CAN activity present, no errors.
CAN activity present, with one or more errors.
No CAN activity present, error cannot be determined.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
224
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal machine functions
13
Keys in the title bar
13.3
EQG002-041
„ To open the overview of the control units for the engine bus, press
.
EQG002-042
„ To open the overview of the control units of the AUX bus, press
.
„ To open the overview of the control units of the ISOBUS, press
.
EQ002-528
„ To call up information about a control unit, press the key on the respective control unit.
Æ The associated information field is displayed.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
225
13
Terminal machine functions
13.4
Direct input “Field mode”
13.3.3
Main menu
EQG002-013
ü The working screen has been selected.
„ To open the main menu, press
.
For menu structure and to navigate in the menus, see Page 233.
13.4
Direct input “Field mode”
EQG002-018
The "Direct input field mode" can be used to make settings directly from the "Field mode"
working screen without having to open the submenu.
To change the specified setting values, press
Pressing
•
•
•
.
reduces the set value:
By a specified value each time the key is pressed.
If the key is pressed and held down, the value is gradually reduced.
If the key is held down for longer, the value is reduced more quickly.
Pressing
•
•
•
or
increases the set value:
By a specified value each time the key is pressed.
If the key is pressed and held down, the value is gradually increased.
If the key is held down for longer, the value is increased more quickly.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
226
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
13.5
Terminal machine functions
13
Information area
13.5
Information area
EQG000-007
The keys in the information section can be freely assigned via a selection box.
Assigning keys
ü The working screen has been selected.
„ Press the key to be assigned.
ð The selection box opens up.
„ Select the required assignment.
„ To save the assignment, press
„ To cancel the entry, press
.
.
When the selection is saved, the existing assignment is overwritten.
13.6
Engine and driving data display range
The "Engine and driving data" display range shows the machine's current fuel levels, engine
and driving data.
1
4
6
5
2
3
9
8
7
1
2
6
4
7
3
EQG002-016
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
1
Display coolant temperature
Indicates the current coolant temperature in °C
(digital and analogue).
2
Display fuel level
Indicates the current fuel level as a % (digital and
analogue).
3
Display urea level
Indicates the current urea level as a % (digital
and analogue).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
227
13
Terminal machine functions
13.6
Engine and driving data display range
Pos.
Designation
Explanation
4
Display speed in digital format
Indicates the current speed in digital format in km/
h or mph.
5
Display speed in analogue format Indicates the current speed in analogue format in
km/h or mph (in "Road mode" working screen
only).
6
Display engine speed in digital
format
Displays the current engine speed in digital
format in rpm (min⁻¹).
7
Display engine speed in analogue format
Displays the current engine speed in analogue
format in rpm (min⁻¹).
8
Display engine load in digital
format
Indicates the current engine load as % in digital
format (in "Field mode" working screen only).
9
Switchover rear-view camera
Shows the display range for the rear-view camera.
Warning lamps for engine and fuel levels
Warning lamp for coolant temperature (1)
Icon
Explanation
Coolant temperature OK.
Coolant temperature is in critical range.
Warning lamp for fuel level (2)
Icon
Explanation
Fuel tank filling level greater than 10 %.
Fuel tank filling level less than 10 %.
Warning lamp for urea filling level (3)
Icon
Explanation
Urea tank filling level greater than 20 %.
Display is lit: Urea tank filling level less than 20 %.
Display flashes: The engine performance is reduced.
If the filling level has dropped below 20 %, the warning lamps on the malfunction warning panel
warn of a reduction in the maximum driving speed and obtainable torque.
•
To reach full engine performance and driving speed again, pour an adequate amount of
urea, in the specified quality, into the urea tank, see Page 291.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
228
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Terminal machine functions
13
Engine and driving data display range
13.6
Display camera images on the terminal (9)
1
2
EQG002-084
The picture of the rear-view camera can be displayed on the terminal.
„ Press
to display the camera image on the terminal.
Æ The terminal shows the camera image.
Select the camera (1)
Icon
Explanation
The image of the rear-view camera is selected.
The image of the rear-view camera is displayed.
The image of the auto-loading system camera is selected.
The image of the auto-loading system camera is displayed.
Display on the terminal (2)
Icon
Explanation
The mirroring of the camera image is selected.
The camera image is displayed as a mirror image
The display range for the camera image is increased.
The display range for the camera image is reduced.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
229
13
Terminal machine functions
13.7
Traction drive indicator lights
The camera image can be zoomed in on the terminal.
„ To increase the display range for the camera image, press
„ To reduce the display range for the camera image, press
.
.
EQG002-086
„ To hide the camera image, press
13.7
.
Traction drive indicator lights
The indicator lamps in the main display area for the traction drive provide information about the
current engine and drive settings.
2
4
3
1
5
6
P
EQG002-017
Display for acceleration behavior (1)
Indicates the current value for the acceleration behavior.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
230
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Icon
Terminal machine functions
13
Traction drive indicator lights
13.7
Explanation
Low acceleration
1
Medium acceleration
2
High acceleration
3
Maximum acceleration
4
Indicator lamp for direction of travel and parking brake (2)
Indicates the direction of travel and the status of the parking brake.
Icon
Explanation
Direction of travel forwards
Neutral mode (idle)
Direction of travel backwards
Parking brake is applied
Indicator lamp for PowerSplit (3)
Indicates the status of the Power Mode.
Icon
Explanation
Manual "Eco-Power mode"
The diesel engine works in energy saving mode.
Manual "M-Power mode"
The diesel engine works in maximum power mode.
Automatic switchover between "Eco-Power mode" and "M-Power
mode".
Indicator lamp for traction control system (TC) (4)
Displays the status of the traction control system (TC).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
231
13
Terminal machine functions
13.7
Traction drive indicator lights
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Traction control system
(TC) inactive
Traction control system
(TC) stage I active
Traction control system
(TC) stage I regulates actively
Traction control system
(TC) stage II active
The drive torque on the wheels is controlled.
Traction control system (TC) stage I allows
only low slip (spinning wheels).
Connected traction control system (TC)
stage I preserves the sward.
The drive torque on the wheels is controlled.
Traction control system (TC) stage II alTraction control system
lows high slip (spinning wheels).
(TC) stage II regulates actTraction control system (TC) stage II enively
sures that sufficient traction is provided
even under difficult conditions.
Display for cruise control (5)
Indicates the status of the cruise control and the stored speed when operating with the cruise
control.
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Cruise control is inactive
The stored speed when the cruise control
is operated is 12 km/h.
12.0 km/h
Cruise control active is active
12.0 km/h
Traction drive is at the
power limit
The traction drive is at the power limit. The
machine cannot be accelerated as long as
this icon is shown. The icon can also show
when the cruise control system is inactive.
Load limit control active
CONSTANT
POWER
CONSTANT
POWER
Load limit control is active
and the traction drive is at
the power limit
The traction drive is at the power limit. The
machine cannot be accelerated as long as
this icon is shown.
Indicator lamp for machine height (6)
Icon
Explanation
The machine height is in road position.
The machine height is in field position.
The machine height is either between road and field position,
below the road position or above the field position.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
232
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
14
Terminal – Menus
14
Menu structure
14.1
Terminal – Menus
WARNING
Risk of injury to persons and damage to machines if error messages are ignored
If error messages are ignored without the fault being rectified injuries may occur to persons
and/or severe damage to the machine.
„ Rectify fault if error message is shown.
„ If the fault cannot be rectified, contact KRONE service partner.
14.1
Menu structure
The menu structure is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration.
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Machine
Electronics
E-Solutions
Activated add-ons
History
Telemetry
Telemetry
In the menu the same data, which is displayed on the terminal in the machine, can
be displayed to a KRONE customer service
employee on the screen at his place of
work. The KRONE SmartConnect control
unit establishes the connection to the
KRONE customer service via the mobile
network and transmits the data.
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Settings
Ethernet
Control unit versions
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
233
14
Terminal – Menus
14.1
Menu structure
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Software
The current software versions of the control
units are indicated in the menu.
Hardware
The hardware versions of the control units
are indicated in the menu.
Information
ISOBUS
Settings
Tanks
Engine oil level
The engine oil level is displayed in the
menu, see Page 285.
Hydraulic oil tank
The menu shows the hydraulic oil level and
the refilling quantity.
INFO:
The hydraulic oil level and the refilling
quantity are only shown correctly when the
machine is in the transport position, see
Page 165.
Lighting, see Page 246
Working lights
Settings
In the menu the time period for activation of
the "Coming Home" and "Leaving Home"
functions and for lighting when refuelling
can be set.
For the description of the Coming Home
function, the Leaving Home function and
lighting for refuelling, see Page 93.
Diagnostics
see Page 243
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
234
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Menu
Sub-menu
Terminal – Menus
14
Menu structure
14.1
Explanation
Key test
The LEDs on the key module for wiper and
warning beacon can be tested in the menu,
see Page 245.
The camera system
Settings
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Cabin
Terminal
Settings
The current settings of the terminal for language, day/
night design, units of measurement, date and time are
displayed in the menu and can be changed.
Information
The software version of the terminal is displayed in the
menu.
Armrest
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Key test
A test of the keys of the keypad, of the Main Mode
Switch and of the navigation module can be performed
in the menu, see Page 245.
Control lever
Settings
The M1, M2, M3 and M4 memory keys on the control
lever can be assigned with functions in the menu.
Key test
In the menu a test of the keys of the control lever can be
performed, see Page 245.
Interior lighting
Settings
The intensity of the interior lighting of control elements
and control lever can be set in the menu.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
235
14
Terminal – Menus
14.1
Menu structure
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Printer
Settings
The printer type can be set in the menu.
Automatic climate control
Overview
Wiper
Settings
Mirror, see Page 247
Settings
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Central lubrication
Settings
The lubricant quantity for a lubrication cycle of the central lubrication unit can be adjusted in the menu.
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Maintenance
The menu displays the maintenance status of central
lubrication.
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Mowing functions
Front mounted mowers
Settings
Diagnostics
see Page 243
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
236
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Menu
Sub-menu
Terminal – Menus
14
Menu structure
14.1
Explanation
Calibration
The upper end position and the working position of the
front mounted mower is determined in the menu.
see Page 400
Coupling
Connecting the front mounted mower, see Page 134
Disconnecting the front mounted mower, see Page 138
Side mounted mowers
Settings
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Calibration
The upper end positions and the working positions of
the side mounted mowers are calibrated in the menu.
see Page 400
Mower side guard
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Swath hood
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Mower drive
Settings
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Side shift front mounted mower
Settings
In the menu the automatic side shift can be activated,
the position to be approached and the amount of side
shift per steering angle can be set.
For the "inclination sensor" version, you can choose
between curve mode and inclination mode.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
237
14
Terminal – Menus
14.1
Menu structure
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Manual operation
see Page 249
Cutting height
Overview
The cutting height can be adjusted to different ground
conditions. In the menu two cutting heights for the
mowers can be changed and saved, see Page 250.
Settings
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Calibration
see Page 396
Fine calibration
see Page 398
Mower load relief
Overview
The mower load relief adjusts the ground pressure of
the cutterbar to the local conditions. In order to protect
the sward the load on the cutterbar must be relieved so
that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave
any skid marks on the ground.
This menu displays the current mower relief and it is
possible to save 2 settings for the mower relief, see
Page 251.
Settings
The current and saved settings for mower relief are displayed in this menu and can be changed here.
Calibration
The mower relief of the mowers is calibrated in the
menu, see Page 393.
Headland
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
238
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Menu
Sub-menu
Terminal – Menus
14
Menu structure
14.1
Explanation
Settings
This menu displays the settings of headland management, of the side mounted mowers and the front mounted mower.
Mower profile
Settings
The overcut of the mowing track can be set in this
menu.
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Engine
Diesel engine
Settings
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Maintenance
• The "Diesel engine maintenance" menu displays the
remaining operating hours of the diesel engine until
the next maintenance date. The display counts down
the operating hours of the diesel engine until the next
maintenance date of the diesel engine.
• The diesel particulate filter regeneration can be
manually started and stopped in the menu.
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Hydraulics
Working hydraulics
Diagnostics
see Page 243
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
239
14
Terminal – Menus
14.1
Menu structure
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Drive functions
The components of the running gear can be set in the
menu.
Automatic steering system
Settings
The settings for automatic steering system parameters
are displayed in the menu and can be changed.
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Traction drive
Settings
For the "inclination sensor" version, the distribution of
traction mode (inactive or depending on the inclination)
can be selected in the menu.
INFO
The inclination-dependent distribution of traction is
available only in field mode.
„ Adjust your manner of driving accordingly.
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Calibration
In the menu the brake pedal is checked for plausibility,
see Page 394.
Inertial sensor (inclination sensor)
The horizontal position of the machine is determined
during calibration of the inertial sensor, see Page 399.
Axles
Settings
This menu displays the position of the axles when the
mower is activated and set.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
240
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Menu
Sub-menu
Terminal – Menus
14
Bringing up menu level
14.2
Explanation
Diagnostics
see Page 243
Calibration
The menu is used to calibrate the straight-ahead position of the rear axle and to determine the steering stop
positions, see Page 394.
Maintenance
The "Axle maintenance" menu is used to select which
piston can be actuated using the keys on the keypad.
Menu
Sub-menu
Explanation
Machine settings
In the menu the mower versions and settings for the
mowing track are displayed and can be changed.
User level
The currently registered user category is shown in the
menu.
INFO:
The setting can only be changed by the service technician.
14.2
Bringing up menu level
EQ002-052
Depending on how the machine is equipped, the main menu is divided into the following menus:
Icon
Designation
"Machine" menu
"Cabin" menu
"Central lubrication" menu
"Mowing functions" menu
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
241
14
Terminal – Menus
14.3
Navigating in menus
Icon
Designation
"Engine" menu
"Hydraulics" menu
"Drive Functions" menu
"Machine settings" menu
"User level" menu
INFO
Touching the coloured parts of the machine illustration in the display directly opens the
corresponding menus.
„ To bring up the menu level from the working screen, press
14.3
.
Navigating in menus
The functions of the terminal are divided into menus. Navigate through the menu structure by
using the keys in the individual menus.
„ To open the main menu from the working screen, press
.
„ To open a menu from the main menu, press the key of the corresponding menu.
„ To open sub-menus from a menu, press the key of the corresponding sub-menu.
„ To change from one sub-menu to another one, press the key of sub-menu in the footer.
„ To leave the current menu, press
.
„ To open the main menu from a menu, press
repeatedly until the main menu is
selected.
„ To go one step forwards again after a step back, press
.
„ To open the working screen from the main menu or a menu, press
.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
242
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
14.3.1
Terminal – Menus
14
“Diagnostics” menu explanation
14.4
Changing/saving parameter
„ To change a parameter, press the corresponding parameter key.
Æ A value input field or a selection box opens depending on the setting menu.
„ If a value input field opens, change the value of the parameter.
„ If a selection box opens, change the selection of the parameter.
„ To save the setting, press
.
„ To cancel the entry and keep the old setting, press
14.4
.
“Diagnostics” menu explanation
INFO
The purpose of this chapter is to explain in general terms how to handle the diagnostics
masks. The diagnostics masks which can be selected in the individual menus are no longer
listed in detail.
The sensors/actuators and the readable process values of the menu component are listed in the
"Diagnostics" menus.
The applied voltages/currents can be read off for these components/values.
EQG002-050
1 Icon for the component type/process
value
2 Number of the sensor/actuator
3 Designation of the sensor/actuator
4 Status of the sensor/actuator
5 Key for opening the sensor graphic display
6 Graphic display of the applied and permitted currents of the selected sensor/
actuator
„ To open the graphic display of a sensor or actuator, press
.
INFO
This screen is needed in case of a contact with customer service as the service technician
can conclude errors on the forage harvester from the values in this screen.
Component type/process value
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
243
14
Terminal – Menus
14.4
“Diagnostics” menu explanation
Icon
Explanation
Sensor
Actuator
Process value
Sensor/actuator status displays
Icon
Explanation
Sensor/actuator active
Sensor/actuator inactive
Sensor attenuated
Sensor unattenuated
OK
Not OK
Momentary switch pressed, switch closed
Momentary switch not pressed, switch not closed
Cable break
Short circuit
Cable break/short circuit
Other error
Status not available
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
244
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
14.5
Terminal – Menus
14
Menu "key test" explanation
14.5
Menu "key test" explanation
INFO
The purpose of this chapter is to explain in general terms how to handle the "key test" menus.
The key tests which can be selected in the individual menus are no longer listed in detail.
Key tests are available for the following control elements:
Control element
Explanation
KP1
Key test left half of the keypad
KP2
Key test right half of the keypad
MMS
Key test main mode switch
NM
Key test navigation module
Lighting
Lighting key test
Control lever
Key test control lever
INFO
To ensure that the "key test" menus are available in the terminal, the Main Mode Switch must
be in the neutral mode position and the ignition key in the II position. Only the key test of the
Main Mode Switch is available in the terminal without this measure.
ü The corresponding "key test" menu is open.
„ To select an operating element, which is to be tested, press the key for the corresponding
operating element
ð The operating element is displayed on the terminal.
„ Press the key, which is to be tested, and check the background colour of the key on the
terminal.
The colours of the keys on the terminal indicate whether there is an error between the operating
element and the control unit.
Icon
Explanation
Key not pressed.
Key pressed.
Error recognized.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
245
14
Terminal – Menus
14.6
"Lighting" menu
14.6
"Lighting" menu
"Working lights lighting" menu
EQ002-544 / EQ002-545
ü The "Machine" menu is open.
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The display shows the "Working light lighting" menu.
„ Press "Field".
„ Select the desired lighting profile and confirm.
„ Select the desired working lights for the selected profile.
Icon
Explanation
The side working lights are switched off.
/
The side working lights are switched on.
/
The rear working lights are switched off.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
246
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Icon
Terminal – Menus
14
"Mirror" menu
14.7
Explanation
The rear working lights are switched on.
The maintenance lighting is switched off.
The maintenance lighting is switched off
„ To switch on the respective working light, press
,
or
.
„ To switch off the respective working light, press
,
or
.
„ To switch on the maintenance lighting, press
.
„ To switch off the maintenance lighting, press
.
„ Switch the working lights on via the steering column switch, see Page 86.
Æ The working lights, which have been switched on in the respective lighting profile, are lit.
14.7
"Mirror" menu
"Mirror" settings menu
INFO
Battery voltage is dropping
If the "Active" setting is selected, the mirror heating is permanently switched on, even when
the diesel engine is switched off. As long as the circuit is not interrupted with the main battery
switch, the current is taken from the machine's battery. It is therefore possible that the battery
voltage of the machine drops too far.
EQ002-546
ü The "Cabin" menu has been selected
„ To open the menu, press
.
Æ The display shows the "Mirror settings" menu.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
247
14
Terminal – Menus
14.7
"Mirror" menu
Selection options in the selection window:
Inactive
The mirror heating is switched off.
Active
The mirror heating is permanently switched on. This also applies when the diesel engine is switched off.
Automatic
The mirror heating is switched on for 5 min when the machine
is started.
„ To switch the mirror heating on or off, select the desired setting.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
248
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
15
Settings
15
Setting in the terminal
15.1
Settings
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
15.1
Setting in the terminal
15.1.1
Manual settings
In the menu mowing functions "Manual operation" manual settings can be made to the mowers.
EQ002-224
ü The menu mowing functions "Manual operation" has been opened.
•
•
•
The left side mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (1).
The front mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (2).
The right side mounted mower is manually operated in the display range (3).
„ To increase the cutting height, press
„ To reduce the cutting height, press
„ To release the ratchet, press
.
.
.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
249
15
Settings
15.1
Setting in the terminal
„ To lock the ratchet, press
.
„ To release the pendulum stop, press
„ To lock the pendulum stop, press
15.1.2
.
.
Setting cutting height
Cutting height
conditions of usage
8–11 cm
High cut
Forage crop, dry or moist soil
4-6 cm
Forage crop, dry or normal
soil
approx. 3 cm
Low cut
Sward damage can occur
The cutting height can be adjusted to the different ground conditions. In the Mowing functions
menu "Cutting height overview" two cutting heights for each of the mowers can be changed and
saved. The cutting height is set via the angle.
Save cutting height 1 and cutting height 2
ü The menu Mowing functions "Cutting height overview" has been opened.
1
2
3
EQ002-087
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
250
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Settings
15
Setting in the terminal
15.1
The current cutting height for all mowers is shown in the display range (3).
„ To change the values for each mowing unit, press
. Then use
or
to
change the values for each mowing unit.
„ To change the values for all mowing units proportionally, press
. Then use
or
to change the values for all mowing units.
„ To change the values for cutting height 1, press
.
Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (1).
„ To change the values for cutting height 2, press
.
Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (2).
„ To activate the values in display ranges (1) or (2) press,
.
INFO
In order to obtain an optimum crop flow the cutterbar should always be inclined slightly
forwards. If, however, a higher cut is required:
„ For version with "High-cut skids": Mount high-cut skids, front mounted mower, see
Page 255, side mounted mowers, see Page 265.
15.1.3
Setting the mower relief
The mower load relief adjusts the ground pressure of the cutter bar to the local conditions. In
order to protect the sward the load on the cutter bar must be relieved so that it does not jump
when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.
INFO
A mower relief setting of at least 85% is recommended. Wear is reduced by setting a higher
relief.
The "Mower load relief, relief" menu displays the current mower load relief and it is possible to
store 2 settings for the mower load relief.
ü The "Mowing functions" menu has been opened.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
251
15
Settings
15.1
Setting in the terminal
Saving mower relief 1 and mower relief 2
EQ002-088
•
•
•
The first value of the mower relief is displayed and saved in display range (1).
The second value of the mower relief is displayed and saved in display range (2).
The current mower relief of all mowers is displayed and saved in display range (3).
„ To change the values for each mowing unit, press
. Then use
or
to
change the values for each mowing unit.
„ To change the values for all mowing units proportionally, press
. Then use
or
to change the values for all mowing units.
„ To save the values for mower relief 1, press
.
Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (1).
„ Press
to save the values for mower relief 2.
Æ The values are accepted then in the display range (2).
„ To save the values in the display ranges (1) or (2), press
.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
252
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Settings
15
Settings on front mounted mower
15.2
15.2
Settings on front mounted mower
15.2.1
Setting the side guards on the front mounted mower
BMG000-029
The protective equipment can be adapted to harvesting conditions by adjusting the guards. In
order to avoid that crop stalks bend because the guards are too low, set the guards higher. To
avoid that stones are slung away when the crops are low, set the guards lower.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Fold up the side guards (1), see Page 189.
„ Loosen the screws (4).
„ Use the console (3) to adjust the height of the side guard (1).
„ Tighten the screws (4).
Readjusting the front guard support
1
2
3
BMG000-035
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
253
15
Settings
15.2
Settings on front mounted mower
After the side guards have been adjusted, the two front guard supports must be readjusted. To
do this:
„ Loosen the screws (3) on both front guard supports (2).
„ Adjust the two front guard supports (2) with the oblong holes (1) so that the front guard is
supported.
„ Tighten the screws (3) on both front guard supports.
15.2.2
Set conditioner speed
BM000-199
Two conditioner speeds can be set on the belt drive of the front mounted mower. This affects
the conditioning effect and the power requirement.
Maximum rotational speed: 1000 rpm (inner belt pulleys (1): large belt pulley on top, small belt
pulley on bottom)
Minimum rotational speed: 700 rpm (outer belt pulleys (2): small belt pulley on top, large belt
pulley on bottom)
ü The front mounted mower is in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The conditioner drive guard has been disassembled, see Page 315.
„ To set the conditioner speed to 700 rpm, tension the kraftband (5) on the two outer pulleys
(2). To do this:
„ Release the tension on the belt drive on the front mounted mower, see Page 319.
„ Position the kraftband (5) on the two outer pulleys (2).
„ Tension the belt drive on the front mounted mower, see Page 319.
„ To set the conditioner speed of the front mounted mower to 1000 rpm, tension the kraftband
(5) on the two inner pulleys (1). To do this:
„ Release the tension on the belt drive on the front mounted mower, see Page 319.
„ Position the kraftband (5) on the two inner pulleys (2).
„ Tension the belt drive on the front mounted mower, see Page 319.
„ Mount the guard for the conditioner drive, see Page 315.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
254
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
15.2.3
Settings
15
Settings on front mounted mower
15.2
Setting the degree of conditioning
KMG000-066
The degree of conditioning can be changed by adjusting the conditioning sheet using the lever
(1).
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Adjust the lever (1).
Æ Turning clockwise in direction "+": The distance between the tines and the conditioning
sheet is reduced. The degree of conditioning is increased.
Æ Turning anti-clockwise in direction "-": The distance between the tines and the conditioning
sheet is increased. The degree of conditioning is reduced.
15.2.4
Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower with high-cut skids
For version with “high-cut skids”
KMG000-025
The cutting height can be increased by means of high cut skids. Mount high cut skids according
to figure under the cutting discs or under the mower drum.
ü The front mounted mower is raised, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The front mounted mower has been securely supported, see Page 33.
„ Insert the high-cut skid (2) into the sliding skid (1) and screw it in place.
15.2.5
Setting wide spreading
Removing the swath flap sets the crop down more widely.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
255
15
Settings
15.2
Settings on front mounted mower
BM000-218
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
Removing and mounting swath flaps right/left
Removing swath flaps
„ Pull the spring cotter pin (5) and remove the bolt (1).
„ Unscrew the ring screw (3).
„ Remove the swath flap (4) and store it with the mounting parts in a secure place for later
assembly.
Mounting swath flaps
„ Mount the swath flap (4) with the bolt (1), the spring cotter pin (5) and the ring screw (3) on
the hood (2).
15.2.6
Setting swath width
1
BMG000-032
ü The front mounted mower is in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Unscrew the ring screw (1) on the right-hand and left-hand side of the machine.
„ To set the swath width, move the ring screw (1) in the oblong hole. Set the swath width in a
way that ensures the tyres of the machine do not drive over the swath.
„ Tighten the ring screw (1) by hand.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
256
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
15.2.7
Settings
15
Settings on front mounted mower
15.2
Checking deflector sheets
BM000-219
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The swath flaps right/left are dismounted,see Page 256
„ In case of uneven swathing, check that the deflector sheets (1) are not deformed and align
them, if necessary.
15.2.8
Setting the lifting height at the front mounted mower
To change the lifting height, the top link (3) can be attached in two positions on the front mowing
unit.
BM000-141
The lower position (I) of the top link is the standard setting.
The upper position (II) of the top link increases the ground clearance of the raised front mowing
unit. This setting can be used for running over extremely heavy swaths.
Changing the position of the top link
ü The front mounted mower is placed on the ground and securely supported, see Page 33 or
with "Parking support" version: The machine is placed on the parking support, see
Page 192.
ü The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 33.
„ Remove the linch pin (1).
„ Remove the bolt (2).
„ To depressurise the top link (3), follow the instructions at the terminal for depressurisation in
the "Decouple front mounted mower" menu, see Page 138.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
257
15
Settings
15.3
Settings on the side mounted mowers
„ Position the top link and secure it with a bolt (2) and linch pin (1).
„ Set the parameter KMC-60 "Top link position" in the terminal in the mowing functions menu
"Cutting height settings".
„ Calibrate the mower load relief, see Page 393.
15.3
Settings on the side mounted mowers
15.3.1
Setting the side guards on the side mounted mowers
8
2
1
3
7
4
5
6
KMG000-078
The protective equipment can be adapted to harvesting conditions by adjusting the guards. In
order to avoid that crop stalks bend because the guards are too low, set the guards higher. To
avoid that stones are slung away when the crops are low, set the guards lower.
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
Setting the side guard (1)
„ Press down the ratchet using a screwdriver (8) and fold up the side guard (1).
„ Loosen the screws (4).
„ Set the height of the side guard (1) by means of the console (5).
„ Tighten the screws (4).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
258
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Settings
15
Settings on the side mounted mowers
15.3
Setting the side guard (2)
„ Fold up the front guard (3), see Page 191.
„ Loosen the screws (6).
„ Set the height of the side guard (2) by means of the console (7).
„ Tighten the screws (6).
„ Set both side guards equally.
Readjusting the front guard support
1
2
3
BMG000-035
After the side guards have been adjusted, the front guard support must be readjusted. To do
this:
„ Loosen the screws (3) on the front guard support (2).
„ Adjust the front guard support (2) with the oblong holes (1) so that the front guard is
supported.
„ Tighten the screws (3).
15.3.2
Checking/setting locking of side guards
1
3
2
KMG000-042
The locking (2) prevents during use that the side guard (1) is folded up and foreign bodies are
slung away. Therefore make sure every time before using the machine that the side guard (1) of
the machine is folded down and secured by the locking (2).
Check the lock
„ Bring the machine into working position, see Page 185.
ð If the side guard folds down, the side guard has been correctly adjusted.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
259
15
Settings
15.3
Settings on the side mounted mowers
ð If the side guard does not fold down, the locking must be adjusted.
„ Move the machine to the transport position.
ð If the side guard folds down, the side guard is correctly adjusted.
ð If the side guard does not fold down, the lock must be adjusted.
Adjusting the locking
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Loosen the screw connection (3).
„ Readjust the locking (2) in the oblong hole.
„ Tighten the screw connection (3).
„ Check the locking (2).
15.3.3
Setting the conditioner speed
KMG000-040
Two conditioner speeds can be set on the main gearbox. These influence the effect of the
conditioner and the power requirement.
Minimum rotational speed (
): 700 rpm
Maximum rotational speed (
): 1000 rpm
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
„ Unscrew the wing screw (1) from the actuating lever (2).
„ Turn the actuating lever (2) 180 degrees.
INFO: To turn the actuating lever more easily, turn the mower drum manually.
„ Secure the actuating lever (2) with the wing screw (1).
The arrow (3) points in the direction of travel and indicates the rotational speed that is set.
15.3.4
Setting the auger speed
With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
The auger speed can be set by replacing the pulleys and adjusting the conditioner speed at the
main gearbox, see Page 260.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
260
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Settings
15
Settings on the side mounted mowers
15.3
The following options are available for setting the auger speed:
NOTICE
Machine damage due to an excessively high auger speed
An excessively high auger speed can result in imbalance and thus damage the machine.
„ Never set the conditioner speed to 1000 rpm if the large pulley is mounted at the
conditioner and the small pulley is mounted at the auger conveyor.
Auger speed
Conditioner speed
main gearbox
Pulley at conditioner
Pulley at auger conveyor
low
700 rpm
small pulley
large pulley
high
700 rpm
large pulley
small pulley
high
1000 rpm
small pulley
large pulley
Replacing pulleys
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The guard of the auger drive has been removed, see Page 317.
For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 278.
BM000-275
„ To dismount the support (1), unscrew the two screws (2) and the discs.
„ To dismount the support (3), unscrew the two screws (4) and the discs.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
261
15
Settings
15.3
Settings on the side mounted mowers
Dismounting belt pulleys
2
1
3
4
BM000-273
„ Relieve the kraftband (1) of the auger drive, see Page 321.
„ Remove the kraftband (1).
„ NOTE! Damage to the sensor due to carelessness when working on the pulley! When
mounting and dismounting the pulleys, ensure that the sensor behind the pulley is
not damaged.
Carry out the following steps for both belt pulleys:
„ Unscrew the hexagon head screw (2), the detent edged washer (3) and the washer (4).
1
2
3
4
BM000-481
„ Unscrew the threaded pins (4).
„ Oil one of the threaded pins (4) and screw into the forcing borehole (3) until the Taperlock
clamping bushing is detached from the belt pulley and the belt pulley moves freely on the
shaft.
„ Remove the belt pulley (1) with the Taperlock clamping bushing (2) from the shaft.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
262
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Settings
15
Settings on the side mounted mowers
15.3
Mounting the belt pulleys
2
1
3
5
6
7
4
BM000-482
Pos.
Quantity
Designation
Material
surface
Strength
class
(A)
1
Hexagon head screw M10 x 25
Zn8
8.8
(B)
1
Detent edged washer SKM 10
Dacromet
(C)
1
Disc 14 x 58
ZN8 A
Carry out the following steps for both belt pulleys:
„ Clean and grease the borehole of the belt pulley (1).
„ Clean and grease all blank surfaces such as borehole and cone surface of the Taperlock
clamping bushing.
„ Clean and grease the shaft.
„ Insert the fit-in key (3) into the groove of the shaft.
„ Insert the Taperlock clamping bushing (2) into the borehole of the belt pulley (1).
„ Position the Taperlock clamping bushing (2) so that the half blind holes of the Taperlock
clamping bushing and the half threaded holes of the belt pulley are adjoined.
„ Oil both threaded pins (4) and mount loosely.
„ Push the belt pulley (1), depending on the required speed, onto the respective shaft.
„ Position the belt pulleys (1) so that the belt pulleys are aligned with each other.
„ Tighten the threaded pins (4) to a tightening torque of MA=48 Nm.
„ Check the alignment of both belt pulleys by placing a straight bar centrally on the left and
right belt pulley.
„ If the belt pulleys are not in alignment, loosen the threaded pins (4) again, adjust the
position of the belt pulleys and tighten the threaded pins (4) to a tightening torque of
MA=48 Nm.
„ Mount the hexagon head screw (5) (A) with the detent edged washer (6) (B) and the
washer (7) (C).
„ Position the kraftband on the belt pulleys.
„ Check whether the tension roll is positioned centrally on the kraftband.
ð The tension roll is not positioned centrally on the kraftband.
„ Use washers to compensate the position of the tension roll.
ð The tension roll is positioned centrally on the kraftband.
„ Tension the belt tension of the auger drive, see Page 321.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
263
15
Settings
15.3
Settings on the side mounted mowers
BM000-275
„ Mount the support (1) using the previously dismounted screws (2) and discs.
„ Mount the support (3) using the previously dismounted screws (4) and discs.
„ Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 317.
15.3.5
Adjusting the scraper sheet
For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
2
X
1
1
3
2
BM000-122
The scraper sheet (1) on the auger tray (right and left) is used to strip off the crop stalks in order
to prevent crop blockages in the area of the auger conveyor.
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The swath hoods are open, see Page 97.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
For an overview of the tightening torques, see Page 278.
To achieve optimum working results, a dimension of X= 0-2 mm between auger conveyor (2)
and scraper sheet (1) must be maintained.
„ Wear suitable protective gloves, see Page 24.
„ Loosen the screws (3).
„ Move the scraper sheet (1) in the oblong holes until the dimension between the scraper
sheet (1) and the auger conveyor (2) is X= 0‑2 mm.
„ Tighten the screws (3).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
264
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Settings
15
Settings on the side mounted mowers
15.3
WARNING! Risk of injury due to manual rotation of the auger conveyor. Even a slow
manual rotation of the auger conveyor can shear off limbs! Never rotate the auger
conveyor manually! Move the auger conveyor only with a slow manual rotation of the
mower drum. Ensure that limbs are away from the danger point as long as the auger
conveyor is rotating.
„ Manually rotate the mower drum to advance the auger conveyor (2) by one revolution.
„ Ensure that the dimension X= 0‑2 mm between the scraper sheet (1) and the auger
conveyor (2) is reached.
15.3.6
Setting the degree of conditioning
KMG000-066
The degree of conditioning can be changed by adjusting the conditioning sheet using the lever
(1).
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Adjust the lever (1).
Æ Turning clockwise in direction "+": The distance between the tines and the conditioning
sheet is reduced. The degree of conditioning is increased.
Æ Turning anti-clockwise in direction "-": The distance between the tines and the conditioning
sheet is increased. The degree of conditioning is reduced.
15.3.7
Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted mowers by means of
high-cut skids
For version with “high-cut skids”
INFO
By converting the side mounted mowers to other skids (high-cut skids, combi skids), the
machine is more than 3 m wide. Based on national regulations, machines, which are wider
than 3 m, require special approval in some countries to be driven on the roads. Such an
approval may have to be obtained.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
265
15
Settings
15.3
Settings on the side mounted mowers
KMG000-025
The cutting height can be increased by means of high cut skids. Mount high cut skids according
to figure under the cutting discs or under the mower drum.
ü The mowers are in the headland position, see Page 95.
ü The mowers are safely supported, see Page 33.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Insert the high-cut skid (2) into the sliding skid (1) and screw it in place.
15.3.8
Setting wide spreading
I
3
1
5
2
2
3
KMG000-100
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Loosen the ring screws (1) but do not unscrew them.
„ Swivel the swath flaps (2) all the way outwards (I).
„ Tighten the ring screws (1).
For version with "Deflector sheets"
Depending on the operating conditions, the deflector sheets (3) may have to be readjusted to
provide for equal distribution across the entire area.
„ Loosen the palm knobs (5).
„ Shift deflector sheets (3) to the desired position.
„ Tighten the palm knobs (5) manually.
„ Ensure that the palm knobs are tightened as tight as possible. Otherwise they may be lost
due to vibrations.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
266
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
15.3.9
Settings
15
Settings on the side mounted mowers
15.3
Setting wide spreading sheet
KM000-028
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Loosen the palm knobs (1) on right and left sides of machine.
„ Move the wide spreading sheet (2) to the desired position.
For swathing, set the wide spreading sheet all the way down.
For wide spreading, adjust the wide spreading sheet to the amount of forage.
„ Tighten the palm knobs (1) manually.
„ Ensure that the palm knobs are tightened as tight as possible. Otherwise they may be lost
due to vibrations.
15.3.10
Impact damage protection system
WARNING
Risk of accident due to changed driving behaviour
If the value for the spring on the impact damage protection system is changed, the trigger
moment of the impact damage protection system also changes. As a result, the impact
damage protection system may trigger in the transport position in case of abrupt loads and
the driving behaviour may change. This can lead to accidents.
„ Never change the value for the spring on the impact damage protection system.
The side mounted mowers are equipped with a so-called impact damage protection system in
order to prevent damage when driving into obstacles. After the impact damage protection
system has been triggered, the side mounted mower swivels back. Reversing the side mounted
mower causes the impact damage protection system to engage again.
The trigger moment has been set at the factory.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
267
15
Settings
15.3
Settings on the side mounted mowers
1
X
BM000-335
Setting dimension for the spring (1) on the impact damage protection system:
X = 88 mm
15.3.11
Dismounting the bottom flap
For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
To avoid blockages in the feed channel in stony soil, the ground flaps (1) can be removed.
BM000-226
Disassembly
ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Loosen the screw connections (2).
„ Open the ground flap (1) and detach it upwards.
Store the disassembled ground flaps in a safe place for subsequent assembly.
Assembly
ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Attach the ground flap (1).
„ Close the ground flap and tighten the screw connections (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
268
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
16
Maintenance - General Information
16
Observe the service record booklet
16.1
Maintenance - General Information
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
WARNING
Risk of injury during trial run of the machine
If a trial run is conducted after repairs, maintenance, cleaning work or technical adjustments,
the machine could respond unpredictably. As a result, people may be seriously injured or
killed.
ü The machine is in working position.
„ Make certain there are no persons in the danger zone when the engine and mower drive
start.
„ Start the trial run of the machine from the driver’s seat only.
NOTICE
Damage to the machine due to incorrectly performed or unfinished maintenance work
There is a risk of machine damage if maintenance work is not carried out by qualified
personnel. A qualified specialist workshop has the required technical knowledge, qualification
and tools to perform the required work on the machine properly. This applies in particular to
safety-relevant work.
„ Always have specially designated work performed by a qualified service centre.
„ This chapter does not list all the required maintenance work on the engine. It is necessary
to consult the engine manufacturer's maintenance booklet. The maintenance booklet is
available to any qualified workshop which has access to the Workshop Information
System (WIS) or after attending an engine training course at KRONE.
16.1
Observe the service record booklet
A service record booklet is enclosed with the machine. The service record booklet is absolutely
essential as proof of regular maintenance in the event of any material defect claims under
warranty and in particular as part of a warranty extension.
„ Have the completed maintenance work confirmed by the KRONE service partner in the
supplied service record booklet.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
269
16
Maintenance - General Information
16.2
Maintenance table
16.2
Maintenance table
16.2.1
Maintenance – Before the season
Hydraulic system
Check hydraulic tank oil level
see Page 362
Check hydraulic hoses
see Page 365
Drain oil from the trailing oil line of the cylinders for lifting the side mounted mowers.
see Page 365
Gearbox oil level check
Input gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 376
Main gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 377
Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right
see Page 378
Cutterbar
see Page 341
Transfer gearbox
see Page 374
Wheel hub gearbox front/rear
see Page 379
Engine
If engine openings were covered, remove the
covers
Change engine oil
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check coolant level
see Page 295
Check the coolant hoses for leaks
see Page 295
Clean/replace air filter
see Page 299
Check entire engine piping for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage
and repair if required.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Take measures to start up and start the engine following shutdown of the engine.
see Page 300
Mowing units
Change/replace blades
see Page 330
Check/replace cutting discs/mower drums
To be performed by an authorised technician
only, see manual for service technicians.
Check/replace retaining bolts
see Page 333
Check guard cloths
see Page 346
Tighten screws / nuts
see Page 278
Vent friction clutch
see Page 346
Air conditioning/heating
Change receiver-dryer unit
To be performed by an authorised technician
only
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
270
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - General Information
16
Maintenance table
16.2
Electrical system
Clean battery
see Page 368
Check the charge state of the batteries and re- see Page 369
charge, if required.
Check the electrical connection cables and, if
necessary, have them repaired or changed by
a KRONE service partner
Wheels / tyres
Visually inspect tyres for cuts and breaks
see Page 312
Check tyre pressure
see Page 312
Fire extinguisher
Maintain fire extinguisher
see Page 314
General maintenance work
Ensure that all bolts and cotter pins are mounted
Check all screws/nuts to make certain they
are tight and retighten them, if necessary
Tighten the screw connections on the central
support/chassis
see Page 313
Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart
see Page 354
Check the lighting
16.2.2
Maintenance – After the season
General maintenance work
Clean the machine
see Page 281
Park the machine in a weatherproof and dry
location which is not in close proximity to corrosive substances
Set the tyre pressure to the maximum permitted value
see Page 312
Protect the tyres against external influences
such as oil, grease or direct sunlight
Lubricate the machine according to the lubric- see Page 351
ation chart. Then leave the machine running
until a grease circle has formed on the outside
of the bearing positions. Do not wipe off this
grease as it offers additional protection
against moisture.
Grease the threads of the setting screws
Release the springs
Lubricate the bolts on the locks on the left/
right side mounted mowers.
see Page 166.
Grease the uncoated piston rods of all hydraulic cylinders and insert as far as possible
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
271
16
Maintenance - General Information
16.2
Maintenance table
General maintenance work
Lightly coat with oil all those lever joints and
bearing positions which cannot be lubricated
Touch up damaged paint and preserve uncoated areas with rust protection agent
Check that all moveable components move
freely. If required, dismount, clean, grease and
remount.
Lubricating universal shafts
see Page 351
Take measures to shutdown the diesel engine.
see Page 300
Rear axle for front wheel drive
Check hub bearings for wear and play
16.2.3
To be performed by an authorised technician
only, see manual for service technicians.
Maintenance - once after 1 hour
Wheels / tyres
Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels
16.2.4
see Page 312
Maintenance – Once after 10 hours
Belt tension
Readjust belt tension
16.2.5
see Page 318
Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours
Tyres
Tighten the wheel nuts on front wheels/rear
wheels
16.2.6
see Page 312
Maintenance - Once after 50 hours
Oil change in gearbox
Input gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 376
Main gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 377
Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right
see Page 378
Wheel hub gearbox front/rear
see Page 379
Transfer gearbox
see Page 374
Engine
Check that the tightening torque of the catalytic converter profile clamps is correct.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
General maintenance work
Re-adjust the transport lock
see Page 313
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
272
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
16.2.7
Maintenance - General Information
16
Maintenance table
16.2
Maintenance – Once after 500 hours
Engine
Check the intake and exhaust gas system for
condition, attachment and leaks.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Electrical system
Check the batteries and cable connections.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check the state of the sensors, actuators,
cable holders and plugs.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Oil change in gearbox
Wheel hub gearbox front/rear
16.2.8
see Page 379
Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km
Rear axle for front wheel drive
Check hub bearings for wear and play
16.2.9
To be performed by an authorised technician
only, see manual for service technicians.
Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season
Cooling system (engine)
Check corrosion and frost protection concentration in the coolant
16.2.10
see Page 294
Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a day
Engine
Clean engine compartment
see Page 284
Visual inspection of the entire engine piping
for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage.
see Page 296
Check engine oil level
see Page 284
Check coolant level
see Page 295
Check the water separator on the fuel prefilter see Page 288
and drain water if required.
Check urea fill level
see Page 227, see Page 291
Check fuel level
see Page 227, see Page 289
Gearbox oil level check
Input gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 376
Main gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 377
Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right
see Page 378
Cutterbar
see Page 341
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
273
16
Maintenance - General Information
16.2
Maintenance table
Mowing units
Change/replace blades
see Page 330
Check/replace cutting discs/mower drums
To be performed by an authorised technician
only, see manual for service technicians.
Check/replace retaining bolts
see Page 333
Check guard cloths
see Page 346
Tighten screws / nuts
see Page 278
Cabin
Clean fresh air filter
see Page 306
Top up windshield washer system
see Page 302
Check indicator lamps
see Page 169
Check lighting function
see Page 245
Air conditioning/heating
Clean capacitor
see Page 307
Central lubrication
Check filling level of reservoir
see Page 359
General maintenance work
Clean the entire machine
see Page 281
Check the fire extinguishers
see Page 314
Tyres
Visually check tyres for cuts and breaks
see Page 312
Rear axle for front wheel drive
Check hub covers for damage and that they
are secure
16.2.11
see Page 309
Maintenance - Every 50 hours
Wheels / tyres
Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels
see Page 312
Check tyre pressure
see Page 312
Engine
16.2.12
Drain water and sediments in the fuel tank.
see Page 287
Cleaning air filter
see Page 299
Clean dust discharge valve of air filter
see Page 300
Maintenance - every 100 hours
Cabin
Clean circulation filter
see Page 307
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
274
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - General Information
16
Maintenance table
16.2
Air conditioning/heating
Check refrigerant condition and filling quantity
(dryer)
see Page 305
General maintenance work
Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart
see Page 351
Universal shafts
Lubricate universal shafts
16.2.13
see Page 351
Maintenance - every 250 hours
Oil change in gearbox
Input gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 376
Main gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 377
Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right
see Page 378
Drive belt
Check/adjust drive belt conditioner drive front
mounted mower
see Page 310, see Page 318
For version with "Swath merging system
with hydraulic hood" Checking/setting drive
belt auger drive
see Page 310, see Page 320
Check drive belt front mower
see Page 310
Check drive belt side mounted mowers right/
left
see Page 310
Check/adjust cooler sieve belt
see Page 310, see Page 311
Check/adjust drive belt fan drive and exhaust
see Page 310, see Page 311
Retighten screws
Check screws of the steering cylinder
see Page 308
Check screws of the axial track rods.
Air conditioning/heating
Check collector
see Page 305
Fire extinguisher
Maintain fire extinguisher
see Page 314
Universal shafts
Lubricate universal shafts
16.2.14
see Page 351
Maintenance - Every 500 hours
Hydraulic system
Change hydraulic oil in the hydraulic oil tank
see Page 362
Change return suction filter
see Page 364
Change high-pressure filter working hydraulics see Page 365
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
275
16
Maintenance - General Information
16.2
Maintenance table
Engine
Check engine oil level
see Page 284
Check belt drive and change it if required
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check entire engine piping for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage
and repair if required.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Drain condensation water from the water separator of the fuel prefilter.
see Page 288
Change fuel prefilter with water separator.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check that the tightening torque of the catalytic converter profile clamps is correct.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check coolant level
see Page 295
Clean dust discharge valve of air filter
see Page 300
Electrical system
Check the state of the control unit bearing.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Drive belt
Check the belt tension of all drive belts.
see Page 310, see Page 317
Cabin
Replace the fresh air filter.
see Page 306
Replace circulation filter.
see Page 307
Check the functions of the driver's seat.
see Page 121
General maintenance work
Check the fire extinguishers
see Page 314
Electrical system
Clean battery
see Page 368
Rear axle for front wheel drive
Check hub bearings for wear and play
16.2.15
To be performed by an authorised technician
only, see manual for service technicians.
Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the end of the season
Oil change in gearbox
Input gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 376
Main gearbox on front mounted mower
see Page 377
Main gearbox side mounted mower left/right
see Page 378
Transfer gearbox
see Page 374
Cutterbar
see Page 341
Wheel hub gearbox front/rear
see Page 379
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
276
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - General Information
16
Maintenance table
16.2
Changing the filter
transfer gearbox
see Page 375
Intermediate gear
Lubricate the intermediate gear
see Page 353
Engine
Check all lines, hoses and electric cables for
chafe marks
Check belt drive and change it if required
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check that engine mount and diesel engine
brackets are tight.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check entire engine piping for condition, attachment, leak tightness, soiling and damage
and repair if required.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Replace the fuel fine filter.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Replace the fuel prefilter.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Cleaning air filter
see Page 299
Electrical system
16.2.16
Check the batteries and cable connections.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check the state of the sensors, actuators,
cable holders and plugs.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least before the season
Engine
16.2.17
Change engine oil
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Change the engine oil filter
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check/adjust valve play
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours
Engine
Replace the oil separator filter element
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Check corrosion and frost protection concentration in the coolant.
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
277
16
Maintenance - General Information
16.3
Tightening torques
16.2.18
Maintenance – Every 2 years
Engine
Change coolant
16.2.19
To be performed by an authorised technician
only, see manual for service technicians.
Maintenance – Every 4500 hours
Exhaust aftertreatment system
Change diesel particulate filter
16.2.20
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Maintenance - as required
Electrical system
Clean battery
see Page 368
Engine
16.3
Change air filter main element (according to
maintenance display / annually).
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Change air filter safety element (with every
3rd change of the main element / annually).
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Vent the fuel system (do not detach the injection lines)
To be performed by an authorised technician
only.
Tightening torques
Deviating tightening torques
All screw connections must in general be tightened with the listed tightening torques following.
Deviations from the tables are marked accordingly.
Metric thread screws with control thread
INFO
The table does not apply to countersunk screws with hexagon socket in case the countersunk
screw is tightened via hexagon socket.
DV000-001
X
Thread size
1
Strength class on screw head
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
278
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
X
Maintenance - General Information
16
Tightening torques
16.3
Strength class
5.6
8.8
Tightening torque (Nm)
10.9
12.9
M4
3.0
4.4
5.1
M5
5.9
8.7
10
M6
10
15
18
M8
25
36
43
M10
29
49
72
84
M12
42
85
125
145
M14
135
200
235
M16
210
310
365
M20
425
610
710
M22
571
832
972
M24
730
1,050
1,220
M27
1,100
1,550
1,800
M30
1,450
2,100
2,450
Metric thread screws with fine thread
DV000-001
X
Thread size
X
1
Strength class
5.6
8.8
Tightening torque (Nm)
Strength class on screw head
10.9
12.9
M12 x 1.5
88
130
152
M14 x 1.5
145
213
249
M16 x 1.5
222
327
382
M18 x 1.5
368
525
614
M20 x 1.5
465
662
775
M24 x 2
787
1,121
1,312
M27 x 2
1,148
1,635
1,914
M30 x 1.5
800
2,100
2,650
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
279
16
Maintenance - General Information
16.3
Tightening torques
Metric thread screws with countersunk head and hexagon socket
INFO
The table applies only to countersunk screws with hexagon socket and metric thread
tightened via hexagon socket.
DV000-000
X
Thread size
X
1
Strength class
5.6
8.8
Tightening torque (Nm)
Strength class on screw head
10.9
12.9
M4
2.5
3.5
4.1
M5
4.7
7
8
M6
8
12
15
M8
20
29
35
M10
23
39
58
67
M12
34
68
100
116
M14
108
160
188
M16
168
248
292
M20
340
488
568
Locking screws on the gearboxes
INFO
The tightening torques only apply to assembly of locking screws, viewing glasses, ventilation
and breather filters and bleed valves in gearboxes with cast housings or aluminium or steel
housings. The term “locking screw” includes the drain plug, the inspection screw as well as
the ventilation and breather filters.
This table applies only to locking screws with external hexagon in connection with copper seal
ring and for bleed valves made of brass with shaped seal ring.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
280
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Thread
Maintenance - General Information
16
Cleaning the machine
16.4
Locking screw and sight glass with
copper ring1
Bleed valve made of brass
Ventilation/breather filter made of
Ventilation/breather filter made of
brass
steel
Steel and cast
Aluminium
Steel and cast
Aluminium
Maximum tightening torque (Nm) (±10%)
M10x1
8
M12x1.5
14
G1/4“
14
M14x1.5
16
M16x1.5
45
40
24
24
M18x1.5
50
45
30
30
M20x1.5
32
G1/2“
32
M22x1.5
35
M24x1.5
60
G3/4“
60
M33x2
80
G1“
80
M42x1.5
100
G1 1/4“
100
1
16.4
Always replace copper rings.
Cleaning the machine
WARNING
Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!
When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt
particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.
„ Keep persons away from working range.
„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear
suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).
NOTICE
Machine damaged by water from a high-pressure cleaner
Bearings and electric or electronic components can be damaged if you aim the water jet of a
high-pressure cleaner directly at them during cleaning.
„ Do not direct the water jet of a high-pressure cleaner at bearings, electrical/electronic
components and safety signs.
„ Replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety signs.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ After each use, remove husk and dust from the machine.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
281
16
Maintenance - General Information
16.4
Cleaning the machine
Under very dry working conditions, repeat the cleaning several times a day.
„ For cleaning the engine compartment, see Page 284.
„ For cleaning the batteries, see Page 368.
„ For cleaning the cooler and the cooler compartment; see Page 307.
Cleaning the belt drive of the auger conveyor
For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
Depending on the operating conditions, the belt drives of the augers must be cleaned at regular
intervals to remove dirt and crop deposits.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Remove the guard of the auger drive, see Page 317.
„ Remove dirt and crop deposits.
„ Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 317.
Cleaning the auger conveyor
For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
1
1
2
BMG000-070
Contamination on the auger conveyor (1) can impair swathing, and must be removed. Use the
following procedure to clean the auger conveyor (1):
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Wear suitable protective gloves, see Page 24.
WARNING! Risk of injury due to manual rotation of the auger conveyor. Even a slow
manual rotation of the auger conveyor can shear off limbs! Never rotate the auger
conveyor manually! Move the auger conveyor only with a slow manual rotation of the
mower drum. Ensure that limbs are away from the danger point as long as the auger
conveyor is rotating.
„ Manually rotate the mower drum (2) slowly to advance the auger conveyor (1).
„ Clean the auger conveyor (1).
„ After the machine has been cleaned with water, lubricate all manually lubricated lubrication
points, see Page 354.
„ After the machine has been cleaned with water, carry out a manual intermediate lubrication
with the central lubrication unit, see Page 359.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
282
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
17
Maintenance - Engine
17
Engine overview
17.1
Maintenance - Engine
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
WARNING
Danger to health from dust from the damaged catalytic converter of the exhaust
aftertreatment system
If the catalytic converter of the exhaust aftertreatment system is damaged, there is a risk to
health from inhaling the emerging dust or insulation material.
„ If the catalytic converter of the exhaust aftertreatment system is damaged, ensure that
nobody inhales dusts from inside the catalytic converter or insulation.
NOTICE
Damage to the machine due to incorrectly performed or unfinished maintenance work
There is a risk of machine damage if maintenance work is not carried out by qualified
personnel. A qualified specialist workshop has the required technical knowledge, qualification
and tools to perform the required work on the machine properly. This applies in particular to
safety-relevant work.
„ Always have specially designated work performed by a qualified service centre.
„ This chapter does not list all the required maintenance work on the engine. It is necessary
to consult the engine manufacturer's maintenance booklet. The maintenance booklet is
available to any qualified workshop which has access to the Workshop Information
System (WIS) or after attending an engine training course at KRONE.
17.1
Engine overview
2
5
1
6
3
4
7
8
10
9
BMG000-050
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
283
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.2
Dirt deposits in engine compartment
1
2
3
4
5
17.2
Oil filter
Diesel Oxidation Catalyst
Exhaust gas turbocharger
Oil sump
SCR catalytic converter with filter element
6
7
8
9
10
Engine control
Refrigerant compressor
Alternator
Oil filler neck
Oil dipstick
Dirt deposits in engine compartment
WARNING
Risk of fire due to dirt deposits in the engine compartment
A mixture of dust, oil and plant residue inside the engine compartment is a source of fire and
presents an increased fire hazard.
„ Always keep the engine compartment clean.
17.2.1
Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air
WARNING
Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!
When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt
particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.
„ Keep persons away from working range.
„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear
suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).
„ If necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.
17.3
Engine oil level
NOTICE
Engine damage due to excessively low or high oil level
If the oil level is too low, the amount of oil in the engine is too low, the lubrication points in the
engine are not adequately supplied and there is a risk of engine damage. If the oil level is too
high, the engine or the exhaust gas aftertreatment system may be damaged.
„ Check oil level according to the engine maintenance table, see Page 270.
„ Check oil level only when machine is in a horizontal position.
„ Do not start the engine if the oil level is below the bottom mark (min. mark) of the oil
dipstick.
„ Drain or extract oil which has been topped up too much.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
284
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
17.3.1
Maintenance - Engine
17
Engine oil level
17.3
Checking engine oil level
Checking engine oil level with oil dipstick
1
max.
min.
BXG000-029
The oil dipstick is on the left-hand side of the machine.
ü
ü
ü
ü
The left side mounted mower is folded out., see Page 95.
The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The main frame of the machine is aligned horizontally.
The diesel engine is at a standstill for at least 8 hours.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Thoroughly clean the area around the oil dipstick (1).
„ Pull out the oil dipstick (1), wipe it off with a clean cloth and reinsert it up to the stop.
„ Pull out the oil dipstick (1) and identify the engine oil level.
ð When the engine oil level is between "min" and "max", the oil level is correct.
„ Reinsert the oil dipstick (1).
ð If the engine oil level is above the "max" marking:
„ Contact your KRONE service partner.
ð If the engine oil level is below the "min" marking:
„ Top up the engine oil, see Page 286.
Checking engine oil level on the terminal
The engine oil level can also be checked on the terminal as an alternative to using the dipstick.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
285
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.3
Engine oil level
BM000-505
ü
ü
ü
ü
The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The ignition key is in position "II".
The diesel engine is at a standstill for at least 8 hours.
„ Open the menu Machine "Engine oil level tanks".
„ Read off the engine oil level using the bars.
ð If a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 9 green bars are visible, the engine oil level is
correct.
ð If only green bars are visible:
„ Using the oil dipstick, ensure that the engine oil level is not above the "max" mark, see
Page 285. Otherwise consult your KRONE service partner.
ð When 1 red bar or up to 3 orange bars are visible:
„ Top up the engine oil, see Page 286.
17.3.2
Topping up engine oil
1
max.
min.
BMG000-052
The oil filling pipe is on the left-hand side of the machine.
ü The left side mounted mower is folded out., see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The main frame of the machine is aligned horizontally.
ü The diesel engine has cooled off to the ambient temperature.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
286
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Engine
17
Cleaning fuel tank
17.4
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Clean the area around the cover (1).
„ Unscrew the cover (1).
„ NOTE! Use only engine oils that have been approved by the engine manufacturer, see
Page 77.
„ Fill in engine oil through the oil filler neck up to the "max." mark on the oil dipstick.
„ Clean, put on and tighten the cover (1).
„ Start the diesel engine, run it at idle speed and check the oil pressure.
„ Switch off the diesel engine.
„ Check the engine oil level after approx. 2-3 minutes, see Page 285.
17.4
Cleaning fuel tank
Draining water and sediments
BMG000-027
ü If possible, empty the fuel tank as far as possible when driving.
ü The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 33.
„ Provide a sufficiently dimensioned container for the fuel.
The drain nozzle sits at the front right below the machine in the direction of travel.
„ Unscrew the cap on the drain nozzle (1).
„ Take the hose provided out of the rear storage compartment and screw it on the drain
nozzle (1).
ð Accumulated water, sediment and fuel flow out of the fuel tank.
„ Remove the hose and close the drain nozzle (1) with the cap.
„ Refuel the machine, see Page 289.
„ If necessary, bleed the fuel system, see Page 293.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
287
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.5
Fuel prefilter/water separator
17.5
Fuel prefilter/water separator
1
4
2
3
BXG000-030
The fuel prefilter is located on the left side of the machine behind the maintenance flap.
Drain condensation water from the water separator of the fuel prefilter
ü
ü
ü
ü
The left side mounted mower is folded out.
The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The maintenance flap is open.
A sufficiently large collecting vessel is on hand.
„ Check whether condensation water has collected in the sight glass of the water
separator (2).
ð No condensation water has collected:
„ No further measures are necessary.
ð Condensation water has collected:
„ Place the collecting vessel under the drain hose of the water separator (2).
„ Loosen the bleed screw (1) two counterclockwise turns.
„ To open the stop cock (4), press the handle (3) while simultaneously turning it 90°
counterclockwise.
Æ The collected condensation water runs out of the water separator.
„ To close the stop cock (4), turn the handle (3) 90° clockwise. The handle (3) engages
independently.
„ Tighten the bleed screw (1) to a tightening torque of 6 Nm.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
288
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
17.6
Maintenance - Engine
17
Refuelling
17.6
Refuelling
NOTICE
Machine damage due to use of unauthorised or contaminated fuel.
If refuelling with unauthorised or contaminated fuel or with fuel which has a high sulphur
content, the engine and the exhaust gas after-treatment system will be damaged.
„ Refuel only with standard, sulphur-free diesel fuel, according to EN 590.
„ Do not refuel with contaminated fuel.
„ Observe the operating instructions of engine manufacturer, chapter “Refuelling”.
„ Do not use the following fuels:
- Fuels containing more than 0.005% (50ppm) sulphur
- Marine diesel fuel
- Aviation turbine fuel
- Heating oil
- Fatty acid methyl ester FAME (bio-diesel fuels)
NOTICE
Machine damage by water in the fuel
If the machine is parked with tank unfilled, condensation water may form and when it is cold,
freezing could result.
„ Refuel daily at the end of operation.
2
1
3
1
4
BMG000-009
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
289
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.7
Urea filter
Filling quantity: see Page 77.
„ Follow the instructions in the following enclosed document: Engine operating instructions,
chapter Lubricants and consumables.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ If necessary, use the platform (4) on the front mounted mower to reach the filler neck (3).
„ Open the flap (1).
„ Clean the area around the filler neck (3).
„ Unscrew the tank cap (2).
„ Fill the fuel tank with fuel.
„ Close the tank cap (2) tightly.
„ Close the flap (1).
17.7
Urea filter
CAUTION
Risk of injury from escaping ammonia vapours!
If the urea tank cap is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may escape. Ammonia
vapours have a pungent smell and irritate in particular:
- Skin
- Mucous membranes
- Eyes.
This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and
tearing eyes.
„ Do not inhale ammonia vapours.
CAUTION
Risk of injury from contact with urea solution
The urea solution must not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
„ If urea solution comes into contact with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse off with plenty
of clear water.
„ If urea solution is swallowed, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water
and drink a lot of water.
„ If urea solution soils clothing, immediately change clothing.
„ If allergic reactions occur, consult a doctor immediately.
„ Keep children away from the urea solution.
The exhaust aftertreatment system is equipped with a maintenance-free filter.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
290
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Engine
17
Topping up urea solution
17.8
BM000-201
The urea filter (1) is integrated in a fixed position in the extraction module (2).
17.8
Topping up urea solution
CAUTION
Risk of injury from contact with urea solution
The urea solution must not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
„ If urea solution comes into contact with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse off with plenty
of clear water.
„ If urea solution is swallowed, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water
and drink a lot of water.
„ If urea solution soils clothing, immediately change clothing.
„ If allergic reactions occur, consult a doctor immediately.
„ Keep children away from the urea solution.
CAUTION
Risk of injury from escaping ammonia vapours!
If the urea tank cap is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may escape. Ammonia
vapours have a pungent smell and irritate in particular:
- Skin
- Mucous membranes
- Eyes.
This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and
tearing eyes.
„ Do not inhale ammonia vapours.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
291
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.8
Topping up urea solution
NOTICE
Damage to the machine due to incorrect handling of the urea solution
The machine or the exhaust aftertreatment system may be damaged due to incorrect handling
of the urea solution.
„ Use only urea solution according to DIN 70070 / ISO 22241.
„ To prevent damage to the urea tank at very low temperatures, do not overfill the urea
tank.
„ To avoid damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system due to contamination, use only
clean auxiliaries for filling and close the tank tightly.
„ To avoid damage to the exhaust aftertreatment system, do not mix the urea solution with
additives or dilute with tap water.
NOTICE
Damage to the urea sensor caused by ammonia fumes
If the urea tank is not mostly filled and if urea is stored at too high a temperature, ammonia
fumes are produced which can damage the urea sensor.
„ Fill the urea tank completely with urea after each utilization of the machine.
„ Observe the instructions of the urea manufacturer to store urea. These specifications also
apply to the urea in the urea tank.
1
2
3
1
4
BMG000-008
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
292
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Engine
17
Venting the fuel prefilter/water separator
17.9
Filling quantity: see Page 77
„ Follow the instructions in the following enclosed document: Engine operating instructions,
chapter Lubricants and consumables.
„ If necessary, use the platform (4) on the front mounted mower to reach the filler neck (3).
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Open the flap (1).
„ Clean the area around the filler neck (3).
„ Unscrew the tank cap (2).
„ Fill the urea tank with urea solution until the pump nozzle is switched off.
„ Close the tank cap (2) tightly.
„ Close the flap (1).
17.9
Venting the fuel prefilter/water separator
BXG000-031
It may be necessary to vent the fuel filter
•
•
•
•
after the filter element on the fuel prefilter was changed
after prolonged machine standstill
after filling the previously drained fuel system
after initial operation
The vent the fuel filter:
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Follow the instructions in the following, supplied document: Engine operating instructions,
section "Venting the fuel system".
„ Turn the red locking (2) of the pump 90° counterclockwise.
„ Activate the pump by making pumping movements with the knob (1) until the fuel system is
completely vented.
„ To end the venting process and start the diesel engine, turn the lock (2) of the pump 90°
clockwise.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
293
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.10 Engine coolant
INFO
The low-pressure circuit of the diesel engine is vented by permanently installed throttle bores,
no additional measures are necessary.
„ Start the diesel engine.
ð If the engine fails to start after 20 seconds.
„ Take a 1-minute break.
ð If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts:
„ Repeat the venting procedure.
17.10
Engine coolant
NOTICE
Damage to the cooling system by using incorrect coolant
If a mixture of coolant containing silicate and a silicate-free coolant is used, this may cause
damage to the cooling system of the diesel engine.
„ Never use a mixture of coolant containing silicate and a silicate-free coolant as an engine
coolant.
The engine cooling system has been filled with coolant at the factory that ensures frost
protection, corrosion protection and further protective effects.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water, anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.
The engine coolant has the following properties:
•
•
•
•
•
Heat transfer
Corrosion protection
Cavitation protection (protection against pitting)
Frost protection
Increasing the boiling point
Irrespective of the time of year, the engine coolant must remain in the engine cooling system,
even in countries with high outdoor temperatures.
When you change the engine coolant, ensure that
•
only clean auxiliaries are used for filling.
•
the coolant meets at least the following specification: LH-01-COL3A.
The engine manufacturer recommends the use of Liebherr-Antifreeze OS Concentrate
(concentrate) or Liebherr-Antifreeze OS Mix (ready-made mixture consisting of 50 % water
and 50 % anticorrosion agent).
the water used complies with the 2006 World Health Organization (WHO) Drinking Water
Guideline.
•
•
•
•
•
the engine coolant contains 50% by volume anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.
This corresponds to a frost protection down to -37° C.
the percentage of anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent in the engine coolant does
not exceed 55% by volume. This corresponds to a frost protection down to -45° C. Higher
values would deteriorate frost protection and heat transfer.
the engine coolant is not mixed with a different anti-corrosion agent and frost protection
agent.
a low coolant level is not topped up only with water, but also with the correct percentage of
an approved anti-corrosion agent and frost protection agent.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
294
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Engine
17
Checking the engine coolant level 17.11
17.11
Checking the engine coolant level
WARNING
Risk of fire from frost protection agent
If frost protection agent comes into contact with hot components in the warm engine
compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
„ Leave the engine to cool down before filling with anti-freeze.
„ Keep anti-freeze away from the filler neck.
„ Before starting the engine, thoroughly clean components contaminated with frost
protection agent.
WARNING
Danger of injury due to scalding
The engine cooling system is under pressure, especially when the engine is warm. If the
cover is opened when the engine is warm, hot coolant may spray out. There is risk of injury.
„ Leave the engine to cool down before opening the cover.
„ When opening the cover, wear suitable gloves and goggles.
„ To relieve the pressure, open the cover by a half turn.
BXG000-032
The coolant compensation tank (1) for the engine coolant is located above the cooling system in
the rear of the machine and is accessible from outside.
„ Check the coolant level in the coolant compensation tank (1) at the sight glass (2).
ð The coolant level must be in the middle of the sight glass (2); top up coolant if
necessary.
Top up the engine coolant
Filling quantity: see Page 77
Follow the instructions in the following supplied document: operating instructions Engine,
chapter Consumables "Coolant".
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
295
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.12 Checking engine piping
„Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Rotate the cover (3) on the filler neck of the coolant compensation tank (1) to the first notch,
and allow the residual pressure to decay slowly.
„ Open the cover (3) completely and remove it.
„ Fill coolant up to the middle of the sight glass (2).
„ Put on and close the cover (3) at the filler neck of the coolant compensation tank.
17.12
Checking engine piping
17.12.1
Checking pipework in the air conditioning and heating system
BM000-168
„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them
replaced by authorised technicians.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
296
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Engine
17
Checking engine piping 17.12
17.12.2
Check pipework of the engine cooling system and the charge air
BMG000-048
„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them
replaced by authorised technicians.
17.12.3
Checking pipework of the air intake
BM000-164
„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them
replaced by authorised technicians.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
297
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.12 Checking engine piping
17.12.4
Checking fuel lines
BM000-165
„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them
replaced by authorised technicians.
17.12.5
Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment system
BM000-356
„ Check all lines, hoses and collars for leaks and condition and, if required, have them
replaced by authorised technicians.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
298
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Engine
17
Cleaning air filter 17.13
17.13
Cleaning air filter
NOTICE
Engine damage caused by dirty or damaged air filter or safety cartridge
If the machine is operated with a soiled or damaged air filter or safety cartridge, the diesel
engine may be damaged.
„ Clean or replace the air filter and the safety cartridge according to the maintenance table,
see Page 270.
„ Immediately replace a damaged air filter or a damaged safety cartridge.
„ Do not clean and reuse the safety cartridge but always replace it by a new one.
1
5
2
3
4
BMG000-010
Interval for testing and changing: see Page 270.
„ „Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Release the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1).
„ By gently turning the filter element (3), carefully pull it out of the filter housing (4).
„ Clean the interior area and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing (4).
„ Blow out the filter element (3) with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the
outside.
If the filter element is excessively soiled or damaged, replace the filter element. If the installation
date of the filter element is 4 years old, replace the filter element.
„ Install the cleaned or a new filter element (3).
„ Attach the lid (1) so that the dust discharge valve (5) is pointed downwards.
„ Secure the cover (1) with the clamps (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
299
17
Maintenance - Engine
17.14 Shutting down the diesel engine
Cleaning dust discharge valve
BM000-170
ü The left side mounted mower is folded down.
ü The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 33.
ü The left side hood is open.
„ Remove the rubber grommet of the dust discharge valve (1) and clean it.
„ Clean the connector for the rubber grommet.
„ Slide on the rubber grommet completely.
17.14
Shutting down the diesel engine
Measures for storing the diesel engine when not in use for a period from 30 days
to 12 months
„ Fill the fuel tank, and coolant tank up to the maximum permitted filling level. Choose the
specification of consumables according to the expected outside temperatures while the
machine is in storage.
„ Drain the fuel tank and prefilter.
„ The coolant must contain at least 50% anti-corrosion antifreeze.
„ Lower the urea tank to the minimum permitted filling level.
„ Clean the outside of the engine.
„ Spray or apply the anti-corrosion agent Rustilo DWX 30 onto unpainted parts and rusty
areas on the engine (excluding electrical connections).
Measures for placing the diesel engine in service again after storing when not in
use for a period from 30 days to 12 months
„ Before starting up the machine, perform the maintenance interval "Every 10 hours, at least
daily".
„ Change the engine oil if it is more than 2 years old.
„ Change the oil filter.
„ Examine the engine for leaks, soiling and damage.
„ Check the coolant level.
„ Drain off the water and any sediments which have accumulated from the fuel tank and
check the water separator on the fuel prefilter, drain off water if necessary.
„ Perform a visual inspection to check the starter, alternator and refrigerating compressor.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
300
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Engine
17
Shutting down the diesel engine 17.14
„ Check the ribbed V-belts on the diesel engine and replace if necessary.
„ Check the diesel engine power supply.
„ Make certain the fuel supply is connected.
„ Fill the urea tank up to the maximum filling quantity.
Restarting the diesel engine after storing it when not in use from 30 days to
12 months
„ Check the oil pressure display immediately after starting, see Page 169.
„ Check the air filter pressure display.
„ Let the diesel engine run until it reaches operating temperature.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
301
18
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18.1
Cleaning the windows and outside rear-view mirrors of the cabin
18
Maintenance – Basic Machine
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
18.1
Cleaning the windows and outside rear-view mirrors of the cabin
2
8
3
4
1
5
9
10
7
6
1
BM000-517
ü The machine is in the working position.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Clean the windscreen (1) from the floor using suitable auxiliaries.
„ Clean the window (2) of the cabin door, the left part of the rear window (3) and the left
outside rear-view mirror (4) from the left platform (5).
„ Clean the right side window (10), the right part of the rear window (9), the right outside rearview mirror (7) and the anti-collision mirror (8) from the right platform (6).
18.2
Checking/refilling windscreen washer system
BMG000-012
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
302
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18
Maintaining air conditioning and heating
18.3
The reservoir (2) for the windscreen washer system is behind the fresh water tank (1) in the
storage compartment above the right front wheel. The orifice for refilling is on the rear wall of
the storage compartment and is closed by a cover sheet (4).
„ Check the level of the windscreen washer system daily.
If the cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, the fluid level is correct.
If no cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, refill:
„ To refill the cleaning fluid, swivel the cover sheet (4) to the side.
„ Open the cover (3) and add cleaning fluid.
„ Close the cover (3).
„ Swivel back the cover sheet (4) and close the orifice.
INFO
„ To achieve a better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add
windscreen cleaner/anti-freeze.
„ In winter drain the washer system or fill with special anti-freeze.
18.3
Maintaining air conditioning and heating
WARNING
Risk of injury from getting in contact with refrigerant
During repair, service, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, there can be
liquid or gaseous refrigerant emissions that are hazardous to persons and environment.
„ Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.
„ Secure the machine against rolling away.
„ Take suitable protective measures (e.g. wear protective goggles and protective gloves).
„ Only authorised specialists are allowed to perform repair, service, maintenance and
cleaning work.
„ Always see a doctor if you suffer burns from refrigerant.
„ Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the cooling system.
„ During refill and repair work, do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into a
recycling container.
„ The spare parts used for the machine must satisfy the technical requirements of the
machine manufacturer. For this reason, use only KRONE original spare parts.
„ Be extremely careful when you perform welding work in the vicinity of the air conditioning
system.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
303
18
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18.3
Maintaining air conditioning and heating
NOTICE
Environmental damage due to chemicals
The air conditioning is operated with refrigerant R134a (tetrafluorethane). This substance
contains no chlorine atoms, and thus is not harmful to the ozone in the atmosphere of the
world. Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not be drained; it must be collected at a recycling
plant.
„ Collect the refrigerant with a recycling plant.
„ Thus do NOT separate the connecting pipes beforehand.
„ Have all maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning carried out only by your
KRONE dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.
18.3.1
Components of air conditioning
The air conditioning components and their position in the machine.
BM000-271
1 Control panel for automatic climate control
2 Evaporator
3 Expansion valve
4 Capacitor
5 Dryer/receiver
6 Pressure switch
7 Compressor
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
304
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
18.3.2
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18
Maintaining air conditioning and heating
18.3
Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/dryer
BMG000-018
The receiver (2) with pressure switch (1) is located on the left behind the tailgate.
As the receiver (2) is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container regulations during
production and testing. According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test
group II in accordance with the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the
pressure product p x l.
According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers
must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the
recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of tanks in use. In combination with the
inspection the receiver (2) must be visually inspected twice a year. Special attention shall be
given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct state, it must be
replaced by a qualified service centre for safety reasons to ensure sufficient protection to the
user and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating
pressurised containers.
INFO
The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally
+1°Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.
18.3.3
Checking the condition and filling quantity of refrigerant
Regularly check the dryer/receiver unit and replace it when required, but at least once a year.
BX001-239
Check the filling quantity
Interval for checking refrigerant level: see Page 270
The amount of refrigerant is checked on the sight glass (2) via the white float (5).
„ Start the engine.
„ Switch on the air conditioning and set to maximum cooling.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
305
18
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18.3
Maintaining air conditioning and heating
If the white float (5) is at the top, the refrigerant level is correct.
If the white float (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be topped up by a qualified service
centre, filling quantity see Page 80.
Checking the refrigerant condition
Checking the interval for refrigerant condition: see Page 270.
„ Observe the label (4) on the dryer (1).
If the indicator perl (3) is orange, the refrigerant condition is OK.
If the indicator perl (3) has turned colourless, the dryer/receiver unit must be changed by a
specialist workshop.
18.3.4
Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter
BX001-240
INFO
If filters are not properly maintained, the fresh air filter may become very soiled and it can no
longer be guaranteed that adequate fresh air will flow into the cab.
A fresh air filter (4) in the form of a wedge filter is located in the upper cab area behind the
ventilation grid (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. The fresh air filter protects the
driver in the cab against airborne contamination outside the cab. Always check the fresh air filter
before starting to drive the machine.
„ Open the closing device (1) by turning it 90° clockwise and remove the ventilation grid (2).
„ To unlock the filter, reverse the locking lever (3) to the left.
„ Pull out the fresh air filter (4), check for soiling and clean if required.
Clean fresh air filter (4) by shaking it out, never use compressed air to clean it. If heavily soiled,
replace the fresh air filter (4).
„ Reinsert the fresh air filter (4).
„ Lock fresh air filter by means of locking lever (3).
„ Insert the ventilation grid (3) and close it via the closing device (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
306
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
18.3.5
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18
Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment
18.4
Replacing/cleaning circulation filter
1
2
BMG000-019
INFO
If the filters are not adequately maintained, the circulation filter may become heavily soiled
and cause a reduction in the output of the air conditioning and the heating.
„ To clean the circulation filter, loosen the screws (2) and remove the ventilation grid (1)
together with the filter element.
„ Clean filter element with compressed air and replace it, if necessary.
„ Mount the ventilation grid (1) together with the filter element, ensuring that the filter element
is correctly inserted.
„ Press in the screws (2).
18.4
Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment
1
2
BM000-115
The rotating screen, the condenser block, the combination cooler (charge air, coolant and oil)
and the diesel cooler sit behind the tailgate in the cooler compartment.
„ Open the tailgate (1).
„ Swing down the ladder (2) at the rear.
„ To prevent fire, clean the area around the cooler daily. Wipe off oil residues if necessary.
„ Clean these areas more frequently in a very dusty environment and with very dry crops.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
307
18
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18.5
Maintaining chassis
2
3
1
4
BXG000-033
Preferably clean the cooler and the capacitor while the engine is cold.
ü The tailgate is open.
„ Open the seal (1) on the rotating screen frame (4) and swing up the rotating screen.
„ Loosen the locking on the capacitor (3) and rotate the capacitor to the side.
„ Clean the cooler (2) and the cooler compartment with compressed air. Ensure that the
blades are not damaged.
„ Blow through the condenser block with compressed air from the inside to the outside without
damaging the fins.
„ Swivel back the capacitor and secure it.
„ Close the rotating screen frame (4).
„ Close the tailgate.
„ Swing up the ladder at the rear.
18.5
Maintaining chassis
18.5.1
Checking attachment of steering cylinder
BMG000-021
Check the screws of the steering cylinder with the following tightening torque:
„ Check the screws (1) of the steering cylinder with a tightening torque of 730 Nm.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
308
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
18.5.2
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18
Maintaining chassis
18.5
Checking fitting of track rod
BMG000-020
Check the screws of the track rod on both sides of the machine with the following tightening
torques:
„ Check the screw (1) on the axial ball joint with a tightening torque of 550 Nm.
„ Check the clamping screw (2) of the track rod with a tightening torque of 60 ... 70 Nm.
„ Check the castle nut (3) of the track rod end with a tightening torque of 450 +50 Nm. Check
the seat of the cotter pin.
18.5.3
Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front wheel drive version
BM000-270
Check the hub covers (1) for damage and tight fit:
„ Replace lost or worn hub covers (1) immediately to prevent dirt entering the interior of the
hub and damaging the bearing.
If a hub cover is missing or if a hub cover is dismounted, the seal must be replaced before a
new installation.
Check the screws of the hub covers:
„ Shut down and secure the machine, see Page 33.
„ Make sure the hub covers have been mounted correctly and are in a perfect state.
„ Check the screws of the hub cover for tight fit.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
309
18
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18.6
Maintaining belt drives
18.6
Maintaining belt drives
18.6.1
Checking kraftband
INFO
If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not
guaranteed.
„ Visually check each kraftband of the belt drives inside and outside for wear and damage
(e.g. cracks, rocks) and replace, if necessary.
„ Check the kraftbands for soiling (oil, grease) and clean or replace them if required.
18.6.2
Checking pulley
BX001-249
INFO
If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not
guaranteed.
„ Check the edges of the pulley (1) for wear and, if required, have them replaced by your
KRONE service partner.
„ Check the pulley (1) for damage and replace if required.
„ Check the pulley (1) for soiling (oil, grease) and clean if required.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
310
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
18.6.3
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18
Maintaining belt drives
18.6
Checking the belt tension
Checking/setting belt tension of fan drive and exhaust fan
1
3
2
4
5
6
BM000-138
„ Swing up the left side hood.
„ Check whether the pretension angle is 20°.
ð If the arrow (6) points to 20° on the pretensioning scale (1) the belt tension is set
correctly.
ð If the arrow (6) does not point to 20° on the pretensioning scale (1) the belt tension must
be set.
„ To set the belt tension, undo the retaining screw (3) on the tensioner housing (2) and
undo the nuts (4) on the quick clamp device (5).
„ To rotate the tensioner housing (2) turn the quick clamp device (5) until the arrow (6)
displays a pretension angle of 20° on the twist scale (1).
„ Tighten the retaining screw (3) and the nuts (4).
„ Close the left side hood.
Checking/setting belt tension of rotating screen drive
1
2
3
4
BM000-140
„ Swivel open the tailgate.
„ Check whether the pretension angle is 20°.
ð If the arrow points to (2) 20° on the twist scale (1), the belt tension is set correctly.
ð If the arrow (2) does not point to 20° on the twist scale (1), the belt tension must be set.
„ Undo the screw slightly (4) to set the belt tension.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
311
18
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18.7
Maintaining tyres and wheels
„ Use a key (WAF 55) to turn the tensioner housing (3) anti-clockwise until the arrow (2)
displays a pretension angle of 20° on the scale of the twist angle (1).
„ Tighten the screw (4).
„ Close the tailgate.
18.7
Maintaining tyres and wheels
18.7.1
Checking/maintaining tyres
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
Inspect the tyres visually
„ Visually inspect tyres for cuts or breaks.
Æ If there are cuts or breaks in the tyres, have the tyres repaired or replaced by a KRONE
service partner.
Maintenance intervals for visual inspection of the tyres, see Page 270.
Checking/adapting the tyre pressure
„ Check the tyre pressure, see Page 80.
Æ If the tyre pressure is too high, deflate air.
Æ If the tyre pressure is too low, increase the tyre pressure.
Check the maintenance intervals for tyre pressure, see Page 270.
18.7.2
Retighten wheel nuts
BM000-125
Front axle
Rear axle
„ Retighten the nuts for attaching the wheels in the illustrated sequence.
„ Retighten the nuts on the front and rear axle to 630 Nm.
Intervals at which the nuts on the wheels must be tightened, see Page 270.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
312
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
18.8
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18
Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis
18.8
Tighten the screw connections on the central support/chassis
1
2
2
1
BM000-336
„ Carry out the steps on the right-hand and left-hand side of the machine:
„ Tighten the screw connections (M 20 x 1.5) (2).
„ Tighten the screw connections (M16) (1).
18.9
Re-adjust the transport lock
1
3
2
1
BM000-349
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ For the maintenance interval, see Page 270.
„ The following steps have to be carried out on the left- and right-hand side of the machine:
„ Loosen the 6 screws at the transport lock (1).
„ Hand-tighten the screws (2, 3).
„ Centrally align the transport lock (1).
„ Fold up the side mounted mowers in transport position, see Page 95.
„ Fold in the side mounted mower in working position, see Page 95.
„ „Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Press the aligned transport lock (1) down as far as it will go. Be sure to avoid lateral
shifting of the transport lock (1).
„ Tighten the 6 screws at the transport lock (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
313
18
Maintenance – Basic Machine
18.10 Checking the fire extinguisher
18.10
Checking the fire extinguisher
BPG000-034
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Ensure that the fire extinguisher (1) is mounted on the machine.
„ Ensure that access to and view of the fire extinguisher (1) are not obstructed.
„ Ensure that the fire extinguisher (1) is filled by weighing the fire extinguisher (1).
„ Ensure that the seal on the extinguishing head and the security seal are neither defective
nor missing.
„ Ensure that the operating instructions on the type plate of the fire extinguisher (1) are legible
and face outwards.
„ Check the fire extinguisher for visible material damage, corrosion, leakage, a clogged hose
and/or nozzle.
„ Ensure that the pressure gauge pointer indicates the green area.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
314
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard
19.1
Maintenance – mowing units
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
WARNING
Risk of injury from improper service and maintenance work on safety-relevant machine
parts!
Improper service and maintenance work on safety-relevant machine parts, such as cutting
discs and mower drums, and the machine components connected to them can cause
dangerous imbalances or breakage during operation. As a result, persons can be seriously
injured or killed.
„ Always replace damaged safety-relevant components, such as cutting discs and mower
drums, and the machine components connected to them.
„ Observe the wear limits and check or replace the components.
„ Never modify any build-up welds.
„ Replace damaged components only with genuine KRONE spare parts.
19.1
Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard
KM000-387
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
Dismounting
„ Release the locking screw (2) and remove the guard (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
315
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.2
Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front mounted mower input
gearbox
Mounting
„ Mount the guard (1) and lock the locking screw (2).
19.2
Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front mounted mower input
gearbox
2
1
2
BMG000-031
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
Dismounting
„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2).
„ Remove the guard (1) and store it in a secure place.
Mounting
„ Put on the guard (1) in place and secure with the hexagon head screws (2).
19.3
Opening/closing conditioning sheet side mounted mowers
To clear the mower of soiling and crop remnants, the conditioning sheet can be swivelled
downwards.
LH = RH
2
1
BM000-514
ü The side mounted mowers are in headland position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The side mounted mower is securely supported, see Page 33.
Opening
„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2).
„ Swivel the conditioning sheet (1) downwards.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
316
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Dismounting/mounting the guard of the auger drive
19.4
Closing
„ Close the conditioning sheet (1) and secure with the hexagon head screws (2).
19.4
Dismounting/mounting the guard of the auger drive
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The side guard is folded up and secured, see Page 258.
1
2
BMG000-055
Removing
„ Remove the hexagon head screws (2).
„ Remove the guard (1) and store it in a secure place.
Mounting
„ Put on the guard (1) in place and secure with the hexagon head screws (2).
19.5
Maintaining belt drives
INFO
If crops are thick, belt pulleys with 4 grooves can be mounted on the front mounted mower if
required.
19.5.1
Checking kraftband
INFO
If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not
guaranteed.
„ Visually check each kraftband of the belt drives inside and outside for wear and damage
(e.g. cracks, rocks) and replace, if necessary.
„ Check the kraftbands for soiling (oil, grease) and clean or replace them if required.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
317
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.5
Maintaining belt drives
19.5.2
Checking pulley
BX001-249
INFO
If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the kraftband and pulley is not
guaranteed.
„ Check the edges of the pulley (1) for wear and, if required, have them replaced by your
KRONE service partner.
„ Check the pulley (1) for damage and replace if required.
„ Check the pulley (1) for soiling (oil, grease) and clean if required.
19.5.3
Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front mounted mower
conditioner drive
KM000-383
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The guard for the conditioner drive is dismounted, see Page 315.
ü The belt drive is tensioned, see Page 319.
„ Check whether the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2).
If the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension
is correct.
If the display (1) does not end flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt
tension must be adjusted.
„ Detension the belt drive, see Page 319.
„ Loosen the nut (4).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
318
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Maintaining belt drives
19.5
When the display is above the compression spring:
„ Unscrew the sleeve (3) further (turn counterclockwise).
When the display is under the compression spring:
„ Screw the sleeve (3) in further (turn clockwise).
„ Tighten the nut (4).
„ Tension the belt drive, see Page 319.
„ Repeat the process until the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression
spring (2) with the belt drive tensioned.
„ Mount the guard (5) for the conditioner drive, see Page 315.
19.5.4
Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt tension front mounted
mower
ü The guard for the conditioner drive is dismounted, see Page 315.
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Remove the blade key from the rear storage compartment, see Page 68.
Detensioning the belt drive
BM000-259
„ Remove the linch pin (1).
WARNING! Risk of injury! The blade key (3) is under spring tension during the detensioning
process. If the blade key is released too early, it will spring back. Do not release the blade key
during detensioning.
„ To detension the belt drive, insert the blade key (3) in the tensioning device (2) and press
down.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
319
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.5
Maintaining belt drives
Tensioning the belt drive
BM000-260
WARNING! Risk of injury! The blade key (1) is under spring tension during the tensioning
process. If the blade key is released too early, it will spring back. Do not release the blade key
during tensioning.
„ Slide the blade key (1) into the tensioning device (3).
„ To tension the belt drive, press the blade key upwards until the tensioning device engages.
„ To secure the tensioning device, mount the linch pin (2).
19.5.5
Checking/setting belt tension of auger drive
3
2
4
1
BMG000-039
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The guard of the auger drive has been removed, see Page 317.
ü The belt drive has been tensioned, see Page 321.
„ Check whether the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2).
If the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt tension
is correct.
If the display (1) does not end flush with the upper edge of the compression spring (2), the belt
tension must be adjusted.
„ Relieve the belt drive, see Page 321.
„ Loosen the nut (4).
Display above the compression spring
„ Unscrew the sleeve (3) further (turn anti-clockwise).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
320
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Maintaining belt drives
19.5
Display under the compression spring
„ Screw the sleeve (3) in further (turn clockwise).
„ Tighten the nut (4).
„ Tension the belt drive, see Page 321.
„ Repeat the process until the display (1) ends flush with the upper edge of the compression
spring (2) with the belt drive tensioned.
„ Attach the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 317.
19.5.6
Relieving/tensioning belt drive of auger drive
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The guard of the auger drive has been removed, see Page 317.
„ Remove the blade key from the rear storage compartment, see Page 68.
2
3
1
BMG000-061
Relieving the belt drive
„ Pull out the linch pin (1).
WARNING! Risk of injury! While relieving the belt drive, the blade wrench (2) is under spring
tension. The blade wrench (2) recoils if it is released too early. Do not release the blade
wrench (2) during the relieving process.
„ To relieve the belt drive tension, insert the blade wrench (2) into the tensioning device (3)
and pull it from the rear.
Tensioning the belt drive
WARNING! Risk of injury! While tensioning the belt drive, the blade wrench (2) is under spring
tension. The blade wrench (2) recoils if it is released too early. Do not release the blade
wrench (2) during the tensioning process.
„ Slide the blade wrench (2) into the tensioning device (3).
„ To tension the belt drive, push the blade wrench (2) forward until the tensioning device (3)
locks into place.
„ To secure the tensioning device (3), insert the linch pin (1) into the borehole.
„ Check belt tension, see Page 320.
„ Mount the guard of the auger conveyor drive, see Page 317.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
321
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.5
Maintaining belt drives
19.5.7
Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted mowers”
Changing the kraftband is described based on the example of the "Right side mounted mower
belt drive". The kraftband of the "Left side mounted mower belt drive" is changed in a similar
manner.
ü All mowing units are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 33.
„ The side hood is open.
BM000-272
„ Loosen the safety chain (2).
„ Unscrew the screws (1) and put the universal shaft (3) aside.
BM000-173
„ Dismount the oil pan guard (2).
„ Remove the guard sheet (3).
„ Dismount the belt guard (4).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
322
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Maintaining belt drives
19.5
BM000-174
„ Unscrew the upper screws (4) of the belt guard (3).
„ Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the belt guard (2) together with the belt guard (3).
„ Dismount the belt guard (5).
„ Remove the bolt (7) and protect the hydraulic cylinder (6) against falling down.
„ To dismount the reel (10), raise the rocker arm (9).
„ Remove the kraftband (11) from the lower belt pulley (12) and set it on the upper belt
pulley (12).
„ Raise the rocker arm (9) until it is no longer positioned in front of the upper belt pulley (8).
Secure the rocker arm (9) in this position to protect it against falling down.
„ Remove the kraftband (11) from the upper belt pulley (8), turn it and remove it down and to
the rear between the belt pulley (8) and the main frame.
„ Replace the kraftband (11) with a new one. Note the running direction.
„ To lower the rocker arm (9) release the retainer.
„ Place the kraftband (11) on the belt pulley (12).
„ Raise the rocker arm (9) and mount the reel (10).
„ To mount the bolt (7), loosen the hydraulic cylinder retainer (6) and lower it until the hole
pattern of the hydraulic cylinder (6) and the rocker arm (9) coincide.
„ Mount the belt guard (5).
„ Insert the belt guard (2) together with the belt guard (3) and mount with the screws (1).
„ Fit the upper screws (4) of the belt guard (3).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
323
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.5
Maintaining belt drives
BM000-173
„ Mount the belt guard (4).
„ Attach the guard sheet (3).
„ Mount the oil pan guard (2).
BM000-272
„ Insert the universal shaft and fit the screws (1) medium tight using screw glue; tightening
torque=72 Nm.
„ Mount the safety chain (2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
324
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
19.5.8
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Maintaining belt drives
19.5
Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted mower"
BM000-175
ü All mowing units are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see Page 33.
ü The side hood on the right is open.
„ Dismount the universal shaft (11).
„ Dismount the belt guard (2).
„ To dismount the belt guard (9) together with the belt guard (10), unscrew the screws (8 and
12).
„ Dismount the hose clamp (4).
„ To dismount the belt guard (3) together with the support, unscrew the screws (5).
„ Remove the bolt (6) and protect the hydraulic cylinder (7) against falling down.
„ Evenly remove the kraftband (1) from the two pulleys.
„ Replace the kraftband (1) with a new one. Note the running direction.
„ To mount the bolt (6), loosen the hydraulic cylinder retainer (7) and lower it until the hole
pattern of the hydraulic cylinder (7) and the rocker arm coincide.
„ Insert the belt guard (3) together with the support and mount with the screws (5).
„ Mount the hose clamp (4).
„ Insert the belt guard (9) together with the belt guard (10) and mount with the screws (8 and
12).
„ Mount the belt guard (2).
„ Slide on the universal shaft (11) and fit the clamping screw; tightening torque=80 Nm.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
325
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.6
Checking the tines on the tine conditioner
19.6
Checking the tines on the tine conditioner
NOTICE
Loss of tines
Bent and broken tines will cause an imbalance. Therefore the machine may be damaged.
„ Check the tine conditioner for bent and damaged tines each time before it is used.
„ Replace bent or damaged tines before starting work.
„ To prevent a loss of tines, check the bearing journals of the tine bearings and replace
them in time.
KMG000-017
Broken tines must be replaced in pairs on opposite sides.
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Replace bent and damaged tines (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
326
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
19.7
Cutterbar
19.7.1
Rotary hub
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
Series:
2
RE
B
4
RE RE
1
RE RE
LE
a
LE RE LE RE
b
LE
3
LE RE
LE RE LE
LE
RE RE
LE RE
LE RE LE
LE
BMG000-026
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
327
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
For version with "Direction of rotation "A"":
2
LE
RE
a
A
4
RE RE RE RE LE
LE
b
LE
3
1
RE RE RE RE
LE
LE LE
LE
RE RE RE RE
LE
LE LE
LE
BM000-473
Abbreviations used in this figure:
A
B
RE
LE
=
=
=
=
Direction of rotation “A” to the centre
Direction of rotation “B” in pairs
eccentric bearing housing (clockwise), without distinctive groove
eccentric bearing housing (rotating anticlockwise), with distinctive groove
For protection against overload of mowers, the rotary hubs (1) are secured with nuts (2) and
shear pins (3).
When driving onto obstacles (e.g. stones), the both shear pins in the rotary hub will shear off.
The rotary hub incl. nut turns upward on the pinion shaft.
•
•
The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the left (LH) in the direction of travel
have left-handed thread.
The cutting discs or drums which transport the crop to the right (RH) in the direction of travel
have right-handed thread.
To distinguish between right-hand (clockwise) rotation (RH) and left-hand (anti-clockwise)
rotation (LH), the nuts (2) and the pinion shafts (4) for the left-hand rotation (LH) have a
distinctive groove (a, b).
•
•
The nuts (2) with left-handed thread (LH) have distinctive grooves (a) on the bevel.
The pinion shafts (4) with left-handed thread (LH) have a distinctive groove (b) on the face.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
328
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
19.7.2
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
Replacing the shear bolt at the rotary hub
NOTICE
Wrong installation position
The machine may be damaged if the installation position of the bearing housings is not
observed.
„ Clockwise rotating (RH) cutting discs / mower drums always have right-handed pinion
shaft and nut (no groove mark on pinion shaft and nut).
„ Anti-clockwise rotating (LH) cutting discs / mower drums always have left-handed pinion
shaft and nut (with groove mark on pinion shaft and nut).
I
7
8
a
3
9
!
3
2
3
1
d
b
4
C
10
BM000-233
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Dismount the cutting disc or the mower drum on the rotary hub with the defective cutterbar
protection system.
„ Remove the retaining ring (7).
„ Unscrew the screws (8). If detent edged washers (9) are present, remove the detent edged
washers (9).
„ Use the special spanner (10) included with delivery to unscrew the nut (2).
„ Dismount the hub (1).
„ Remove the damaged shear pins (3) from hub (1) and shaft (4).
„ Check the nut (2) and the hub (1) for damage.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
329
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
NOTE! Replace damaged components with original KRONE spare parts.
„ Apply lubricating grease (c) according to DIN 51818 of NLGI class 2 (Li soap with EP
additives) to the area above the bearing.
„ Position the hub (1) on the pinion shaft (4).
NOTE! Note the position of the shear pins. The slots of the shear pins (3) must be
mounted facing each other horizontally, see detail (I).
„ Punch the new shear pins from the outside through the hub (1) and the shaft (4) until the
end of the pin reaches the surface of the hub (d).
„ Using the special spanner (10) from the rear storage compartment, tighten the nut (2) with a
tightening torque of 300 Nm.
„ Insert the screws (8). If detent edged washers (9) are provided, fit the detent edged
washers (9).
„ Mount the retaining ring (7).
„ Mount the cutting disc (5) or the mower drum (6).
19.7.3
Check/change blades
WARNING
Missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted blades and blade supports
If blades are missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted, dangerous unbalanced rotation may
be caused and parts may fly around. People may be seriously injured or killed as a result.
„ Check the blades at least once a day and the retaining bolts every time after changing the
blades or after contact with foreign objects.
„ Immediately replace missing, damaged or incorrectly mounted blades and blade supports.
„ To avoid imbalance, always replace missing and damaged blades in kits and never mount
unevenly worn blades on a cutting disc/mower drum.
Version with bolted blades
Version with blade quick fastener
KM000-039 / KM000-040
„ Whenever a blade is changed or following contact with foreign objects, check retaining bolts
and replace them if required, see Page 333.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
330
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
Checking the blade for wear
WARNING
Risk of injury due to low material thickness on the blades
If the material thickness on the blades is too low, the blades may loosen due to high rotating
speed. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.
„ Replace the blades at the latest when the wear limit is reached.
ð The wear limit is reached when the borehole of the blade touches the marking (1) on
the blade or the dimension X is equal to or less than 13 mm.
KM000-038
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.
„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.
„ Check wear limit.
ð If the dimension is X>13 mm, the wear limit is not reached.
ð If the dimension X is ≤13 mm or the borehole touches the marking (1), the blade must
be replaced.
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
Changing blades for the “bolted blades” version
KM000-044
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
331
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.
„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.
„ Remove the damaged or worn blade.
„ Check the fastening parts of the blade. Also replace worn or damaged fastening parts.
INFO: The blades for anti-clockwise and clockwise rotating cutting discs/mower drums differ.
When installing the blades, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct. The arrow on the
blade must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting disc/mower drum.
„ Insert the new blade (5) between the wear skid (2) and the cutting disc (1).
„ Insert the retaining bolt (3) from below through the wear skid (2), the blade (5) and the
cutting disc (1).
INFO: Only use the locknut (4) once.
„ Screw the locknut (4) from above onto the retaining bolt (3) and tighten it; tightening torque
see Page 278.
„ Repeat the process for all blades.
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
Changing blades for the “quick-change blades” version
1
2
3
3
2
4
4
5
KM000-045
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.
„ Clean the area around the blades, cutting discs and mower drums.
„ To remove the blade (2), insert the blade wrench (1) between the cutting disc (4) and the
blade carrier (3) as far as it will go, press it down with one hand and hold it.
„ Check the fastening parts of the blade (2). Also replace worn or damaged fastening parts.
INFO: The blades for anti-clockwise and clockwise rotating cutting discs/mower drums differ.
When installing the blades, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct. The arrow on the
blade must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting disc/mower drum.
„ To insert the new blade (2), insert the blade key (1) between the cutting disc (4) and the
blade carrier (3) as far as it will go, press it down with one hand and hold it.
„ Guide the blade (2) onto the retaining bolt (5) and release the blade key (1) in a controlled
manner with your hand.
„ Repeat the process for all blades.
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
332
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
INFO
Alternatively, the blades can be changed with the QuickChange tool.
19.7.4
Check/replace retaining bolts
WARNING
Risk of injury due to low material thickness on the retaining bolts
If the material thickness on the retaining bolt is too low, the blades may loosen due to the high
rotating speed. This can be the reason for serious or fatal injuries.
„ Whenever a blade is changed, check the material thickness of the retaining bolts.
„ When the retaining bolts are damaged or worn, replace them in kits per cutting disc/
mower drum.
Checking retaining bolts
Blade screw connection design
Blade quick fastener design
KM000-039 / KM000-040
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The diameter of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm.
„ Check the diameter of the retaining bolt using suitable auxiliaries.
„ If the diameter is less than 14 mm, replace the retaining bolts.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
333
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
Checking retaining bolts with a gauge
KMG000-139
The material thickness of the retaining bolts and blade carriers is checked by means of gauge
(1) included with delivery. The gauge (1) is located on the special tool (2).
Section (1.1) of the gauge (1) is used to check the material thickness of the retaining bolts.
Section (1.2) of the gauge (1) is used to check the contour of the blade carriers, see Page 335.
KM000-089
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! When removing the blades, wear suitable
protective gloves.
„ Remove the blades (4).
„ Clean the section to be checked.
„ Place the gauge (1) with the section (1.1) against the retaining bolt (2).
„ Rotate the gauge by 90 degrees.
Æ If it is not possible to slide the gauge (1) over the retaining bolt (2) during the rotation, the
retaining bolt (2) is OK.
Æ If it is possible to slide the gauge (1) over the retaining bolt (2) during the rotation, the
retaining bolt (2) must be replaced immediately.
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! When inserting the blades, wear suitable
protective gloves.
„ Insert the blades (4).
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
334
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
Replacing retaining bolts
3
4
3
4
2
6
6
5
5
KM001-427
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The retaining bolts (2) must be replaced at the latest when the material thickness at the thinnest
point is below 14 mm. To replace the retaining bolts (2), proceed as follows:
„ Loosen the locknut (3).
„ Remove the old retaining bolt.
„ Insert the new retaining bolt (2) from below through the wear skid (5), the blade (4) and the
cutting disc (6).
INFO: Only use the locknut (3) once.
„ Screw the locknut (3) from above onto the retaining bolt (2) and tighten it; tightening torque
see Page 278.
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
19.7.5
Checking/replacing the blade carrier
WARNING
Risk of injury due to low material thickness and/or worn application seam on the blade
carriers
If the material thickness is too low and/or an application seam on the blade carrier is worn,
blades may loosen due to the high rotating speed. This can be the reason for serious or fatal
injuries.
„ The blade carriers must be checked at least once a day or after contact with foreign
objects.
„ Whenever a blade is changed, check the material thickness of the blade carriers.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
335
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
Checking the blade carrier
KM000-041
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The material thickness of the blade carriers must not be less than 3 mm at the weakest point.
„ Check the material thickness of the blade carriers using suitable auxiliaries.
„ If the material thickness is less than 3 mm, replace the blade carriers.
„ The blade carriers must be replaced at the latest when the application seam (1) is worn at
one point.
Checking the blade carrier with a gauge
KMG000-139
The material thickness of the retaining bolts and blade carriers is checked by means of gauge
(1) included with delivery. The gauge (1) is located on the special tool (2).
Section (1.1) of the gauge (1) is used to check the material thickness of the retaining bolts, see
Page 333.
Section (1.2) of the gauge (1) is used to check the contour of the blade carriers.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
336
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
KM000-090
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! When removing the blades, wear suitable
protective gloves.
„ Remove the blades.
„ Clean the area to be checked.
„ Slide the gauge (1) with the section (1.2) as far as it will go over the retaining bolt of the
blade carrier (2).
KM000-091
Æ If the contour of the blade carrier (2) protrudes completely beyond the contour of the gauge
(1) in section (IC), the wear limit of the blade carrier (2) is not reached.
Æ If the contour of the blade carrier (2) disappears at any point in section (IIC) behind the
contour of the gauge, the wear limit of the blade carrier (2) is reached. The blade carrier (2)
must be replaced.
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! When inserting the blades, wear suitable
protective gloves.
„ Insert the blades.
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
337
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
Inserting the blade carrier
1
1
3
3
4
2
1
1
5
5
KM001-428
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
To replace the blade carrier (2), proceed as follows:
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! When removing the blades, wear suitable
protective gloves.
„ Remove the blades (5).
„ Dismount the screws (1).
„ Remove the cutting disc (3) / mower drum (4).
„ Remove the blade carrier (2) and replace it.
WARNING! Note the installation position of the blade carriers, see Page 327.
„ Fit the cutting disc (3) / mower drum (4) on the blade carrier.
„ Mount and tighten the screws (1).
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! When inserting the blades, wear suitable
protective gloves.
„ Insert the blades (5).
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
19.7.6
Checking impact stops on the cutterbar
NOTICE
Irregular check of the impact stops
The impact stops are subject to natural wear. They must be checked daily for wear, and be
replaced if necessary. The machine can be damaged if checks are not performed.
„ Have the impact stops replaced by authorised specialists only.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
338
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
1
2
KM000-081
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The impact stops (1) must be checked daily for wear. If required, the impact stops (1) must be
replaced by authorised specialists.
„ Have the impact stops (1) replaced by authorised specialists if the impact stops (1) show
signs of wear.
„ Have the impact stops (1) replaced by authorised specialists if the weld seam (2) is no
longer fully visible due to abrasion.
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
19.7.7
Check/replace cutting discs/mower drums
WARNING
Risk of injury from damaged cutting discs/mower drums.
If cutting discs/mower drums are damaged, blades may become detached due to high rotating
speed. This can be the reason for serious or fatal injuries.
„ The cutting disks/mower drums must be checked at least once a day or after contact with
foreign objects.
„ Check/replace damaged cutting discs/mower drums.
KM000-042
The cutting discs/mower drums must not exceed the dimension X=48 mm. If there are cracks,
notches or holes, the cutting discs/mower drums must always be replaced.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
339
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
Checking the wear limit on the cutting discs/mower drums
WARNING
Risk of injury from worn cutting discs/mower drums.
Due to worn cutting discs/mower drums, the blades or parts may loosen because of high
rotating speed. This can be the reason for serious or fatal injuries.
„ Check/replace the cutting discs/mower drums.
3
3
2
1
4
KM000-043
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
The wear limit for material abrasion (2) on the cutting discs (3) / mower drums (4) is reached
when the material thickness at any point on the cutting discs (3) / mower drums (4) is less than
3 mm.
„ Use callipers (1) to measure the material thickness at the cutting discs (3) / mower
drums (4).
„ Replace the cutting discs (3) / mower drums (4) at the latest when the minimum material
thickness of 3 mm is not reached at any point on the cutting discs (3) / mower drums (4).
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
Replacing cutting discs/mower drums
1
1
3
3
4
1
1
5
5
KM001-429
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
To replace the cutting discs (3) / mower drums (4), proceed as follows:
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
340
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! When removing the blades, wear suitable
protective gloves.
„ Remove the blades (5).
„ Dismount the screws (1).
„ Remove and replace the cutting disc (3) / mower drum (4).
WARNING! Observe the installation position of the cutting discs/mower drums, see
Page 327.
„ Mount and tighten the screws (1).
WARNING! Risk of injury due to sharp blades! When inserting the blades, wear suitable
protective gloves.
„ Insert the blades (5).
„ Fold down the front guard, see Page 191.
19.7.8
Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter bar
Front mounted mower cutterbar
Checking oil level
Before checking the oil level on the cutterbar, level the cutterbar using a spirit level.
KM000-284
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
Aligning the cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)
„ Position the spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar.
„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height
setting, see Page 250.
Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction
„ Position the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.
„ Use the spirit level (1) to align the cutterbar, if necessary use wedges to align it horizontally.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
341
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
KM000-036
„ Loosen the locking screw in the inspection hole (1).
ð The oil level must reach up to the inspection hole (1).
If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque see Page 280.
If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):
„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the inspection hole (1).
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque see Page 280.
Change oil
BMG000-037
ü The front mounted mower is raised.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
342
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ To be able to lower the cutterbar on the side of the drain plug (2), place a square piece of
timber underneath the cutterbar on the opposite side.
„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.
„ Lower the front mounted mower until the cutterbar rests on the square piece of timber and is
lower in the direction of the drain plug (2).
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Unscrew the drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
„ Mount the drain plug (2), see Page 280.
„ Raise the front mounted mower again.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
KM000-284
Aligning the cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)
„ Position the spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar.
„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1); if required, readjust using the cutting height
setting.
Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction
„ Position the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.
„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1); if required, use wedges to align it horizontally.
KM000-036
„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the inspection hole (1).
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque see Page 280.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
343
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.7
Cutterbar
Cutterbar side mounted mowers
Checking the oil level
1
BM000-527
ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Loosen the locking screw in the inspection hole (1).
ð The oil level must reach up to the inspection hole (1).
If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque see Page 280.
If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):
„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the inspection hole (1).
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque see Page 280.
Change oil
BMG000-038
ü The side mounted mowers are in transport position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
344
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Cutterbar
19.7
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Unscrew the drain plug (1) and drain the oil.
„ Mount the drain plug (1), tightening torque see Page 280.
„ Move the side mounted mowers into the working position.
Before checking the oil level on the cutterbar, level the cutterbar using a spirit level.
KM000-284
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
Aligning the cutterbar in transverse direction (direction of travel)
„ Position the spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar.
„ Align the cutterbar using the spirit level (1) and readjust, if necessary, via cutting height
setting, see Page 250.
Aligning the cutterbar in longitudinal direction
„ Position the spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.
„ Use the spirit level (1) to align the cutterbar, if necessary use wedges to align it horizontally.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
345
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.8
Check guard cloths
1
BM000-527
„ Move the side mounted mowers to the transport position.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).
„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the inspection hole (1).
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque, see Page 280.
19.8
Check guard cloths
ü All mowing units are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
1
BMG000-045
„ Visually inspect the guard cloths (1) to ensure that there are no cracks or damage.
Æ If there are no cracks or damages, the machine can be used.
Æ If there are cracks or damage, the machine must not be used. Replace the guard cloths
before starting work.
19.9
Vent friction clutch
NOTICE
Interventions in the friction clutch will lead to a loss of guarantee!
Interventions in the friction clutch change the slip torque. Therefore the machine may be
damaged considerably.
„ Never intervene in the overload protection.
„ Only use KRONE original spare parts.
The friction clutch protects the machine from damage. It is designed with a permanently
adjusted turning torque MR. The torque is stamped on the housing of the friction clutch.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
346
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Vent friction clutch
19.9
Before initial start-up and once a year before the season, the friction clutch must be bled. This
will detach adhesions from the friction lining. Therefore functionality will be maintained and the
service life increased.
ü All mowing units are in working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The universal shafts on the mowers have been dismounted, front mounted mower, see
Page 139, side mounted mowers, see Page 146.
„ Follow the operating instructions of the universal shaft manufacturer.
Walterscheid series K90
2
1
1
4
5
1
3
4
BM000-347
Vent friction clutch
„ Loosen the 6 nuts (1) crosswise and disassemble.
„ Undo the 6 screws (4) until the screw ends are flush with the shaft flange (3).
„ Undo the coupling hub (5).
Restarting the friction clutch
„ Tighten the 6 screws (4) with a tightening torque of MA=20 Nm.
„ Mount the 6 nuts (1) to a tightening torque of MA=49 Nm.
To place the machine in service again, switch on the PTO shaft. When the friction clutch has
been bled, the mowing discs/mower drums must not also rotate, should this be the case, the
friction clutch is stuck or rusty and must be taken apart (remove any friction lining from the
plates, if necessary smooth the friction linings with sandpaper). Then re-attach the universal
shaft and bleed the friction clutch again.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
347
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.10 Raising mowers
19.10
Raising mowers
WARNING
Risk of injury due to raised machine
There is a risk to individuals from the machine falling and parts which are swinging in an
uncontrolled manner.
„ Use only permitted hoists and slings with a sufficient load-bearing capacity.
„ Note the information on the anchor points provided.
„ Make sure the lifting means are properly secured.
„ Never stay under the suspended machine.
„ If work has to be performed under the machine, securely support the machine, see
Page 33.
Lifting points on the mowers
Front mounted mowers:
1
1
1
BMG000-060
ü The front mowing unit has been uncoupled, see Page 138.
„ Use a hoist with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 3000 kg.
„ To raise the front mowing unit, use the lifting points (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
348
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – mowing units
19
Raising mowers 19.10
Side mounted mowers:
With version "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood"
1
1
2
BMG000-059
ü The side mounted mowers have been dismounted, see Page 143.
„ Use a hoist with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 3000 kg.
„ To be able to attach a hoist to the lifting points (1), mount 1 ring nut (M16 Zn8) with
2 discs (17 x 40 x 6 Zn8) and 1 hexagon head screw (M16 x 90 Zn8).
„ To raise the side mounted mower, use the lifting points (1, 2).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
349
19
Maintenance – mowing units
19.10 Raising mowers
With version "Standard swathing"
1
2
2
BMG000-058
The side mounted mowers have been dismounted, see Page 143.
„ Use a hoist with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 3,000 kg.
„ To be able to attach a hoist to the lifting point (1), take a ring screw out of the rear storage
compartment, see Page 68.
„ Mount the ring screw (M16 x 27 Zn8).
„ To raise the side mounted mower, use the lifting points (1, 2).
„ Dismount the ring screw and place it in the rear storage compartment.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
350
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
20
Maintenance - Lubrication
20
Lubricating universal shafts
20.1
Maintenance - Lubrication
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
NOTICE
Environmental damage caused by consumables
If consumables are not stored and disposed of properly, they may escape into the
environment. As a result, the environment will be damaged, even by small quantities.
„ Store the consumables in suitable containers according to the statutory provisions.
„ Dispose of used consumables according to statutory provisions.
NOTICE
Damage to bearing points
When using lubricating greases not approved and when mixing different lubricating greases,
the lubricated parts may be damaged.
„ Only use approved lubricating greases, see Page 80.
„ Do not use graphite-containing lubricating greases.
„ Do not mix different lubricating greases.
20.1
Lubricating universal shafts
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The cutting height at the mowers is set to 0°, see Page 250.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
351
20
Maintenance - Lubrication
20.1
Lubricating universal shafts
BM000-149
1
3
Universal shaft drive
4
Right side mounted mower with freewheel*
Universal shaft drive
5
Left side mounted mowing unit with freewheel*
Universal shaft drive front output**
6
*
Version W
2
**
Universal shaft drive front mounted
mower **
Universal shaft cutterbar drive*
Universal shaft drive conditioner drive
with freewheel*
Version P
Lubrication intervals version P
BM000-151
Lubrication intervals version W
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
352
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
100h
100h
100h
250h
Maintenance - Lubrication
20
Lubricate the intermediate gear
20.2
250h 100h
100h
250h
100h 100h
250h
1
BM000-150
„ Follow the operating instructions for the universal shaft manufacturer.
„ Lubricate all joints, guard bearings and section tubes at the specified lubrication intervals
using multi-purpose grease.
Additionally for universal shafts with freewheel:
„ Lubricate the freewheel (1) via the grease nipple at the specified lubrication interval using
multi-purpose grease.
20.2
Lubricate the intermediate gear
„ Lubrication interval, see Page 270.
BM000-197
ü The side mounted mowers are in working position.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The swath cloth under the machine has been removed.
ü For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood": The deflector curtain
between the cross conveyor and machine frame has been removed from the machine
frame.
„ Remove the dirt in the area around the locking screws (1).
„ Unscrew the 2 locking screws (1).
„ Carefully remove threadlocker residue from the threads of the open boreholes to prevent
residue from getting inside.
„ Screw 2 conical grease nipples M8 x 1 into the open boreholes.
„ NOTE! Damage to the intermediate gear due to use of incorrect lubricating grease!
Use only Mobilgrease XHP 222 lubricating grease.
„ Lubricate each conical grease nipple with 65 g lubricating grease.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
353
20
Maintenance - Lubrication
20.3
Lubrication chart - machine
„ WARNING! Risk of injury due to activated drives. Ensure that no one remains in the
danger zone of the machine.
„ Leave the mower drives running for 15 min.
„ „Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Remove leaked lubricating grease.
„ Unscrew the 2 conical grease nipples.
„ Mount the previously dismounted locking screws using a threadlocker (e.g. Loctite medium
strength).
„ For version with "Swath merging system with hydraulic hood": Mount the deflector
curtain between the cross conveyor and machine frame.
20.3
Lubrication chart - machine
The information on maintenance intervals is based on average load of the machine. In case of
an increased load and under extreme working conditions, the time periods must be reduced.
The types of lubrication are marked by means of icons in the lubrication chart, refer to table.
Type of lubrication
Lubricant
Comment
Grease
Multi-purpose grease
„ Apply two strokes of
lubricating grease from the
grease gun per grease
nipple.
„ Remove excess lubricating
grease at the grease nipple.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
354
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Lubrication
20
Lubrication chart - machine
20.3
8
7
1
9
2
6
5
4
3
BMG000-036
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
355
20
Maintenance - Lubrication
20.3
Lubrication chart - machine
every 100 operating hours
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
356
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
21
Maintenance – Central Lubrication System
21
Lubricants
21.1
Maintenance – Central Lubrication System
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
NOTICE
Damage to the machine due to the use of incorrect and contaminated lubricants
Unauthorised or contaminated lubricants in the central lubrication unit will cause malfunctions
in the central lubrication unit and damage the bearing positions.
„ When working on the central lubrication unit, use clean and suitable tools.
„ Use authorised lubricants only.
„ Ensure that dirt or dirty lubricant cannot get into the central lubrication unit.
21.1
Lubricants
Standard commercial greases, recommended by vehicle manufacturer or grease manufacturer,
with adequate suction and flow characteristics at –25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mbars) are
used as lubricants. They must not have a tendency to bleed. This can produce depositions in
the lines during extended operation.
MoS2 greases (up to 5% molybdenum disulphide) can be conveyed with progressive pumps
and distributor blocks.
Approved lubricating grease:
•
•
KRONE lubricating grease, mat. no. 270275690 (400-g container), and
KRONE lubricating grease, mat. no. 270275680 (50-kg container).
Lubricating greases with the following characteristics are also approved:
•
•
Grease up to NLGI class 2 with EP additives must be adjusted to the outside temperatures.
Thickener: Lithium Complex
Basic oil viscosity at 40°C: 85-180 mm2/s
Mixing lubricating greases with different thickeners is not permitted.
Contact your dealer of lubricant supplier.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
357
21
Maintenance – Central Lubrication System
21.2
Filling the lubricant tank
21.2
Filling the lubricant tank
BMG000-022
The lubricant tank can be filled via the conical grease nipple (1) or via the connector (2).
There are two different ways to top up the container by means of a standard grease gun:
•
•
directly via conical grease nipple (1)
via a filler neck screwed in instead of the conical grease nipple
Topping up lubricant tank via a filler neck
BX001-386
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Dismount the conical grease nipple (3) on the lubricant tank and mount the filler neck
27 001 594 * (4).
„ Mount the coupling sleeve 27 001 595 * (2) on the filling pump (1).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
358
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – Central Lubrication System
21
Check filling level
21.3
Topping up lubricant tank using a filling cylinder
BMG000-023
„ Dismount the double nipple (1) on the reducer (2).
„ Mount the filling connection with nonreturn valve M20x1.5 900041580 (3) with sealing ring.
„ To fill, remove the protective caps on the nonreturn valve M20x1.5 900041580 (3) and on
the filling cylinder 940 393 * (4).
21.3
Check filling level
NOTICE
Damage to the machine due to lack of lubrication
If the machine is not adequately lubricated, the affected components will be damaged.
„ Ensure that the lubricant tank of central lubrication system is always adequately full.
„ Visually check the filling level by the transparent lubricant tank.
The following error message appears in the terminal when the lubricant tank is empty:
„ “Lubrication tank of central lubrication” empty
To ensure that the machine can be lubricated sufficiently again:
„ Stop the machine and refill the lubricant tank.
21.4
Starting intermediate lubrication
BMG000-014
The lubrication interval is preset ex works. The factory setting is 30 min for the interval duration
and 27 for the number of clock cycles per lubrication interval (corresponds to a grease quantity
of 25 ml).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
359
21
Maintenance – Central Lubrication System
21.4
Starting intermediate lubrication
To start intermediate lubrication manually:
„ Open the "Central Lubrication" "Maintenance" menu on the terminal and press the "Start
intermediate lubrication" key.
The central lubrication system performs intermediate lubrication.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
360
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
22
Maintenance - Hydraulic System
22
Pressure limiting valves
22.1
Maintenance - Hydraulic System
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
WARNING
Hydraulic hoses are subject to ageing
Hydraulic hoses may wear depending on pressure, heat load and the effect of UV rays.
People can be seriously injured or killed by damaged hydraulic hoses.
The date of manufacture appears on the hydraulic hoses. This way the age can be
ascertained quickly.
Replacement of the hydraulic hoses is recommended after a lifetime of six years.
„ Use original spare parts when replacing hoses.
NOTICE
Damage to the machine due to soiling of the hydraulic system
If foreign objects or liquids get into the hydraulic system, the hydraulic system may be
severely damaged.
„ Clean hydraulic connections and components before removal.
„ Seal open hydraulic connections with protective caps.
„ Ensure that foreign objects or liquids do not get into the hydraulic system.
NOTICE
Storing and disposing of oils and used oil filters
If oil and used oil filters are not stored and disposed of properly, the environment may be
damaged.
„ Store or dispose of used oil and oil filters according to statutory provisions.
22.1
Pressure limiting valves
The control blocks are fitted with pressure limiting valves. These valves have been preset in the
factory and must not be changed.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
361
22
Maintenance - Hydraulic System
22.2
Hydraulic oil
NOTICE
The pressure limiting valves on the machine have been preset in the factory. Work on the
pressure limiting valves may be performed by KRONE customer service only.
22.2
Hydraulic oil
NOTICE
Damage to the hydraulic system caused by non approved hydraulic oils
If non-approved hydraulic oils or a mixture of different oils are used, the hydraulic system may
be damaged.
„ Never mix different types of oil.
„ Never use engine oil.
„ Use approved hydraulic oils only.
Filling quantities and types of oil, see Page 77.
22.3
Maintaining hydraulic oil tank
BM000-137
Checking hydraulic oil tank level
The oil level in the hydraulic oil tank (1) is queried electrically and displayed on the terminal.
There is also a sight glass (2) on the hydraulic oil tank (1).
INFO
To display the hydraulic oil level at the terminal, the machine must be in the transport
position.
For the hydraulic oil level to be displayed correctly in the sight glass, the machine must be in
the working position.
If the machine is in the working position, the sight glass displays the maximum filling level.
If the machine is in the transport position, the sight glass displays the minimum filling level.
Oil level check via sight glass:
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
362
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Hydraulic System
22
Maintaining hydraulic oil tank
22.3
The hydraulic oil must be topped up to the maximum level in the sight glass (2).
„ Top up hydraulic oil if necessary, see Page 363.
Topping up hydraulic oil
BM000-229
The oil filler neck is located under the cover sheet (1) on the top of the machine behind the
cabin.
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Unscrew the screws (2) from the cover sheet (1) and take off the cover sheet.
„ Dismount the cover (3) from the oil filler neck.
„ Top up hydraulic oil and mount the cover (3).
„ Mount the cover sheet (1) using the screws (2).
Changing oil in the hydraulic oil tank
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
BM000-230
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
363
22
Maintenance - Hydraulic System
22.3
Maintaining hydraulic oil tank
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Dismount the screws on the right side guard (1) and remove the guard.
„ Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 60 litres).
„ Clean thoroughly around the oil drain sleeve (2).
„ Remove the drain hose from the rear storage compartment, see Page 68 and place one end
in the collecting vessel. Mount the other end of the drain hose on the oil drain sleeve (2). As
a result, the oil drain valve is automatically opened and the hydraulic oil flows into the
collecting vessel.
„ Dismount the drain hose and place it in the rear storage compartment.
„ Top up the hydraulic oil up to the middle of the sight glass, see Page 363. Amount and
specification, see Page 77.
„ Run the diesel engine at a low idle speed for approx. 10 seconds.
„ Turn off the diesel engine.
„ Check the hydraulic oil tank level, top up the hydraulic oil if required.
„ Repeat the process until the oil level no longer drops.
„ Mount the right side guard (1).
Changing the return suction filter of the hydraulic oil tank
BM000-232
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Unscrew the screws (2) from the cover sheet (1) and take off the cover sheet.
„ To bleed pressure from the hydraulic oil tank, open the oil filling pipe (3) of the hydraulic oil
tank.
„ Unscrew the cover (4).
„ Gently turn the filter element, pull it out and drain the hydraulic oil.
„ Clean the housing and cover.
„ Wet the sealing surfaces and O-ring seals of the new filter element with oil and insert by
gently turning it.
„ Install a new O-ring on the cover.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
364
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Hydraulic System
22
Changing high-pressure filter
22.4
„ Attach the cover (4) and screw it tight (20 Nm)
„ Start the diesel engine and run at idle speed.
„ Check the return suction filter for leaks.
22.4
Changing high-pressure filter
BM000-231
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 95.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Unscrew the screws on the left side guard (1) and remove the guard.
„ Dismount and clean the filter housing (2).
„ By gently moving the filter element back and forth, remove it downwards from the retainer
piece and replace it with a new filter element.
„ Check the O-ring on the filter housing for damage and replace if necessary.
„ Moisten the thread and the sealing surfaces with hydraulic oil.
„ Attach the filter housing (2) and tighten it as far as it will go. Then turn back one quarter of a
revolution.
„ Start the diesel engine and check the screw connections of the high-pressure filter for leaks.
22.5
Checking hydraulic hoses
Hydraulic hoses are subject to natural aging. This limits their service life. The recommended
service life is 6 years, including a maximum storage time of 2 years. The date of manufacture is
printed on the hydraulic hoses. When checking hydraulic hoses, the state-specific conditions
(e.g., BGVU) must be observed.
Performing a visual inspection
„ Visually inspect all hydraulic hoses for damage and leaks and have them replaced by an
authorised specialist if necessary.
22.6
Draining oil from the trailing oil line
The two trailing oil lines are each located on the cylinder for lifting the side mounted mower. The
best way to reach the trailing oil line is from below, in the centre under the portal (3).
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
365
22
Maintenance - Hydraulic System
22.6
Draining oil from the trailing oil line
2
3
1
4
BM000-526
ü The machine is in the working position, see Page 184.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Clean the area around the trailing oil line and ensure that no foreign objects get into the
hydraulic system.
„ Unscrew the union nut (2).
A suitable container is available for the draining oil.
„ Remove the sealing plug (1).
„ Collect the draining oil in the container (4) and do not remove the container (4) until the oil
has stopped draining.
„ Dispose of the oil properly, see Page 27.
„ Mount the sealing plug (1).
„ Mount the union nut (2).
„ Repeat the process for the other side.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
366
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – Electrics
23
23
Maintenance – Electrics
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
WARNING
Danger to life due to exploding battery gas
Highly explosive battery gas may escape from the battery
„ Keep ignition sources and naked flames away from the battery.
„ Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.
NOTICE
Damage to the electrical system due to incorrect polarity of the battery
Non-observance of the correct polarity between the battery and alternator may severely
damage the electrical system.
„ First connect the positive pole of the battery.
„ Then connect the negative terminal of the battery.
INFO
An overview of all control units, circuit boards and fuses can be found in the circuit diagram,
which is part of the other applicable documents that was delivered with the machine.
NOTICE
Damage to electronic components due to voltage peaks
If the supply voltage is interrupted while the machine is running, voltage peaks may occur.
This can cause electronic components to be damaged.
„ Switch off the diesel engine.
„ Interrupt the circuit with the main battery switch, see Page 178.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
367
23
Maintenance – Electrics
23.1
Batteries
23.1
Batteries
WARNING
Risk of injury due to a short circuit of the battery poles
When working on the batteries, carelessness may result in a short circuit of the battery poles.
A high current flows that may result in an electric shock, burns or explosion of the batteries.
As a result, people may be seriously injured.
„ When working on the batteries, make sure the positive pole does not come into contact
with the negative pole or the frame.
„ Guard the battery poles with insulating caps against contact.
BMG000-013
1
2
Battery compartment
Battery (12 V)
3
Battery (12 V)
The batteries (2) and (3) are located behind the cover of the battery compartment (1) in the
storage compartment under the left platform.
23.1.1
Cleaning and maintaining batteries
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ To keep the battery surface clean and dry, clean the batteries with a damp or anti-static
cloth only.
„ Protect the battery terminals and connecting terminals from corrosion by applying terminal
grease to the battery terminals and connecting terminals.
„ Use a brush to remove any oxidation from the pole terminal.
„ When batteries are removed and placed in storage, regularly check the charge state or use
a charge maintenance device. If the open-circuit voltage is below 12.3 V, recharge the
battery.
„ Keep removed batteries cool, dry and charged.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
368
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
23.1.2
Maintenance – Electrics
23
Batteries
23.1
Charging batteries
BMG000-015
The voltage of the machine's wiring system is 24 V. Two 12 V batteries are connected in series
and supply the vehicle electronics with 24 V.
To charge and maintain the charge, the batteries must be connected to a battery charger.
The voltage of the battery charger must correspond to the voltage of the wiring system (24 V).
The vehicle electronics will be damaged if a battery charger with a higher or lower voltage is
used.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Open the storage compartment under the left platform.
„ Take off the cover cap (1).
„ First connect the positive cable of the charger to the external start point (3) under the battery
compartment.
„ Then connect the negative cable of the charger to the short circuit to ground (2) under the
battery compartment.
„ Switch on the battery charger
„ When the batteries have been charged, switch off the battery charger.
„ Disconnect the negative cable of the battery charger from the ground connection (2).
„ Disconnect the positive cable of the battery charger from the external start connection (3).
„ Attach the cover cap (1).
„ Close the battery compartment.
23.1.3
Replacing batteries
Disconnecting the batteries
BMG000-016
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
369
23
Maintenance – Electrics
23.1
Batteries
ü The machine is shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The battery compartment is open.
„ Remove the insulating caps (1) by loosening the cable ties.
„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC1/-) of the negative cable (2) from the negative pole of
battery C1 (5).
„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC2/+.1) of the positive cable (3) from the positive pole of
battery C2 (6).
„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC2/-) of the cable (4) from the negative pole of battery C2 (6).
„ Dismount the pole terminal (XC1/+) of the cable (4) from the positive pole of battery C1 (5).
Removing batteries
BMG000-017
Each battery weighs approx. 37 kg.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The batteries have been disconnected, see Page 369.
„ Unscrew the screw (1) and put the retaining sheet (2) aside.
„ Dismount the side cover from the battery compartment (5).
„ Unscrew the nut (6) to remove the screw (7) with the lashing strap over the batteries.
„ Remove battery C1 (3) and battery C2 (4) from the battery compartment.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
370
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance – Electrics
23
Batteries
23.1
Installing batteries
BMG000-017
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Insert battery C1 (3) and battery C2 (4) into the battery compartment.
„ Insert the retaining sheet (2) and mount the screw (1).
„ Tension the lashing strap over the batteries (4, 5).
„ Mount the screw (7) on the lashing strap with the nut (6).
„ Mount the side cover of the battery compartment (5).
„ Connect the batteries, see Page 371.
Connecting a battery
BMG000-016
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
„ Mount the pole terminal (XC1/+) of the cable (4) on the positive pole of battery C1 (5)
(tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).
„ Mount the pole terminal (XC2/-) of the cable (4) on the negative pole of battery C2 (6)
(tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).
„ Mount the pole terminal (XC2/+.1) of the positive cable (3) on the positive pole of
battery C2 (6) (tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).
„ Mount the pole terminal (XC1/-) of the negative cable (2) on the negative pole of
battery C1 (5) (tightening torque = 6 ±1 Nm).
„ Attach the insulating caps (1) and fix with cable ties.
„ Close the battery compartment.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
371
23
Maintenance – Electrics
23.2
Maintaining starter
23.2
Maintaining starter
1
BXG000-064
If the starter (1) fails or is not working satisfactorily
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Ensure that after switching off the main battery switch, the main battery switch LED no
longer lights up or flashes.
„ Determine the possible cause of the fault.
„ Attempt to eliminate the possible cause according to the following list.
Malfunction: The starter fails or is not working satisfactorily.
Possible cause
Remedy
The connection cable to the
starter is loose
„ Tighten the cable connections (2) to a tightening torque of
24 ±4 Nm and the cable connection (3) to a tightening
torque of 4 +0.6/-0.3 Nm.
The cable connections are
corroded.
„ Clean the cable connections on the starter and engine.
The magnetic switch of the
starter is defective
„ Have the starter checked by a qualified service centre.
If the damage cannot be repaired based on the suggestions, contact your KRONE dealer.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
372
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
24
Maintenance - Gearbox
24
Overview of gearboxes
24.1
Maintenance - Gearbox
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
24.1
Overview of gearboxes
1
3
2
4
6
5
4
7
6
BXG000-036
1
2
3
4
Input gearbox on front mounted mower
Main gearbox on front mounted mower
Transfer gearbox
Rear wheel hub gearbox (option)
5
6
7
Main gearbox left side mounted mower
Front wheel hub gearbox
Main gearbox right side mounted mower
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
373
24
Maintenance - Gearbox
24.2
Maintaining transfer gearbox
24.2
Maintaining transfer gearbox
1
BM000-135
Checking gearbox oil level
ü The main frame of the machine has been aligned horizontally.
ü 5 to 10 minutes have elapsed after the engine was switched off.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
The oil level must reach the middle of the sight glass (1).
If the oil does not reach the middle of the sight glass (1):
„ Top up gear oil, see Page 374.
Topping up gear oil
1
BMG000-053
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Use a hexagon wrench to remove the locking screw from the oil filling hole (1).
„ Top up the gear oil up to the middle of the sight glass, see Page 374.
„ Screw the locking screw (1) back into the oil filling hole.
„ Run the engine at a low idle speed for a short time and switch off the engine.
„ Check the gear oil level after approx. 5 to 10 minutes, see Page 374.
Changing gear oil
ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
374
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Maintenance - Gearbox
24
Maintaining transfer gearbox
24.2
1
BM000-247
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Remove the drain hose from the rear storage compartment and place one end in the
collecting vessel. Mount the other end of the drain hose on the oil drain sleeve (1). As a
result, the oil drain valve is automatically opened and the gear oil flows into the collecting
vessel.
„ Dismount the drain hose and place it in the rear storage compartment.
„ Fill up with fresh gear oil, see Page 374.
Changing the filter
1
2
3
BM000-344
The filter (1) is located on the right side of the machine in front of the transfer gearbox and can
be accessed from below the machine.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
ü The right side hood is open.
ü A suitable container for collecting escaping oil is available.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Unscrew the filter housing (2).
„ Clean the filter housing (2).
„ Remove the filter element (3).
„ Check the O-ring seals on the filter housing (2) and on the filter seat for damage and replace
if required.
„ Connect the new filter element and ensure that the filter element is not soiled.
„ Screw on the filter housing (2) to a tightening torque of 100 Nm.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
375
24
Maintenance - Gearbox
24.3
Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower
24.3
Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower
BMG000-033
INFO
The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with
machine in horizontal position.
„ The guard for the input gearbox is removed, see Page 316.
Checking the oil level
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).
ð If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque see Page 280.
ð If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):
„ Unscrew the locking screw in the filling hole (3).
„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling
hole (3), tightening torque see Page 280.
Changing the oil
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Unscrew the locking screw (2) from the filling hole (3).
„ Extract the old oil from the gearbox.
„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw (2) into the filling
hole (3), tightening torque see Page 280.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
376
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
24.4
Maintenance - Gearbox
24
Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower
24.4
Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower
BMG000-030
INFO
The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with
machine in horizontal position.
Checking the oil level
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).
ð If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque see Page 280.
ð If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):
„ Unscrew the locking screw in the filling hole (3).
„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling
hole (3), tightening torque see Page 280.
Changing the oil
ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw of the filling
hole (3).
„ Unscrew the drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
„ Mount the drain plug (2), tightening torque see Page 280.
„ Top up with fresh oil via the filling hole (3) up to the inspection hole (1).
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling
hole (3), tightening torque see Page 280.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
377
24
Maintenance - Gearbox
24.5
Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers
24.5
Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers
KMG000-22
INFO
The oil level must be checked and the oil must be changed in working position and with
machine in horizontal position.
Checking the oil level
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (1).
ð If the oil reaches the inspection hole (1):
„ Mount the locking screw of the inspection hole (1); tightening torque see Page 280.
ð If the oil does not reach the inspection hole (1):
„ Unscrew the locking screw in the filling hole (3).
„ Refill with fresh oil up to the inspection hole (1) via the filling hole (3).
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling
hole (3), tightening torque see Page 280.
Changing the oil
ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw of the filling
hole (3).
„ Unscrew the drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
„ Mount the drain plug (2), tightening torque see Page 280.
„ Top up with fresh oil via the filling hole (3) up to the inspection hole (1).
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (1) and the locking screw into the filling
hole (3), tightening torque see Page 280.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
378
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
24.6
Maintenance - Gearbox
24
Maintaining wheel hub gearbox
24.6
Maintaining wheel hub gearbox
NOTICE
Damage to the wheel hub gearboxes caused by use of incorrect gearbox oil
When incorrect gearbox oil is used, the wheel hub gearboxes could be damaged during
operation.
„ Only use SHELL SPIRAX S4 CX 50 gearbox oil to refill or change the gearbox oil in the
wheel hub gearboxes.
„ If this gearbox oil is not available, contact your KRONE service partner.
24.6.1
Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right
BM000-227 / BM000-228
I
Front wheel hub gearbox
II
Wheel hub gearbox rear (optional)
Checking oil level
ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Position the wheel until the filling hole (1) is in the top position.
„ Thoroughly clean the area around the locking screw of the filling hole (1) and the locking
screw of the inspection hole (2).
WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gear oil escaping under pressure. Wear personal
protective equipment such as gloves and safety glasses and carefully loosen the locking
screw of the filling hole.
„ To reduce the pressure, carefully remove the locking screw from the filling hole (1) from a
lateral position.
ð The pressure in the wheel hub gearbox is reduced.
„ Screw the locking screw into the filling hole (1).
„ Place the wheel so that the drain plug (3) is in the lowest position.
„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection hole (2).
„ Check whether the oil level reaches up to the inspection hole (2).
If the oil reaches the inspection hole:
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (2), tightening torque see Page 280.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
379
24
Maintenance - Gearbox
24.6
Maintaining wheel hub gearbox
If the oil does not reach the inspection hole:
„ Remove the locking screw from the filling hole (1).
„ Top up new oil via the filling hole (1) up to the inspection hole (2).
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw into the filling
hole (1), tightening torque see Page 280.
Changing the oil
ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.
NOTE! Risk of machine damage due to improperly performed oil level check, oil and filter
element change! Follow the safety routine "Oil level check. Changing oil and filter
elements safely", see Page 34.
„ Position the wheel until the filling hole (1) is in the top position.
„ Thoroughly clean the area around the locking screw of the filling hole (1) and the locking
screw of the inspection hole (2).
WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gear oil escaping under pressure. Wear personal
protective equipment such as gloves and safety glasses and carefully loosen the locking
screw of the filling hole.
„ To reduce the pressure, carefully remove the locking screw from the filling hole (1) from a
lateral position.
ð The pressure in the wheel hub gearbox is reduced.
„ Screw the locking screw into the filling hole (1).
„ Position the wheel until the drain plug (3) is in the lowest position.
„ Thoroughly clean the area around the drain plug (3)
„ Place a suitable container under the drain hole (3).
„ Unscrew the drain plug (3) and drain the oil into the container.
„ Unscrew the locking screw of the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw of the filling hole
(1).
„ Mount the drain plug (3), tightening torque see Page 280.
„ Top up new oil via filling hole (1) up to the inspection hole (2).
„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection hole (2) and the locking screw into the filling
hole (1), tightening torque see Page 280.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
380
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics
25.1
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices
If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.
„ To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, see
Page 19.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions
If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.
„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents, see Page 33.
25.1
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics
25.1.1
Overview of control units
An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit
diagram.
25.1.2
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
A2
KMC (operating control)
A32
TRM (terminal)
A3
DRC (drive computer)
A 34
KSC (KRONE SmartConnect)
Overview of fuses
The fuses of the "distributor block - supply of fuses" are located on the left-hand machine side in
the battery compartment below the batteries.
BM000-274
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
A19
Distributor block - supply of fuses
A19.F3
Power supply - cabin electronics
A19.F1
Reserve
A19.F4
Battery cut-off relay momentary
switch
A19.F2
Power supply - cabin output
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
381
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.1
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics
BX000-276
The "central electrical system" circuit board (1) is located in the console in the cabin.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
382
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics
25.1
BM000-268
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
383
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.1
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
A1.F1
Diagnostics socket ISOBUS
A1.F54
KMC 200: voltage group UB5
A1.F5
Built in-socket 3-pole, cooling box
socket
A1.F55
KMC 200: voltage group UB6
A1.F7
Socket ISOBUS In-cab
A1.F58
Voltage converter T1
A1.F13
Automatic climate control, evaporator blower fan/PWM
A1.F59
Voltage converter T2
A1.F14
LMB-ECU2: ignition stage 2
A1.F67
Urea hose heating 1, 2
A1.F15
KRONE diagnostics socket: ignition
stage 1
A1.F68
Voltage group UB1
A1.F16
Radio, CB radio: ignition stage 1
A1.F69
Voltage group UB2
A1.F17
Driver's seat: ignition stage 1
A1.F70
Voltage group UB3
A1.F19
Cigarette lighter
A1.F71
SCR heating valve 1, 2
A1.F23
Diesel engine relay for Smart Components
A1.F78
Front function module: voltage group
UB3
A1.F25
Terminal: power supply
A1.F79
Front function module: voltage group
UB4
A1.F26
Voltage converter switch-on signal
A1.F80
Radio, CB radio interior lamp door
switch
A1.F27
Steering column, radio, mirror adjusting switch: background lighting
A1.F81
Mirror adjusting switch: power supply
A1.F28
KMC 200, KP4
A1.F87
Front function module: voltage group
UB1
A1.F29
Steering column, armrest, function
modules, camera system: ignition
stage 2
A1.F88
Front function module: voltage group
UB2
A1.F30
DRC, KRONE SmartConnect: ignition stage 2
A1.F89
Rear function module: voltage group
UB1
A1.F31
Armrest
A1.F90
Rear function module: voltage group
UB2
A1.F39
Right wiper
A1.F91
Rear function module: voltage group
UB3
A1.F40
Front wiper
A1.F92
Rear function module: voltage group
UB4
A1.F41
Left wiper
A1.F93
Function module: electronics supply
A1.F43
CAN module
A1.F94
KMC 200: electronics supply
A1.F44
DRC: continuous voltage
A1.F95
Diagnostic socket: OBD
A1.F45
DRC: continuous voltage
A1.F96
Steering column, armrest, ladder
lighting momentary switch: electronics supply
A1.F50
KMC 200: voltage group UB1
A1.F97
Ignition lock
A1.F51
KMC 200: voltage group UB2
A1.F98
DRC, Motor Control Module: electronics supply
A1.F52
KMC 200: voltage group UB3
A1.F99
Diagnostics socket: ISOBUS,
KRONE
A1.F53
KMC 200: voltage group UB4
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
384
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
25.1.3
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics
25.1
Overview sensors
Possible sensors (depending on the machine configuration)
An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit
diagram.
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
B1
Position front mounted mower on left
B36
Wheel motor rear left
B2
Position front mounted mower on right B37
Wheel motor rear right
B3
Position mower on left
B41
NOx downstream catalytic converter
B4
Transport mower left
B42
NOx upstream catalytic converter
B5
Position mower on right
B43
Extraction module urea tank (filling
level)
B6
Transport mower right
B44
Ambient temperature
B7
Position rear axle on left
B45
Coolant filling level
B9
Position front axle
B47
Automatic climate control pressure
B10
Inclination front mounted mower
B49
Switch central lubrication cycle
B11
Inclination mower on right
B51
Exhaust gas temperature upstream of
catalytic converter
B12
Inclination mower on left
B53
Air filter contamination
B13
Position side shift front mounted
mower
B54
Water in fuel
B14
Constant pressure
B56
Gearbox oil pressure
B15
Pressure filter work hydraulics/steering B57
hydraulics
Exhaust gas temperature DOC
B16
Filter pressure control
B58
Camera
B17
Brake accumulator pressure
B59
Exhaust gas temperature downstream
of catalytic converter
B18
Steering angle rear axle
B60
Differential pressure sensor SCR filter
B19
Parking brake pressure
B70
Ambient temperature sensor
B20
Steering pressure
B71
Blow-out temperature sensor
B21
Rotational speed front mounted
mower
B142
Vehicle inclination
B22
Rotational speed of left mower
M15.
B701
Oil pressure sensor
B23
Rotational speed auger conveyor on
left
M15.
B702
Fuel pressure sensor
B24
Rotational speed of right mower
M15.
B703
Charge air pressure sensor
B25
Rotational speed auger conveyor on
right
M15.
B704
Rail pressure sensor
B26
Rotational speed front cutterbar
M15.
B707
Charge air temperature sensor
B27
Hydraulic oil filling level
M15.
B708
Coolant temperature sensor
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
385
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.1
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics
25.1.4
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
B28
Fuel tank filling level
M15.
B709
Fuel temperature sensor
B29
Pressure pump MA
M15.
B711
Crankshaft rotational speed
B30
Pressure pump MB
M15.
B713
Camshaft rotational speed
B31
Swivel angle pump
M15.
B730
Oil temperature
B32
Druck Betriebsbremse
A21.B Air pressure urea
1
B33
Brake pedal angle
A21.B Urea pressure/temperature
2
B34
Wheel motor front left
A22.B NH3
1
B35
Wheel motor front right
Overview of actuators
An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit
diagram.
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
A21.K Urea pump module
1
A21.
M1
Urea pump module
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
G1
Alternator
G5
Central lubrication pump
G2
Urea air compressor
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
K1
Wheel motor front left
K4
Wheel motor rear right
K2
Wheel motor front right
K5
Drive pump forward
K3
Wheel motor rear left
K6
Drive pump backward
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
M1
Starter
M6
Anti-collision mirror
M3
Windscreen water pump
M10
Left wiper
M4
Mirror left
M11
Right wiper
M5
Mirror right on right
M12
Automatic climate control compressor
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
Q1
Pressure control valve front mounted
mower on left
Q24
Cutting height on left 2
Q2
Pressure control valve front mounted
mower on right
Q25
Cutting height on right 1
Q3
Front mounted mower on left
Q26
Cutting height right 2
Q4
Front mounted mower on right
Q27
Swath hood on left
Q5
Pressure control valve mower on left
Q28
Swath hood on right
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
386
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
25.1.5
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics
25.1
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
Q6
Left mower
Q29
Side shift front mounted mower 1
Q7
Pendulum stop mower on left
Q30
Side shift front mounted mower 1
Q8
Lock mower on left
Q31
Side guard front 1
Q9
Pressure control valve mower on right
Q32
Side guard front 2
Q10
Mower right
Q33
CR roll distance
Q11
Pendulum stop mower on right
Q34
CR roll opening
Q12
Lock mower on right
Q36
Parking brake
Q13
Drive front mounted mower
Q37
Side shift front mounted mower left
Q14
Drive mower on left
Q38
Side shift front mounted mower right
Q15
Drive mower on right
Q39
Support cylinder rear axle
Q16
Rear axle
Q41
Solenoid valve heating
Q17
Front axle
Q51
Valve heating urea system 1
Q18
Pilot valve 1
Q52
Valve heating urea system 2
Q19
Pilot valve 2
Q62
Steer autopilot on right
Q20
Pressure supply valve
Q63
Steer autopilot on left
Q21
Cutting height front 1
Q64
Block autopilot on left
Q22
Cutting height front 2
Q65
Block autopilot on right
Q23
Cutting height on left 1
Q70
Battery cut-off relay
BMK
Designation
BMK
Designation
M15.
Y703
High-pressure pump volume flow
valve
M15.
Y732
Injection nozzle cylinder 2
M15.
Y705
Wastegate control valve
M15.
Y733
Injection nozzle cylinder 3
M15.
Y707
High-pressure pump pressure control
valve
M15.
Y734
Injection nozzle cylinder 4
M15.
Y715
Exhaust gas flap
M15.
Y735
Injection nozzle cylinder 5
M15.
Y731
Injection nozzle cylinder 1
M15.
Y736
Injection nozzle cylinder 6
Faults on the camera
Fault: No camera image is being received. The graphic
"No camera image available"
is displayed on the terminal.
Possible cause
Remedy
Camera cable not connected
correctly or defective
„ Check connector cable and plug connection for damage and
tight fit.
„ Have defective cables replaced by a KRONE service
partner.
Camera defective
„ Have the camera checked by a KRONE service partner.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
387
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.2
Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit
25.2
Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit
NOTICE
Damage to the machine due to the use of incorrect and contaminated lubricants
Unauthorised or contaminated lubricants in the central lubrication unit will cause malfunctions
in the central lubrication unit and damage the bearing positions.
„ When working on the central lubrication unit, use clean and suitable tools.
„ Use authorised lubricants only.
„ Ensure that dirt or dirty lubricant cannot get into the central lubrication unit.
25.2.1
Distributor blocks of central lubrication system
INFO
The distributor blocks have one grease nipple each (red cap) for lubrication with a grease gun
if required.
The lubrication point is assigned by the numbers on the lubrication lines to the
distributor blocks.
3
2
4
1
5
10
6
9
8
7
BM000-216
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
388
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit
25.2
Distributor block
Lubrication point
1) Main distributor
A1
Front mounted mower
A2
Rear axle on chassis
A3
Central support
A4
Left mower
A5
Outrigger arm left
B1
Front lifting unit
B3
Rear axle
B4
Mower right
B5
Outrigger arm right
Distributor block
Lubrication point
2) Front lifting unit
A1
Front axle
A2
Cylinder lift bottom
A3
Cylinder lift top
A4
Cylinder front lift top
A5
Cylinder front lift bottom
A6
Lower link
B1
Front axle
B2
Cylinder lift bottom
B3
Cylinder lift top
B4
Cylinder front lift top
B5
Cylinder front lift bottom
B6
Lower link
Distributor block
Lubrication point
3) Front mounted
mower
A1
Bearing
A3
Bearing
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
389
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.2
Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit
Distributor block
Lubrication point
4) Central support
A1
Cylinder rod ratchet
A2
Ratchet bearing
A3
Belt tensioner bottom left
A4
Cylinder base ratchet
A5
Lifting cylinder ground
A6
Outrigger bolt rear left
A7
Outrigger bolt front left
B1
Cylinder rod ratchet
B2
Ratchet bearing
B3
Belt tensioner bottom right
B4
Cylinder base ratchet
B5
Lifting cylinder ground
B6
Outrigger bolt rear right
B7
Outrigger bolt front right
Distributor block
Lubrication point
5) Outrigger arm side
mounted mower right
A1
Outrigger cylinder
A2
Rod bottom rear
A3
Cutting cylinder base
A4
Cutting cylinder rod
B2
Rod bottom front
B3
Pendulum stop cylinder rod
B4
Pendulum stop cylinder base
B5
Mower bearing
Distributor block
Lubrication point
6) Side mounted mower B1
right
B2
B3
Outer tine rotor
Outer auger conveyor
Inner auger conveyor
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
390
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit
25.2
Distributor block
Lubrication point
7) Rear axle
A1
Cylinder rod running gear
A2
Push rod
A3
Steering knuckle top
A4
Steering knuckle bottom
B1
Cylinder rod running gear
B2
Push rod
B3
Steering knuckle top
B4
Steering knuckle bottom
B5
V-arm
Distributor block
Lubrication point
8) Rear axle on chassis A1
Lifting cylinder base right
A2
Axle strut right
A3
V-arm
B1
Lifting cylinder base left
B2
Axle strut left
B3
V-arm
Distributor block
Lubrication point
9) Outrigger arm
A1
Outrigger cylinder
Side mounted mower
left
A2
Rod bottom rear
A3
Cutting cylinder base
A4
Cutting cylinder rod
B2
Rod bottom front
B3
Pendulum stop cylinder rod
B4
Pendulum stop cylinder base
B5
Mower bearing
Distributor block
Lubrication point
10) Side mounted
mower left
A1
Outer tine rotor
A2
Outer auger conveyor
A3
Inner auger conveyor
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
391
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.3
External starting of the machine
25.2.2
Searching for the error in the central lubrication system
Jam in the system or at a connected lubrication point
„ Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the main distributor to the subdistributor one
after the other. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when one of the outlet screw
connections is loosened, the connected subdistributor is blocked. If lubricant does not exit
from any of the outlet screw connections, the main distributor is blocked. Clean or replace
the main distributor.
„ Reinstall the outlet screw connections.
„ Loosen the outlet screw connections on the blocked subdistributor. If lubricant suddenly
exits under pressure when unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the connected
lubrication point is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw
connections, the subdistributor is blocked. Clean or replace the blocked subdistributor.
„ Remove the blockage at the lubrication point.
25.3
External starting of the machine
NOTICE
Damage to the machine by connecting the jump-start battery to the starter
If the jump-start battery for jump-starting the machine is connected to the starter, the starter
and the battery will be damaged.
„ Never connect the jump-start battery to the starter.
BM000-016
The power supply of the machine is 24 V. Two 12-volt batteries are connected in series in the
battery compartment (4) to supply the vehicle electronics with 24 V.
If necessary the engine can be started with jump leads and an external voltage source (24 V) if
required.
The voltage of the external voltage source must correspond to the voltage of the vehicle
electronics (24 V).
The vehicle electronics will be damaged if an external voltage source with a
higher or lower voltage is used.
Connecting the jump leads
„ The circuit is open (LED on main battery switch is not lit), see Page 178.
„ Remove the cover cap (1).
„ First connect the positive cable to the positive pole of the external voltage source, then
connect it to the external start connection (3) under the battery compartment (4).
„ Then connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the external voltage source first
and then to the ground connection (2) under the battery compartment.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
392
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Calibrate mower load relief
25.4
Starting the engine
„ Press the main battery switch to close the circuit, see Page 178.
Æ The main battery switch LED is lit.
„ Start the engine.
Remove the jump leads after the engine starts
„ Disconnect negative cable from earth connection (2).
„ Disconnect negative cable from negative pole of external voltage source.
„ Disconnect the positive cable from the external start connection (3).
„ Disconnect positive cable from positive pole of external voltage source.
„ Attach the cover cap (1).
25.4
Calibrate mower load relief
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine
During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.
„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration
process.
Calibrate mower load relief front mounted mower
ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.
ü The machine height has been moved to field position, see Page 232.
ü For the "Side shift front mounted mower" version: The front mounted mower is in the central
position, see Page 185.
ü The mowing functions "Mower load relief calibration front mounted mower" menu has been
opened.
„ Press the "Start calibration" key.
„ Lower the front mounted mower to the ground using the control lever, see Page 95.
„ Hold down the "Lift front mounted mower" key on the control lever until the message
"Calibration successful" is displayed in the terminal, see Page 95.
„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".
Calibrate mower load relief of right side mounted mower
ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.
ü The machine height has been moved to field position, see Page 232.
ü The mowing functions menu "Mower load relief right mower" is open.
„ Lower the side mounted mowers to the ground, see Page 95.
„ Press the "Start calibration" key.
„ Lower the right side mounted mower using the control lever to the ground, see Page 95.
„ Hold down the "Right side mounted mower" key until "Calibration successful" is displayed in
the terminal, see Page 95.
„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
393
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.5
Calibrate traction drive
Calibrate mower load relief of left side mounted mower
ü The machine is parked on a stable, horizontal and even surface.
ü The machine height has been moved to field position, see Page 232.
ü The mowing functions menu "Mower load relief left mower" is open.
„ Lower the side mounted mowers to the ground, see Page 95.
„ Press the "Start calibration" key.
„ Lower the left side mounted mower using the control lever to the ground, see Page 95.
„ Hold down the "Lift left side mounted mower" key until "Calibration successful" is displayed
in the terminal, see Page 95.
„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".
25.5
Calibrate traction drive
Check the brake pedal for plausibility
ü The main mode switch is in the "Neutral mode" position.
ü The diesel engine has been started.
ü The travel function menu "Traction drive calibration" is open.
„ To start calibration, press "Start calibration" in the terminal.
„ Fully actuate the brake pedal for several seconds until "Calibration successful" is displayed
in the terminal.
„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".
25.6
Calibrating the axles
Calibrating the rear axle straight-ahead position
1
2
EQ003-205
This calibration process determines the straight-ahead position of the rear axle.
ü The diesel engine has been started, see Page 167.
ü The main mode switch is in the "Road mode" position or "Field mode" position, see
Page 99.
WARNING! Risk of accidents when calibrating on public roads! Do not perform
calibration on public roads.
„ Perform calibration on a straight and flat path.
„ Open the menu Driving functions > Axles > Calibration > Straight-ahead position on the
terminal.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
394
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Calibrating the axles
25.6
ð The "Introduction" window is displayed on the terminal.
„ To start the calibration process, press "Start calibration".
ð The "Straight-ahead position" window is displayed on the terminal.
„ With the help of the display (2) and the control lever accelerate the machine to 15 km/h.
„ Use the display (1) to ensure that the machine is travelling straight ahead.
When the arrow in the display (1) points to "0" then the machine is travelling straight ahead.
When the arrow in the display (1) points to "0":
„ Correcting the steering angle.
„ As soon as the "Completion" window appears on the terminal with the message "Calibration
successful", stop the machine.
„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".
Determining the steering stop positions
EQ003-837
Calibration is used to determine the steering stop positions.
ü The diesel engine has been started, see Page 167.
ü The main mode switch is in the "Neutral mode" position, see Page 99.
ü The parking brake is applied, see Page 175.
„ Open the menu Driving functions > Axles > Calibration > End stops on the terminal.
ð The "Introduction" window is displayed on the terminal.
„ To start the calibration process, press "Start calibration".
ð The "Right stop position" window is displayed on the terminal.
„ Turn the steering wheel clockwise until the right end stop is reached.
„ Acknowledge by pressing “OK”.
ð The "Left stop position" window is displayed on the terminal.
„ Turn the steering wheel anticlockwise until the left end stop is reached.
„ Acknowledge by pressing “OK”.
Æ The display shows the "Completion" window and the calibration is successfully completed.
„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
395
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.7
Calibrating cutting height
25.7
Calibrating cutting height
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine
During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.
„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration
process.
The horizontal position of the mowers is determined during calibration of the cutting height.
Front mounted mowers
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
The machine height is in field position, see Page 232.
The front mowing unit has been lowered onto the ground.
The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position, see Page 99.
The mowing functions "Cutting height calibration front mowing unit" menu has been opened
on the terminal.
„ Press
on the terminal.
„ Ensure that the position of the top link displayed on the terminal matches the actual position
of the top link.
ð The position of the top link displayed on the terminal matches the actual position of the
top link.
„ Press "OK" on the terminal.
ð The position of the top link displayed on the terminal does not match the actual position
of the top link.
„ Press "Cancel".
„ Set the parameter KMC-60 "Top link position" to the correct position in the Cutting
height "Settings" menu.
„ Restarting the calibration.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
396
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Calibrating cutting height
25.7
1
BM000-423
„ Position a spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar between 2 mowing discs.
„ Align the cutterbar horizontally by adjusting the cutting height on the terminal with
or
.
„ As soon as the cutterbar has been aligned horizontally, press "OK".
„ To complete calibration, press "OK".
Left side mounted mower
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
The machine height is in field position, see Page 232.
The left side mounted mower has been lowered onto the ground.
The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.
The mowing functions "Cutting height calibration left mower" menu has been opened on the
terminal.
„ Press
on the terminal.
1
BM000-423
„ Position a spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar between 2 mowing discs.
„ Align the cutterbar horizontally by adjusting the cutting height on the terminal with
or
.
„ As soon as the cutterbar has been aligned horizontally, press "OK".
„ To complete calibration, press "OK".
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
397
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.8
Finely calibrating the cutting height
Right side mounted mower
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
The machine height is in field position, see Page 232.
The right side mounted mower has been lowered onto the ground.
The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.
The mowing functions "Cutting height calibration right mower" menu has been opened on
the terminal.
„ Press
on the terminal.
1
BM000-423
„ Position a spirit level (1) transversely on the cutterbar between 2 mowing discs.
„ Align the cutterbar horizontally by adjusting the cutting height on the terminal with
or
.
„ As soon as the cutterbar has been aligned horizontally, press "OK".
„ To complete calibration, press "OK".
25.8
Finely calibrating the cutting height
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine
During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.
„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration
process.
The fine calibration optimises the cutting height adjustment of the mowers.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
398
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Calibrating inertial sensor (inclination sensor)
25.9
Front mounted mowers
ü The front mowing unit is in headland position.
ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.
ü The mowing functions "Cutting height fine calibration front mowing unit" menu has been
opened.
„ Press
on the terminal.
Æ Fine calibration is run.
„ To complete calibration, press "OK".
Left side mounted mower
ü The left side mounted mower is in headland position.
ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.
ü The mowing functions "Cutting height fine calibration left mower" menu has been opened.
„ Press
on the terminal.
Æ Fine calibration is run.
„ To complete calibration, press "OK".
Right side mounted mower
ü The right side mounted mower is in headland position.
ü The main mode switch is in the "Maintenance mode" position.
ü The mowing functions "Cutting height fine calibration right mower" menu has been opened.
„ Press
on the terminal.
Æ Fine calibration is run.
„ To complete calibration, press "OK".
25.9
Calibrating inertial sensor (inclination sensor)
For "inclination sensor" version
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine
During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.
„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration
process.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
399
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.10 Calibrating end positions of the mowers
The horizontal position of the machine is determined during calibration of the inertial sensor
(inclination sensor).
ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
ü The machine height is in field position, see Page 232.
ü The Driving functions menu "Traction drive inertial sensor" has been selected on the
terminal.
„ To start the calibration process, press
on the terminal.
„ To end the calibration process, press "OK".
25.10
Calibrating end positions of the mowers
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine
During the calibration process the machine may move unexpectedly and endanger people.
„ Ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the machine during the calibration
process.
This calibration determines the upper end positions and the working position of the mowers.
Front mounted mowers
ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
ü The machine height is in field position, see Page 232.
ü The mowing functions "Calibration front mounted mower" menu has been called up on the
terminal.
„ To start the calibration process, press
on the terminal.
„ To lower the front mowing unit into working position, press
on the control lever until
the front mowing unit is in the lower end position.
If the lower links of the front mowing unit do not lower evenly, control the lower links separately,
to do this:
„ Lower the left lower link by simultaneously pressing the
„ Lower the right lower link by simultaneously pressing the
key and the "M1" key.
key and the "M2" key.
„ Press "OK”.
„ To raise the front mowing unit, press
on the control lever until the front mowing unit is
in the upper end position.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
400
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Calibrating end positions of the mowers 25.10
If the lower links of the front mowing unit do not raise evenly, control the lower links separately,
to do this:
„ Raise the left lower link by simultaneously pressing the
„ Raise the right lower link by simultaneously pressing the
key and the "M1" key.
key and the "M2" key.
„ Press "OK”.
Left side mounted mower
ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
ü The machine height is in field position, see Page 232.
ü The mowing functions "Side mounted mowers calibration left mower" menu has been
opened.
„ Unlock the pendulum stop.
„ Lower both side mounted mowers onto the ground so that the machine is not at an incline.
„ Set the cutting height of the left side mounted mower to +2 °.
„ Close the swath hoods.
„ Lock the pendulum stop.
„ To start the calibration process, press
on the terminal.
„ To lower the left side mounted mower into working position, press
on the control lever
until the side mounted mower is in the lower end position.
„ Press "OK”.
„ To raise the left side mounted mower, press
on the control lever until the left side
mounted mower is in the upper end position.
„ Press "OK”.
Right side mounted mower
ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
ü The machine height is in field position, see Page 232.
ü The mowing functions "Side mounted mowers calibration right mower" menu has been
opened.
„ Unlock the pendulum stop.
„ Lower both side mounted mowers onto the ground so that the machine is not at an incline.
„ Set the cutting height of the right side mounted mower to +2 °.
„ Close the swath hoods.
„ Lock the pendulum stop. To start the calibration process, press
on the terminal.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
401
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.11 Car jack contact points
„ To lower the right side mounted mower into working position, press
on the control
lever until the side mounted mower is in the lower end position.
„ Press "OK”.
„ To raise the right side mounted mower, press
on the control lever until the side
mounted mower is in the upper end position.
„ Press "OK”.
25.11
Car jack contact points
WARNING
Risk of injury due to raised machine
There is danger to persons when the machine drops or parts swing without control. Only
qualified personnel are allowed to perform this work.
„ Use only permitted hoists and slings with a sufficient load-bearing capacity.
„ Note the information on the suspension points provided.
„ Make sure the lifting means are properly secured.
„ Never stay under the suspended machine.
„ If work has to be performed under the machine, securely support the machine, see
Page 33.
The car jack contact points may be used for changing wheels only; for reasons of stability, only
one car jack contact point may be used.
For jacking up the machine, see Page 403.
ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.
ü The axles are fully lowered.
ü The machine has been shut down and secured, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
402
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Jacking up the machine 25.12
1
2
3
BM000-439
1 Car jack contact point front axle on right
2 Car jack contact point front axle on left
25.12
3 Car jack contact point rear axle
Jacking up the machine
WARNING
Danger to life caused by machine movement!
If the machine is not raised by means of a suitable hoist and if it is not securely supported, it
may move unintentionally. As a result, persons can be seriously injured or killed.
Only qualified personnel are allowed to perform this work.
„ When selecting the hoist, observe the axle loads on the type plate.
„ Only use jack stands with a permitted load-carrying capacity of at least 15 tonnes.
„ Only use hoists and jack stands with suitable holder and sufficiently dimensioned
supporting surface.
„ Ensure sufficiently dimensioned contact surface for hoist and jack stand.
„ Securely support the raised machine, see Page 33.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
403
25
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25.12 Jacking up the machine
Jack up the front wheel
1
3
2
BM000-345
„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.
„ Lower the axles completely, see Page 97.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Depending on which front wheel is to be jacked up, position the hoist (1) on the relevant side
and insert it from the front under the front axle (3). In doing so, ensure that the jack stand is
positioned at the outer edge of the front axle.
„ Lift the front axle using the hoist (1) until the wheel can rotate freely.
„ Safely support the front axle (3) on the lifted side using a jack stand (2) at the furthest
possible outside point.
Jack up rear axle
2
1
1
3
3
4
BM000-348
„ Set the main mode switch to the "Maintenance mode" position.
„ Lower the axles completely, see Page 97.
„ Shut down and safeguard the machine, see Page 33.
„ Lift the machine with a hoist (4) from behind from below the middle of the rear axle (2) until
the distance between the rear wheels and the ground is approx. 5 cm.
„ Safely support the machine from the side by placing jack stands (1, 3) under the main
frame.
„ Remove the hoist (4).
ð The rear axle lowers slightly.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
404
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy
25
Jacking up the machine 25.12
1
2
2
1
3
4
3
BM000-090
NOTE! Damage to the machine by lifting the rear axle too high above the V-arm (1). Only
lift the rear axle above the V-arm (2) until the pendulum stop (3) is against the stop (2).
„ Lift the rear axle using a hoist (4) from the side (between the mower and rear axle) as far
back as possible below the V-arm (1) until the wheels can rotate freely.
1
2
BM000-091
„ Use at least one jack stand (2) below the rear axle (1) to ensure the widest possible safe
support.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
405
26
26
Waste disposal
Waste disposal
After the service life of the machine has expired, the individual components of the machine must
be disposed of properly. The currently applicable country-specific waste disposal guidelines and
the relevant laws must be observed.
Metal parts
•
•
•
All metal parts must be taken to a metal recycling centre.
Before scrapping, remove operating fluids and lubricants (e.g. gear oil, oil from the hydraulic
system) from the components.
The operating fluids and lubricants must be taken separately to an environmentally friendly
disposal point or recycling centre.
Operating fluids and lubricants
•
Operating fluids and lubricants (e.g. diesel fuel, coolant, gearbox oil, oil from hydraulic
system) must be taken to a waste oil disposal point.
Synthetic materials
•
All synthetic materials must be taken to a recycling centre for synthetic materials.
Rubber
•
All rubber parts (e.g. hoses, tyres) must be taken to a rubber recycling centre.
Electronic components
•
All electronic components must be taken to a disposal point for electronic scrap.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
406
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Index
27
27
Index
Icons
B
"Control units overview" menu.......................... 224
Basic safety instructions ..................................... 19
"Day counter" menu.......................................... 220
Batteries............................................................ 368
"Error history" menu ......................................... 223
Behavior in the case of voltage flashover of
overhead lines .................................................... 28
"Lighting" menu ................................................ 246
"Mirror" menu.................................................... 247
"Mirror" settings menu ...................................... 247
"Navigation scroll wheel" function..................... 200
Behaviour after the engine has stalled ............. 169
Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of
accidents............................................................. 33
Bringing up menu level ..................................... 241
“Active Errors” menu......................................... 222
“Counters” menu .............................................. 213
“Customer Counter” menu................................ 214
“Diagnostics” menu explanation ....................... 243
“Error” menu ..................................................... 222
“Total Counter” menu ....................................... 221
numerical
12 V sockets ..................................................... 108
A
Activating cruise control ................................... 172
Activating horn.................................................... 85
Actuating headlamp flasher ................................ 88
Actuating service brake ...................................... 90
Additional equipment and spare parts ................ 20
Adjustable air nozzles ...................................... 130
Adjusting GPS guidance .................................. 162
Adjusting overlapping and beds ....................... 163
Adjusting the scraper sheet .............................. 264
Adjusting track detection and steering response
......................................................................... 196
Airborne noise emission ..................................... 77
Air-cushioned comfort seat............................... 121
Ambient temperature .......................................... 77
Applicable documents ........................................ 12
Applying parking brake ..................................... 175
Automatic climate control ................................. 101
Automatic steering system ............................... 209
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
407
27
Index
Checking impact stops on the cutterbar ........... 338
C
Cabin ................................................................ 120
Calibrate mower load relief............................... 393
Checking kraftband................................... 310, 317
Checking lockings of lateral mowers ................ 166
Calibrate traction drive ..................................... 394
Checking pipework in the air conditioning and
heating system.................................................. 296
Calibrating cutting height .................................. 396
Checking pipework of the air intake.................. 297
Calibrating end positions of the mowers .......... 400
Checking pulley ........................................ 310, 318
Calibrating inertial sensor (inclination sensor).. 399
Checking side guards of lateral mowers........... 166
Calibrating the axles ......................................... 394
Checking the belt tension ................................. 311
Calibrating the rear axle straight-ahead position
......................................................................... 394
Checking the condition and filling quantity of
refrigerant ......................................................... 305
Car jack contact points ..................................... 402
Checking the engine coolant level .................... 295
Carrying out a visual inspection at the receiver/
dryer ................................................................. 305
Checking the fire extinguisher .......................... 314
Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter
element changes safely...................................... 34
Central lubrication unit
Checking the hub cover of the rear axle, with front
wheel drive version ........................................... 309
Checking the tines on the tine conditioner........ 326
Fill lubricant tank .................................... 358
Checking/adjusting the belt tension of the front
mounted mower conditioner drive..................... 318
Change kraftband "belt drive of front mounted
mower" ............................................................. 325
Checking/maintaining tyres............................... 312
Changing high-pressure filter ........................... 365
Changing kraftband “belt drive side mounted
mowers”............................................................ 322
Changing the oil ....................................... 377, 378
Changing/saving parameter ............................. 243
Checking/refilling windscreen washer system .. 302
Checking/replacing the blade carrier ................ 335
Checking/setting belt tension of auger drive..... 320
Checking/setting belt tension of fan drive and
exhaust fan ....................................................... 311
Charging batteries ............................................ 369
Checking/setting belt tension of rotating screen
drive .................................................................. 311
Check before start-up ....................................... 120
Checking/setting locking of side guards ........... 259
Check filling level.............................................. 359
Checklist for initial operation............................. 110
Check guard cloths........................................... 346
Chemicals ........................................................... 27
Check pipework of the engine cooling system and
the charge air ................................................... 297
Children in danger .............................................. 20
Check pipework of the exhaust aftertreatment
system .............................................................. 298
Cigarette lighter 12 V/24 V socket .................... 107
Cleaning air filter............................................... 299
Check/change blades ....................................... 330
Cleaning and maintaining batteries .................. 368
Check/replace cutting discs/mower drums ....... 339
Cleaning cooler and cooler compartment ......... 307
Check/replace retaining bolts ........................... 333
Cleaning dust discharge valve.......................... 300
Checking attachment of steering cylinder ........ 308
Cleaning engine compartment with compressed air
.......................................................................... 284
Checking deflector sheets ................................ 257
Checking engine oil level.................................. 285
Checking engine piping .................................... 296
Cleaning fuel tank ............................................. 287
Cleaning the machine ....................................... 281
Checking fitting of track rod .............................. 309
Cleaning the windows and outside rear-view
mirrors of the cabin ........................................... 302
Checking fuel lines ........................................... 298
Climbing up and down safely.............................. 30
Checking hydraulic hoses ................................ 365
Coming Home function ....................................... 94
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
408
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Index
Commissioning – mowing operation ................ 134
Components of air conditioning ........................ 304
Connecting a battery ........................................ 371
Connecting the front mounted mower .............. 134
Consumables ............................................... 26, 77
Contact ................................................................. 2
Contamination of hydraulic system and/or fuel
system ................................................................ 26
27
D
Damaged compressor unit.................................. 29
Damaged hydraulic hoses .................................. 30
Danger associated with welding work................. 32
Danger resulting from damage to the machine... 22
Danger when driving on road and field ............... 25
Danger zone between (self-propelled) mower
conditioner and mowers...................................... 23
Content of the storage compartments on the
machine .............................................................. 68
Danger zone due to trailing machine parts ......... 24
Control and Display Elements ............................ 82
Danger zone ejected objects .............................. 24
Control and display elements on the keypad ..... 97
Danger zone PTO shaft ...................................... 23
Control and display elements on the steering
column ................................................................ 85
Danger zone universal shaft ............................... 23
Control of moving machine................................. 21
Danger zones ..................................................... 22
Control of the machine during operation ............ 21
Dangers arising from environment...................... 27
Conversion table ................................................ 16
Dangers during road travel ................................. 25
Coolant ............................................................... 80
Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for
road travel........................................................... 25
Cooling box (version with "Insulated thermobox")
......................................................................... 132
Creating a surface ............................................ 217
Creating customer data record ......................... 214
Cross references ................................................ 13
Cruise control ................................................... 172
Cutterbar .......................................................... 327
Cutterbar side mounted mowers ...................... 344
Danger zone when drive is switched on ............. 24
Dangers in connection with certain activities:
checking and charging batteries ......................... 32
Dangers in connection with certain activities:
climbing up and down ......................................... 30
Dangers in connection with certain activities:
Working on the machine ..................................... 31
Dangers in connection with certain activities:
working on wheels and tyres .............................. 32
Dangers when operating the machine on slopes 26
Data memory ...................................................... 66
Deactivating cruise control................................ 173
Decoupling the front mounted mower............... 138
Deleting a surface............................................. 218
Description display............................................ 199
Description of the keys ..................................... 200
Determining the steering stop positions............ 395
Diagnostics sockets .......................................... 109
Dimensions ......................................................... 76
Direct input “Field mode” .................................. 226
Directories and references.................................. 13
Dirt deposits in engine compartment ................ 284
Disconnecting the batteries .............................. 369
Dismounting belt pulleys................................... 262
Dismounting the "swathing" components ......... 150
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
409
27
Index
Dismounting the bottom flap............................. 268
Dismounting the cross conveyor ...................... 157
F
Dismounting the side mounted mowers ........... 143
Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)
.......................................................................... 187
Dismounting the universal shaft from the front
mounted mower................................................ 139
Faults on the camera ........................................ 387
Dismounting the universal shaft on the side
mounted mower................................................ 146
Field mode on slopes........................................ 184
Field Mode ........................................................ 183
Dismounting/mounting the conditioner drive guard
......................................................................... 315
Figures................................................................ 13
Dismounting/mounting the guard for the front
mounted mower input gearbox ......................... 316
Finely calibrating the cutting height .................. 398
Dismounting/mounting the guard of the auger drive
......................................................................... 317
Fire hazard.......................................................... 27
Display design .................................................. 198
Fitting wheel chocks ......................................... 177
Display for acceleration behavior (1) ................ 230
Fold down the front guard................................. 191
Display for cruise control (5)............................. 232
Folding down side guards into working position
.......................................................................... 190
Distribution of traction....................................... 193
Distributor blocks of central lubrication system 388
Disturbances of the electrics/electronics .......... 381
Filling the lubricant tank .................................... 358
Fire extinguisher ................................................. 65
Folding up side guards into transport position .. 190
Folding up the front guard................................. 191
Folding up/folding down side guards ................ 189
Drain condensation water from the water separator
of the fuel prefilter............................................. 288
Front guard ....................................................... 191
Draining oil from the trailing oil line .................. 365
Front mounted mower cutterbar ....................... 341
Draining water and sediments .......................... 287
Fuel is harmful .................................................... 27
Drawer for first-aid kit and operating instructions
......................................................................... 132
Fuel prefilter/water separator............................ 288
Driver's seat...................................................... 121
Function description of swath width CV.............. 75
Driving and Transport ....................................... 165
Functional description of GNSS receiver............ 73
Driving backward and stopping ........................ 173
Functional description of GPS guidance............. 75
Driving forwards and stopping .......................... 171
Functional description of parallel tracking........... 74
E
Functional description of self-propelled mower
conditioner .......................................................... 73
Electrical system ................................................ 77
Engine and driving data display range ............. 227
Engine coolant.................................................. 294
Fuel/urea............................................................. 80
G
General aspects................................................ 131
Engine data ........................................................ 76
Engine oil level ................................................. 284
H
Engine overview ............................................... 283
Hot liquids ........................................................... 29
Ensuring functionality of safety devices ............. 24
Hot surfaces........................................................ 30
Environmental protection and disposal .............. 27
How to use this document .................................. 13
External starting of the machine ....................... 392
Hydraulic oil ...................................................... 362
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
410
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Index
27
I
K
Icons in figures ................................................... 14
Keep cabin free of chemicals.............................. 27
Icons in the text .................................................. 13
Keypad for wiper and warning beacon ............... 92
Identification number .......................................... 69
Keys in the title bar ........................................... 213
Ignition lock ...................................................... 100
Impact damage protection system ................... 267
L
Importance of operating instructions .................. 19
Labelling ............................................................. 69
Inclination sensor ............................................. 193
Ladder lighting .................................................... 93
Increasing cutting height at front mounted mower
with high-cut skids ............................................ 255
Lashing the machine......................................... 182
Increasing the cutting height at the side mounted
mowers by means of high-cut skids ................. 265
Indicator and warning lamps .............................. 89
Indicator lamp for direction of travel and parking
brake (2) ........................................................... 231
Leaving Home function ....................................... 93
Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines
............................................................................ 28
Lifting points on the mowers ............................. 348
Lighting ............................................................... 70
Indicator lamp for machine height (6) ............... 232
Lighting and labeling......................................... 121
Indicator lamp for PowerSplit (3) ...................... 231
Lighting for refuelling .......................................... 94
Indicator lamp for traction control system (TC) (4)
......................................................................... 231
Liquids under high pressure ............................... 29
Information area ............................................... 227
Location and meaning of the safety signs .......... 35
Information for enquiries and orders .................... 2
Location of the vehicle identification number...... 69
Information on direction ...................................... 13
Locking screws on the gearboxes .................... 280
Information on This Document ........................... 12
Lubricants ......................................................... 357
Information signs on the machine ...................... 55
Lubricate the intermediate gear ........................ 353
Initial operation ................................................. 110
Lubricating grease .............................................. 80
Input window .................................................... 201
Lubricating universal shafts .............................. 351
Inside rear mirror .............................................. 131
Lubrication chart - machine .............................. 354
Location and meaning of the information signs .. 56
Installing batteries ............................................ 371
Instructional seat .............................................. 131
Intended use....................................................... 18
Interior lighting .................................................... 94
J
Jack up rear axle .............................................. 404
Jack up the front wheel .................................... 404
Jacking up the machine.................................... 403
Jobs on the machine .......................................... 21
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
411
27
Index
M
Machine Description ........................................... 67
Machine number................................................. 69
Machine overview............................................... 67
Main battery switch........................................... 178
Main menu........................................................ 226
Main mode switch............................................... 99
Maintain main gearbox of side mounted mowers
......................................................................... 378
Maintenance - every 250 hours ........................ 275
Maintenance – Every 4500 hours ..................... 278
Maintenance - Every 50 hours.......................... 274
Maintenance - Every 500 hours........................ 275
Maintenance - Gearbox .................................... 373
Maintenance - General Information .................. 269
Maintenance - Hydraulic System ...................... 361
Maintenance - Lubrication ................................ 351
Maintenance – mowing units ............................ 315
Maintaining air conditioning and heating .......... 303
Maintenance - once after 1 hour....................... 272
Maintaining belt drives.............................. 310, 317
Maintenance – Once after 1,000 km................. 273
Maintaining chassis .......................................... 308
Maintenance – Once after 10 hours ................. 272
Maintaining hydraulic oil tank ........................... 362
Maintenance - Once after 50 hours .................. 272
Maintaining input gearbox of front mounted mower
......................................................................... 376
Maintenance – Once after 500 hours ............... 273
Maintaining main gearbox of front mounted mower
......................................................................... 377
Maintenance lighting........................................... 71
Maintaining starter ............................................ 372
Maintaining the charge ..................................... 369
Maintaining transfer gearbox ............................ 374
Maintaining tyres and wheels ........................... 312
Maintenance and repair work ............................. 31
Maintenance table ............................................ 270
Malfunction, Cause and Remedy...................... 381
Malfunctions in the central lubrication unit........ 388
Malfunctions indicated on display ..................... 106
Maintaining wheel hub gearbox........................ 379
Malfunctions indicated on malfunction warning
panel ................................................................. 209
Maintaining wheel hub gearbox front/right ....... 379
Manual settings................................................. 249
Maintenance – 6 times after every 10 hours .... 272
Manually setting the evaporator fan speed....... 105
Maintenance – After the season....................... 271
Means of representation ..................................... 13
Maintenance - as required................................ 278
Menu "key test" explanation ............................. 245
Maintenance – at the beginning of the cold season
......................................................................... 273
Menu structure.................................................. 233
Maintenance – Basic Machine ......................... 302
Metric thread screws with control thread .......... 278
Maintenance – Before the season.................... 270
Metric thread screws with countersunk head and
hexagon socket................................................. 280
Maintenance – Central Lubrication System...... 357
Metric thread screws with fine thread ............... 279
Maintenance – Electrics ................................... 367
Mirror adjuster..................................................... 91
Maintenance - Engine ...................................... 283
Mounting / dismounting "swath width CV"
components ...................................................... 152
Maintenance - every 1,000 hours but at least at the
end of the season ............................................. 276
Maintenance – Every 1,000 hours, but at least
before the season............................................. 277
Maintenance - Every 10 hours, but at least once a
day.................................................................... 273
Maintenance - every 100 hours ........................ 274
Maintenance – Every 2 years ........................... 278
Maintenance – Every 2,000 hours.................... 277
Mounting components "swathing"..................... 147
Mounting fire extinguisher................................. 111
Mounting guard cloths ...................................... 113
Mounting licence plate ...................................... 112
Mounting the anti-twist lock on the lighting module
.......................................................................... 119
Mounting the belt pulleys .................................. 263
Mounting the cross conveyor............................ 154
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
412
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Index
Mounting the rear weight .................................. 160
Mounting the side mounted mowers ................ 140
27
O
Observe the service record booklet .................. 269
Mounting the universal shaft on the front mounted
mower shaft ...................................................... 137
Observing indicator and warning lamps............ 169
Mounting the universal shaft on the side mounted
mower............................................................... 143
Oil level inspection and oil change on the cutter
bar..................................................................... 341
Moving front mounted mower into the central
position ............................................................. 185
Oils...................................................................... 78
Moving support jack into support position ........ 193
Moving support jack into transport position ...... 192
N
On-board instructors when using the machine for
work (passenger seat) ........................................ 21
Only perform work when the machine is at
standstill.............................................................. 31
Opening doors and windows of cabin................. 82
Opening right side window.................................. 82
Navigating in menus ......................................... 242
Opening the cabin door ...................................... 83
Navigation module............................................ 199
Navigation scroll wheel..................................... 200
Opening/closing conditioning sheet side mounted
mowers ............................................................. 316
Noise may damage your health.......................... 29
Operate input window ....................................... 202
Notices on driving the machine ........................ 171
Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for
"ACTIVO" version) ............................................ 124
Notices with information and recommendations. 15
Operating air-cushioned comfort seat (for
"Standard" version) ........................................... 122
Operating driver's seat (for ACTIVO version) ... 124
Operating driver's seat (for standard version)... 122
Operating elements on control lever................... 95
Operating GPS guidance.................................. 196
Operating mowers ............................................ 185
Operating SectionControl ................................. 195
Operating support jack...................................... 192
Operation .......................................................... 183
Operation alphanumeric input field ................... 215
Operation only after proper commissioning ........ 21
Operational safety: Technically sound condition 21
Overload protection on the machine................... 72
Overview of actuators ....................................... 386
Overview of automatic climate control .............. 101
Overview of control units .................................. 381
Overview of fuses ............................................. 381
Overview of gearboxes ..................................... 373
Overview of operating elements ......................... 82
Overview sensors ............................................. 385
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
413
27
Index
P
R
Parking the machine......................................... 179
Raised machine and machine parts ................... 31
Parking the machine safely ................................ 26
Raising mowers ................................................ 348
Passengers ........................................................ 21
Re-adjust the transport lock.............................. 313
Performing a visual inspection ......................... 365
Reasonably foreseeable misuse......................... 18
Personal protective equipment ........................... 24
Recommended procedure ................................ 195
Personnel qualification of the operating personnel
........................................................................... 19
Recovering the Machine ................................... 179
Personnel qualification of the technicians .......... 20
Possible terminals ............................................ 201
PowerSplit ........................................................ 193
Preparing the machine for road travel .............. 165
Preparing the machine for shipment ................ 181
Pressure limiting valves.................................... 361
Q
Quick-stop switch ............................................. 100
Refrigerant (air conditioning) .............................. 80
Refuelling.......................................................... 289
Release the parking brake manually ................ 180
Relieving/tensioning belt drive of auger drive ... 321
Removing and mounting swath flaps right/left .. 256
Removing batteries........................................... 370
Removing the machine wheels......................... 182
Removing the rear weight................................. 161
Renaming surface............................................. 217
Re-ordering......................................................... 12
Replacing batteries ........................................... 369
Replacing the shear bolt at the rotary hub........ 329
Replacing/cleaning circulation filter .................. 307
Replacing/cleaning fresh air filter...................... 306
Retighten wheel nuts ........................................ 312
Road safety......................................................... 25
Road travel lighting ............................................. 70
Rotary hub ........................................................ 327
Running actuator test.......................................... 34
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
414
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
Index
S
Safety ................................................................. 18
Safety features ................................................... 62
Safety routines ................................................... 33
Safety sign on the machine .......................... 25, 35
Save cutting height 1 and cutting height 2 ....... 250
Saving mower relief 1 and mower relief 2 ........ 252
Saving speed for operation with cruise control. 172
Scope of the document ...................................... 13
Searching for the error in the central lubrication
system .............................................................. 392
27
Shutting down the diesel engine....................... 300
Side shift front mounted mower ........................ 193
Significance of the document.............................. 12
SMV emblem ...................................................... 64
Sockets ............................................................. 107
Sources of danger on the machine..................... 29
Starting and stopping surface counter .............. 219
Starting engine.................................................. 167
Starting intermediate lubrication ....................... 359
Starting up the machine.................................... 170
Start-up ............................................................. 120
SectionControl .................................................. 209
Status line ......................................................... 206
SectionControl function description .................... 74
Steering column adjustment ............................. 128
Securing raised machine and machine parts
against lowering ................................................. 33
Steering column switch....................................... 85
Selection window.............................................. 203
Stopping machine with the service brake ......... 175
Service life of the machine ................................. 19
Stopping the machine ....................................... 173
Set conditioner speed....................................... 254
Structural modifications on the machine............. 20
Setting cabin temperature ................................ 103
Sun visor........................................................... 130
Setting cutting height ........................................ 250
Switching air conditioning mode on/off ............. 104
Setting driver’s seat .......................................... 121
Switching direction indicators on/off ................... 86
Setting in the terminal....................................... 249
Switching full beam on/off................................... 87
Setting swath width .......................................... 256
Switching off the engine.................................... 177
Setting the acceleration behaviour ................... 170
Switching on automatic climate control............. 102
Setting the anti-collision mirror ........................... 91
Setting the auger speed ................................... 260
Switching parking light, dipped beam and work
lightings on/off..................................................... 86
Setting the conditioner speed ........................... 260
Switching REHEAT mode on/off....................... 104
Setting the degree of conditioning ............ 255, 265
Switching temperature display between degrees
Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit....................... 106
Setting the lifting height at the front mounted
mower............................................................... 257
Stopping machine by using control lever .......... 174
Switching the flashing warning light on/off.......... 90
Setting the mower relief.................................... 251
Switching the mower drive on and off............... 188
Setting the side guards on the front mounted
mower............................................................... 253
Switching windshield wipers on/off ..................... 88
Setting the side guards on the side mounted
mowers ............................................................. 258
Setting the terminal .......................................... 129
Setting wide spreading ............................. 255, 266
Setting wide spreading sheet ........................... 267
Settings ............................................................ 249
Settings on front mounted mower .................... 253
Settings on the side mounted mowers ............. 258
Shutting down and safeguarding the machine ... 33
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
415
27
Index
T
W
Target group of this document ........................... 12
Warning lamps – load condition diesel particulate
filter ................................................................... 212
Technical Data ................................................... 76
Technical limit values ......................................... 22
Technically permitted maximum speed (road
travel) ................................................................. 76
Technically sound state of the machine ............. 21
Warning lamps – urea quality, errors or
manipulation on the exhaust aftertreatment system
.......................................................................... 211
Warning lamps – urea tank filling level ............. 210
Warning lamps for engine and fuel levels......... 228
Tensioning/detensioning the conditioner drive belt
tension front mounted mower ........................... 319
Warning signs ..................................................... 14
Term “machine” .................................................. 13
Warnings of property damage/environmental
damage............................................................... 15
Terminal ........................................................... 198
Terminal – Menus............................................. 233
Terminal machine functions ............................. 205
Tighten the screw connections on the central
support/chassis ................................................ 313
Tightening torques............................................ 278
Top up the engine coolant ................................ 295
Topping up engine oil ....................................... 286
Waste disposal ................................................. 406
Working at or on heights of the machine ............ 31
Working lights ..................................................... 71
Working position ............................................... 184
Y
Your dealer's contact details................................. 2
Topping up fresh water..................................... 132
Topping up urea solution .................................. 291
Toxic exhaust gases........................................... 30
Traction drive...................................................... 77
Traction drive indicator lights............................ 230
Transport position............................................. 165
Type plate........................................................... 69
Tyres................................................................... 80
U
Unsuitable consumables .................................... 26
Urea filter .......................................................... 290
USB connection................................................ 109
V
Validity ................................................................ 12
Vehicle identification number ............................. 69
Vent friction clutch ............................................ 346
Venting the fuel prefilter/water separator ......... 293
Vibration values .................................................. 77
Viewing current surface data ............................ 219
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
416
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
This page has been left blank deliberately.
BiG M 450 CV Stufe 5
Original operating instructions 150001101_09_us
417
Maschinenfabrik
Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG
* Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10
D-48480 Spelle
* Postfach 11 63
D-48478 Spelle
' +49 (0) 59 77 / 935-0
6 +49 (0) 59 77 / 935-339
V.10
ü www.landmaschinen.krone.de

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement